Sap Abap Stream

1 Full Buffering would be appropriate for
A. Transaction Tables
B. Small Static tables
C. Internal Tables
D. Tables with generic Keys
2 What is the basic object of data Dictionary

A. Domains
B. Documentation
C. Data Models
D. Dynpro
3 Search help can not be attach to:

A. Domain
B. field of a table
C. check table
D. Type
4 Sub query usually more efficient because:

A. data is filtered in the database
B. data is filtered on the network
C. data is filtered in the sapgui
D. data is filtered at the application server
5 It is better to buffer a table when

A. When a table is read infrequently
B. When a table is linked to check tables
C. When a table is read frequently and the data seldom changes
D. When a single record is to be picked up
6 In Inner and outter join

A. buffers are always used
B. Choice of buffer can be made to use
C. buffers are always bypassed
D. None of above
7 What is invalid attribute of a domain

A. Type
B. Fixed values
C. Length
D. Header
8 Data element is an example of

A. Physical Definition
B. Business Object
C. Semantic Domain
D. Technical Domain
9 What is true
A. A view contains data
B. Views can be buffered
C. Views can not be buffered
D. None of above
10 Command flushes the database buffers

A. $TAB
B. $RESET
C. $INIT
D. $FREE
11 How many lists can exist in parallel in an interactive reporting?

A. An Interactive report can have 1 basic list and up to 20 Secondary lists.
B. An Interactive report can have 1 basic list and up to 19 Secondary lists.
C. An Interactive report can have 1 basic list and up to 19 Secondary lists.
D. An Interactive report can have 1 basic list and up to 21 Secondary lists.
12. What are the check tables and value tables? (Multiple Answer)
A. Check table will be at field level checking.
B. Value table will be at domain level checking
C Value table will be at field level checking
D. Check table will be at domain level checking.
13.What are presentation and application servers in SAP? (Multiple Answer)

A. Application server is actually a program named Sapgui.exe. It is usually installed On a user’s
workstation.
B. Application server is a set of executables that collectively interpret the ABAP/4 Programs and
manage the input & output for them.
C. Presentation server is actually a program named Sapgui.exe. It is usually installed On a user’s
workstation.
D. Presentation server is a set of executables that collectively interpret the ABAP/4 Programs and manage
the input & output for them.
14.What is the difference between Synchronous and Asynchronous updates? (Multiple Answer)
A. In synchronous processing, the program waits: control returns to the program only when the task
has been completed.
B. In asynchronous processing, the program does not wait: the system returns control after merely
logging the request for execution.
C. In asynchronous processing, the program waits: control returns to the program only when the task has
been completed.
D. In synchronous processing, the program does not wait: the system returns control after merely logging
the request for execution.
15.What are the main events an interactive report have? (Multiple Answer)
A. Top-of-page during line selection.
B. At line-selection.
C. At user-command.
D. AT New
16.How many types of tables exist in data dictionary? (Multiple Answer)

A. Transparent tables
B. Internal Table
C. Pool tables
D. Hash Table
E. Cluster tables
F. Master Data Table
17. What is the difference between UPLOAD and WS_UPLOAD? (Multiple Answer)
A. WS_UPLOAD - File transfer with dialog from presentation server file to internal table. Data which is
available in a file on the presentation server is transferred in an internal table. ASCII & Binary files can be
transferred.
B. UPLOAD - To read data from the presentation server into an internal table without a user dialog, use the
function module WS_UPLOAD. The most important parameters are listed below.
C. UPLOAD - File transfer with dialog from presentation server file to internal table. Data which is
available in a file on the presentation server is transferred in an internal table. ASCII & Binary files
can be transferred.
D.WS_UPLOAD - To read data from the presentation server into an internal table without a user
dialog, use the function module WS_UPLOAD. The most important parameters are listed below.
18.Is Session Method, Asynchronous or Synchronous?

A. Asynchronous
B. Synchronous
C. Synchronous and Asynchronous
D. None of above
19. What are the differences between SAP memory and ABAP memory? (Multiple Answer)
A. SAP Memory is a memory area in the internal session (roll area) of an ABAP program. Data within this
area is retained within a sequence of program calls, allowing you to pass data between programs that call
one another. It is also possible to pass data between sessions using SAP Memory.
B. ABAP Memory is a memory area to which all sessions within a SAPgui have access. You can use SAP
memory either to pass data from one program to another within a session (as with ABAP memory) or to
pass data from one session to another.
C.ABAP Memory is a memory area in the internal session (roll area) of an ABAP program. Data
within this area is retained within a sequence of program calls, allowing you to pass data between
programs that call one another. It is also possible to pass data between sessions using SAP Memory.
D.SAP Memory is a memory area to which all sessions within a SAPgui have access. You can use
SAP memory either to pass data from one program to another within a session (as with ABAP
memory) or to pass data from one session to another.
20. Which data type cannot be used to define parameters.

A. Type N
B. Type C
C. Type F
D. Type P
NEW DUMPS
1. TCode for Layout set?

SE71
2. Other names for layout set?

Form Painter, SAP Script Painter or even SE71
3. TCode for Menu Painter?

SE41
4. TCode for Screen Painter?

SE51
5. TCode for Standard text element creation?

SO10
6. TCode for global class builder?

SE24
7. Table containing standard texts?

TTDTG
8. Difference between printer modes (Simplex, Duplex and Tumbled Duplex).

Answer is bit detailed. So, I have not given the answer here.
9. Program to load images into SAP system for usage in SAP Scripts?
RSTXLDMC.
10. Command used to print several lines in same page (that is, same paragraph)?
PROTECT…ENDPROTECT
11. There can not be more than one Main window in a page. True or False?
False
12. Which of the following can be included in the flow logic of a screen?
a. PBO
b. PAI
c. POV
d. POH
Ans: All of the above.
13. TCode for Output Type Configuration (also known as Output Determination
Configuration)?
NACE
14. Superscripts and Subscripts are used in?

Character formats.
15. Mandatory basic settings for a SAP Script?

First Page and Default Paragraph
16. Function Modules generated when lock objects are created will be in the form of -
ENQUEUE and DEQUEUE
17. Output of the given loop:

DO 5 TIMES.
HIDE SY-INDEX.
WRITE SY-INDEX.
ENDDO.
Ans: 1 2 3 4 5
18. Which data type can not be used for parameter declaration?
a. D
b. N
c. C
d. F
Ans: F
19. System variable for current Screen Number?

SY-DYNNR
20. Table for print programs and SAP Script names?

TNAPR
21. Which variable is used to store the number of loop counter for looping over the table
control?
SY-LOOPL
22. TCode for Transaction Variant?

SHD0
23. Forms can have only one main window between different pages. True or False?
False
24. SAP Scripts are used to -

Print form data
25. TCode to define Barcode?

SE73 (also known as SAP Font Maintenance)
26. TCode for uploading images as “.BMP” images into SAP system?
SE78
27. Program to Import and Export Sap Scripts

RSTXSCRP
28. Sub-screens do not have their own GUI Status. True or False?
True
29. Setting Screen attribute REQUEST does what?

I will explain in the class room itself
30. Setting screen attribute ACTIVE as 0 is equal to what?

31. Difference between the CALL SCREEN and LEAVE TO SCREEN statements.
No need to mention the answer here as this is discussed many a times.
32. If “SET PF-STATUS = SPACE” is not executed before calling a list from screen, what
happens?
The GUI Status of the calling screen itself is used for the list also
33. TCode for searching BAPI?

BAPI (TCode itself is BAPI)
34. TCode for Workbench Organizer?

SE09
35. What does TCode SE01 stands for?

Extended Transport Organizer
Note: SE10 is the TCode for Transport Organizer
36. TCode for saving SQL Trace into a local PC?

%PC + Enter <or> %PC + Ctrl/S
37. Different types of traces available.

SQL, RFC, Buffer and Enqueue Trace
38. Static screen sequence can be achieved through:

Setting the “Next Screen” attribute for every screen in the Screen Attributes tab
39. How to exit the List Processing?

By using the syntax LEAVE LIST PROCESSING
Note: It is not LEAVE TO LIST PROCESSING
40. Program to process BDC Sessions in background?

RSBDCSUB
NEW DUMPS
1 which has highest precendence
ANS SEARCH HELP AT FIELD LEVEL.
2 Wht cannot b created from se11 ABAP Data dic

Function Pools(Fuction groups)
3 For structures like tables must have primary key?

ANS TRUE
4 Where can we see the o/p of the background processes?

ANS SP01
5 How can u view the short dump(run time errors)?

st22
6 Which Of the following is client dependent?

LAyout Forms
7 Select All Entries is used for?

To avoid too much use of select statement in loop.
8 Invalid Data type?

HEX
9 <> means?
Not equal to
10 TABLE FOR TRANSACTION codes

TSTC
11 The search help of a selection screen field can be decided upon by the clause:
matchcode object
12 what is the name of the system variable that stores content of entire
line wher double click has occured
sy-lisel
13 Exit statement
exits the current loop
14 An ABP report is selecting data from MARA and stroring in GT_MARA.

GT_MARA is being read with key MATNR in the loop of another internal table.The best performance of
read statement
is achieved by declaring GT_MARA as:
hash table
15 A table T000 contains

client data
16 conversion exit of a data variable is attached to

domain
17 what are diff data we store in SAP system?

Master data
b.Transaction data
c.Customizing data
d.System data
e.All of the above
18 Transaction variants are:

For customizing the transaction
19 ABAP is ---fourth---- generation language
20 Find the wrong stmt

A field of a structure can be made a foreign key
21 The value 03 in the ACTVT field of an authority check stmt wud autorise user to ----------the object
Display
22 Which instr is used to move contents of an internal table to a file on the application server
TRANSFER
23 HOw can you supress default title of a list

no std page heading
24 Time as per the user time zone is stored in the system variable
sy-timlo
25 the trans code for sql trace is

ST05
26 ranges: r_matnr for mara-matnr would create a

an internal table with four fields sign,option,low,high
27 HIDE command in report is used to:

retain content of field with output line
28 there is an internal table with fields A,B,C in that sequence.The statement

AT NEW B wud be triggered on
Change in A
29 The trans code to view a data model is
SD11
30 Programs are
a.Client independendent
31 If the type specification is missing the field is of type

character
32 What are the most important precaution one shud take for using the "FOR ALL ENTRIES" command
ans :Before the select ,check if the internal table used in "FOR ALL ENTRIES " clause is not empty
33 What is true about extract sets/fields groups

They store data in compressed forms
34 In SAP R/3 which one of these allocates the resources in application layer.
Dispatcher
35 Which of the foll is/are client dependent

Layout forms
36 Find the odd man otu:

Each session has its own own ABAp memory area
37 Syntax for Native SQL

Exec…End Exec
38 Authority check is performed by ABAP using:

Authority-Check
39 Selection screen is?

An interface between program and user
40 Which FM is used to transfer the data from the Presentation Server to Application Server?
GUI_UPLOAD
NEW DUMPS
(More than one answer is correct)
In the program editor, set breakpoint

In Development workbench, set breakpoint
Put a break-point statement in your program code
Start program in background mode
locally
only called programs
only the current program
named programs
I
F
P
N
D
X
built in ABAP types

Interface Parameters
Formal Parameters
ABAP Dictionary object
More than one answer is correct)
Dictionary Trace
CATT
Debugger
SQL Trace
Customizing
DATA: result TYPE I.
result = 5 / 10.
result = .5
result = 0
result = 2
result = 1
formal parameter takes on the type of the actual parameter

Conversion routines from the Domain are executed
Conversion routines from the Data Element are executed
Syntax Error
MOVE-CORRESPONDING
ASSIGN
MOVE_CORRESPONDING
MOVE
Objects created using the IMG are stored in the repository

It stores client-specific objects
Objects in the repository can be viewed across clients
It stores development objects
defined by Basis
10
0
unlimited
When they are generated

When they are assigned to a transportable development class
When they are executed
When they are activated
?????
It remains in the buffer
It remains in the database
It gets rolled out
It get rolled in
Report ABC.
Data:……
Start-of-Selection.
Perform Form A.
End-of-Selection.
Form A.
Do 10 Times.
A = A + 1.
….
Enddo.
Endform.

Reject
EXIT
CHECK with a false expression
Continue
Loop at itab.
ctr = ctr + 1
write: sy-tabix.
check ctr = 3.
delete itab
endloop.
12345
1234
1245
12334
Report ZPROGA.
Data: fielda type c.
Call Function Z_TEST_FUNCTION

Exporting fielda = fielda
Exceptions No_Entry = 01
Failure = 02.
If sy-subrc = 01.
Message E123.
Endif.
Function Z_TEST_FUNCTION
Importing f_fielda
Exporting f_fieldb
Exceptions No_Entry
Failure
Message E123 Raising No_Entry

In Function Z_TEST_FUNCTION
It willl abend in the runtime system
In Program ZPROGA and Function Z_TEST_FUNCTION
In Program ZPROGA
Exceptions Parameter 'RETURN'

Dictionary Structure BAPIRET2
Export Parameter 'sy-subrc'
Export Parameter 'RETURN'
T
F
N
C
D
Types: t_mytab type lfa1 of standard table.

Type: t_mytab type lfa1.
Types: t_mytab type lfa1.
Types: t_mytab like lfa1.
sy-index
sy-dbcnt
sy-subrc
sy-tabix
Functions
Forms
Neither
Both
They all set sy-fdpos
The actual type of each operand determines how the string processing is performed
They all set sy-subrc
They all treat the operands as type C regardless of their actual type
They all distinguish between upper and lower case
Parameters
Tables
Class
Data
Selection-Screen
When the developer releases the task

When the developer releases the change request
When the project manager releases the task
When the project manager releases the change request
At the beginning of program processing

When the processing block has ended
At the End-of-Selection event
When the user presses the exit key
Domains
Data elements
Record structures
Global fields
Title
Application
Type
Program Name
Status
Smallest units in ABAP

Processing units that execute based on their position in the source code
An active section of program code
Processing areas for the Global Data of a program
4
2
8
unlimited
If Text Element 001 is not in your login language, then 'Hello' is displayed
Write out 'Hello' and the contents of text element 001
Add the variable 'Hello' to message 001
This is not a valid statement
the program must be activated

the data objects must be activated
data objects must be activated in the dictionary
the fields attributes have to be manually defined in the screen painter
Smaller and simpler Programs

Increased Database Load
Stored calculated values on the presentation server
Object oriented Programming
Reuseability
On Include Programs
When objects belong to development class $TMP
Whend comparing across instances
When the task is released
Type Checks
Menu trees
Variants
Complex Entries
Translation Utilities
In a PAI Module
Anywhere in the program
In a Function
In a Form Only
Module
Program Type
Event
Transaction
Processing resumes at the beginning of the next loop pass

Processing continues with the next processing block
The same processing block is re-executed
Processing continues with the next processing block
Types: begin of itab_structure,

Field1 type p,
Field2 type c,
Field3 type I,
Field4 type n,
end of itab_structure.
Data: itab type standard table of itab_structure.

Data: wa_itab type itab_structure.
Insert wa_itab into table itab.
At the beginning
in the correct sorted position
At the end
It can't be done
Optional parameters are allowed

The number of actual and formal parameters must be the same
Type checking is performed on parameters
When calling by value, the address of the actual paramter is passed to the form
The global data is reinitialized for each new call

The global data remains active for the duration of the function call only
Function modules from the same function group can access the global data when they are called
The global data remains available for the duration of the calling program
Keyed
Sorted
Indexed
Hashed
Data fielda value zbook-id

Data fielda like zbook-id
Data fielda(5) like zbook-id
Data fielda type c like zbook-id
In any processing unit i.e. Include, Method, Form
In a PBO module
Only before the Start-of-Selection event
Only before the first executable statement
Standard
Sorted
Key
Index
Hashed
Constants: C1(4) type C.

Constants: C1(4) type C like mytab-booking.
Constants: C1(4) type D.
Constants: C1(4) type C value 'ABCD'.
The statement immediately following the CATCH statement is executed in the event of an error
trapped by the CATCH statement
A CASE statement can be used to validate the value of the error class
A data variable defined with type X must be defined to receive the raised error code
An Endcatch statement is required
I
P
D
X
N
The Authority-check object must be in your profile

Fields of the Authority-check are optional
If you do not want to carry out a check for a field, it must contain the value "DUMMY"
T001
MSG
T010
T100
At Start-of-Selection event
After Initialization event
Prior to Initialization event
Before the Report Statement
Forms are less flexible and are guaranteed no chance of a run time error
Conversion never occurs
No effect
Conversion always occurs
Forms are more flexible but prone to a short dump if conversion does not work
By user
By repository class
By group
By development class
It is impemented as a function
It is an Object
Can be a method of an object
Can only be use inside SAP
It is an interface
Use the TABLE KEY option

Specify the INDEX
Sort the table first by the key
Specify the full key
Use UNIQUE KEY option
Select single * from MYTABLE with keys

Select * from MYTABLE where number = '01' Endselect.
Select * from MYTABLE where number = '01' and name = 'LISA'.
Select single * from MYTABLE where number = '01' and name = 'LISA'.
Data: ZFIELDA(5) type c value 'ABCDE'.

ZFIELDB(4) type c.
ZFIELDA = ‘XX’.
Clear ZFIELDA.
ZFIELDB = ZFIELDA.
ABCD
Spaces
BCDE
ABCDE
By Value
By Header Line
By Table
By Exception
Report ABC
Data: …..
Start-of-Selection.
Perform Form A.
End-of-Selection.
Form A.
Loop at inttab.
...
Exit.
Endloop.
Endform.
Exits the Loop

Exits the Form
Exits the Program
Exits the Start-of-Selection Event
All the lines of the table are initialized

The work area is intitialized
Nothing
All the lines of the table are deleted
Constructor
Class
Refresh
Destructor
defined by Basis
10
0
1
unlimited
ABAP Processor
Screen Processor
Dialog Processor
Database Interface
The Dispatcher
The Programmer
The User
The run time system
Z00
$TMP
Blank
Local
nothing
values
domain
data element

Parameters create a single field, Select-options create multiple fields
Select-options create a single field, Parameters create multiple fields
Parameters use the FOR statement, Select-Options use the Type statement
Select-options use the FOR statement, Parameters use the Type statement
Import
Export
Exceptions
Sy-SUBRC
Default
Value
Type
Like
SPLIT 'SAPDOMAIN' AT 'DO' INTO FIELD1 FIELD2.
Field1 contains 'DO', Field2 contains 'DOMAIN'

Field1 contains 'SAPDO', Field2 contains 'MAIN'
Field1 contains 'SAP', Field2 contains 'MAIN'
the return value assigned to the system exception is stored in sy-subrc

a runtime error causes the system to go to the ENDCATCH statement
a runtime error in a form called within a catch block is caught
the Others option catches any runtime errors not already assigned
Find
Back/Exit/Cancel
Save
Cut/Paste
sy-lsind
sy-list
sy-field
sy-listi
Dictionary Type
Data Object
Report Statement
Data Type
Read Table itab with Table Key K1

Read Table itab with sorted key k1
Read Table itab by binary key k1
Read Table itab by key K1
Parameter objects are a maximum of 30 characters in length

Lower Case is the default
You can use text elements with parameters
GETDETAIL
GETLIST
CREATEFROMDATA
UPDATEDETAIL
CREATELIST
Database
Dispatcher
Presentation
Application
At Line-Selection
Initialization
On Detail
Suppress Dialog
New-Page
Perform calculate_sales using amount.
FORM calculate_sales changing value(f_amount)
Formal parameter is copied to memory space of actual parameter at the end of the form
Formal Parameter f_amount is allocated it’s own memory space
The address of the actual parameter is passed to the formal parameter
Formal parameter is not copied to memory space of actual parameter
Refresh ITAB []
Refresh ITAB
Clear ITAB[]
Clear ITAB
Objects can change their class

Objects are an instance of a class
Classes are an instance of an object
Class is a template for an object
FZ
Y or Z
F
Y_ or Z_
Chain write ctr1 ctr2 ctr3.

Write: ctr1, ctr2, ctr3.
write ctr1: ctr2:ctr3.
write ctr1, ctr2, ctr3.
write: ctr1 ctr2 ctr3.
SY-TABIX
SY-LOOP
SY-INDEX
SY-DBCNT
In the type-pool builder

In the Dictionary
In the object navigator
In the ABAP program
Hashed
Standard
Keyed
Sorted
independent 3rd party development projects

small internal projects
to uniquely identify each object in a large project
Where only numbers are allowed and there is no need for arithmetic operations
Where there is a need for numbers, characters, and arithmetic operations
Where only numbers are allowed and there is a need for arithmetic operations

Field1 type p,
Field2 type c,
Field3 type I,
Field4 type n,
Data: itab type table of itab_structure.
Sort itab.
?????????????????????????????
Field1, Field3
Field2, Field4
Field2
Field1
2
4
1
size must be specified
Sorted
Standard
Keyed
Hashed
DATA: result TYPE p DECIMALS 2.
Result = '3000.00' * '0.30'.
result = 900.00
result = 9000000
result = 900.0000
result = 90000.00 .
TADIR
TSTC
In the repository
TRDIR
in ABAP Programs
Repository
ABAP Workbench
Dictionary
Groups up to 10 authorization fields in an AND relationship

Groups up to 10 authorization fields in an OR relationship
Authorization Objects contain permissable values for the fields
Input validation
Security checking
Hiding input fields
Pre-assigning values
Types: begin of rec_type,

flag type c,
count(3) type c,
today type d,
end of rec_type.
Data: input_record type rec_type.

4 bytes
0 bytes
5 bytes
12 bytes
non unique
Unique
keyed
index
generic
An authorization is defined in the program attributes

It is attached to profiles
Defines permissable values for each authorization field listed in the authorization object
CONSTRUCTOR
SET_TABLE_FOR_FIRST_DISPLAY
REFRESH_TABLE_DISPLAY
SET_TABLE_FOR_DISPLAY
for graphic symbols on screens and lists

for re-assigning field types
for referencing an address of a field
for referencing multiple fields at the same time
When you release the task

When the object is deleted
When you change development class
Data: Fielda type i value 1.

Perform Calculate_Sales.
Fielda = fielda + 1.
write:/ fielda.
Form Calculate_Sales.
Data: Fielda type I value 2.
Fielda = Fielda + 2.
Endform.
5
3
4
2
1
Hashed
Sorted
Standard
Key
Indented
Check Permission
Authority-Check
Check sy-subrc
Check Authority
A run time error for dynamically defined fields

A run time error for statically defined fields
A syntax error for dynamically defined fields
A syntax error for statically defined fields
?????????????
The text symbols

The logon language
The user master record
The logon screen
Import Parameters
Export Parameters
Exceptions
User dialogs
At the End-of-Selection event

At the beginning of program processing
When the user presses the exit key
When the processing block has ended
Data: B type I value 1,

C(3) type c value 'ABC'.
B = 10.
C = 'XYZ'.
Clear B.
Clear C.
B = 10, C = 'XYZ'
B = 1, C = 'ABC'
B = 0, C = spaces
B = 1, C = spaces
Call Function 'MYFUNCTION'

exporting
e1 = p1
importing
i1 = p2
Program is suspended
Program continues
Message occurs
Runtime error
Declarations
Event
Dialog Module
Function

Field1 type p,
Field2 type c,
Field3 type I,
Field4 type n,
Data: itab type standard table of itab_structure.

Data: wa_itab type itab_structure.
Clear wa_itab
Initialize itab
Clear itab
Initialize wa_itab
Error Class
Development Class
Case
Catch Class
Hides the code between keywords

Reduces the size of the generated load module
Limits the functionality of runtime analysis to base features
Provides the ability to powertype key words
in the USER01 table

In the tauth table
In the user master record
In the users own data
Breaks the sort sequence

Syntax error
Uses linear search rather than binary
Program abend
Data: ZFIELDA type c

Types: ZFIELDA type I
Constants: ZFIELDA type n
Data: ZFIELDA type n
Types: Begin of line,
...
End of Line.
Types IT_LINE Type Standard table of line.
Data IT TYPE IT_LINE.
Perform FORMA using IT
FORM FORMA Using P_IT like IT_LINE
FORM FORMA Using P_IT type IT_LINE
FORM FORMA Using P_IT like LINE
FORM FORMA Using P_IT like LINE
warning sign
info sign
stop sign
highlighted line
Statements must fit on one line

Each word must end with a period
Words must always be separated by at least one space
Multiple statements are not allowed in a single line
Comments begin with a single quotation sign
Index operatoins are allowed on standard and sorted tables

Sorted tables can be resorted
Hashed tables are accessed by key only
An 'Insert' statement on a standard table will add the entry to the end of the internal table
Executable
Runnable
Module Pool
Interface Pool
Data: begin of fs1,

Field1 type c value ‘1’,
Field2 type n value ‘2’,
Field3 type I value 3,
end of fs1.
Data: begin of fs2,

Field3 type c,
Field4 type n,
Field5 type I,
end of fs2.
Move-Corresponding fs1 to fs2
All fields of fs1 are moved to fs2

fs2-field3 = 1
fs2-field5 = 3
fs2-field3 = 3
Data fielda(5) type c

Data fielda(5) type t
Data fielda(5) type n
Data fielda(5) type x
CL_GUI_ALVGRID_CONTAINER
CL_GUI_CUSTOM _CONTAINER
CL_GUI_CONTAINER_ALV
Non Updateable
Remote-enabled
Normal
Enabled
Update
cl_gui_custom_container
cl_gui_alv_grid
cl_gui_alv
cl_gui_custom_grid
Registering customer objects for local development

Registering changes to SAP objects
Registering changes to customer objects
Registering developers
Data: x(3) type c.

Data: x(3) type c value '123'.
Constants: x(3) type c value '123'.
Data: x(3) type I.
Constants: x(3) type c.
Data: Today(8) type C.
Today = sy-datum.
Today = 10.
20001220
10001220
10
20011210
Data wa_ztable type ztable.
Select-options so_myfield for wa_ztable-fielda.
Select * from ztable into wa_ztable

where fielda in so_myfield .
Endselect.
No records
All of the records
One record
10 FIELD-SYMBOLS type i.
20 Data myfield type value 25.
30 Assign myfield to .
40 Unassign .
gets reset to type i

behaves like a type c field of length 1
is stateless
is null
Permanent
Temporary
No
Shared
Flow Logic Editor

ABAP Editor
Screen Painter
Function Builder
Like
Value
Type
Default
It converts the date to a julian date

It calculates the number of days that have elapsed since 00.00.0000
It leaves the date as a numeric field
It calculates the number of days that have elapsed since 01.01.0001
Specify the full key

Specify the INDEX
Sort the table first by the key
Use UNIQUE KEY option
Use the TABLE KEY option
GETLIST
CREATELIST
CREATEFROMDATA
GETDETAIL
UPDATEDETAIL
Run SPDD to adjust dictionary objects

Run RDDMASG0
Run SPAU to adjust change requests
Release all Change Requests
Application Hierarchy
Change requests
Development Classes (4.6) Package (6.x)
Repository Information System
The authorization concept is used to restrict access to servers and work processes
The authorization concept is used to restrict access to data and transactions
The authorization concept is used to restrict access to users
The authorization concept is used to restrict access to the dictionary
SAPMZMYPROGRAMTOP
MZMYPROGRAMTOP
SAPMZMYPROGRAM
MZMYPROGRAMINCLUDE
MZMYPROGRAMDATA
The Authority-check object must be in your profile

If you do not want to carry out a check for a field, it must contain the value "DUMMY"
Fields of the Authority-check are optional
Development Class
Error Class
Case
Catch Class
Locally in the dictionary

Centrally in the repository
Locally in a program using the data statement
Centrally in the dictionary
Data: st_mytab like mytab.

Perform write_lines using st_mytab.
Form write_lines using rec.
Write: / rec-field1, rec-field2.
Endform.
Rec needs to be defined LIKE mytab in the FORM

The prefix REC is not needed
Rec needs to be defined globally as a DATA object
The formal parameter 'rec' ahould be referenced by value
D
P
X
N
I
uniqueness attribute
key sequence
line type
table type
Update
Delete
Append
Read

Normal
Enabled
Remote-enabled
Update
Non Updateable
New DUMPS
1. TCode for SQL Trace?

ST05 or DB05
2. Table T000 stores what?

Client master data
3. Which of the sentences below is false?

a. ABAP is 3G language
b. ABAP is procedural
c. ABAP is built on OO concepts
d. ABAP is event driven language
Ans: C
4. Local time of the presentation server is stored in which system variable?

SY-TIMELO
Note: Application Server‟s time is stored in SY-UZEIT
5. Syntax for Native SQL

Exec…End Exec
6. TCode for Data Model?

SD11
7. Difference between EXIT and STOP key words.

8. ABAP Memory can be used to share data between different sessions in a SAP system.
True or false?
False (Session means by default an External session) ABAP memory is used to
share data between internal sessions in an external session.
9. What is meant by Transaction Variants?

Transaction variants allow you to preset values for fields in a transaction, set field
attributes, or hide entire screens. TCode: SHD0.
10. How to catch an exception?

Catch…EndCatch
11. For what purpose HIDE is used for?

HIDE keyword is used to store the selected data (record) in the backend. This is
used in the “Interactive List”.
12. Which function code (also called as “Event” sometimes) is triggered when user double
clicks a line (also known as row or record) in a list? This function code gets triggered
even when the user selects a record in a list and clicks F8.
PICK
13. How to fetch data from a specific client?

Using the addition “CLIENT SPECIFIED <client number>” in the Select query.
14. Conversion Exits are attached at what level?

At the Domain level
15. TCode for Spool viewer and Spool Administration?

SP01 and SPAD respectively
16. Table for Language codes?

T002
17. Table for transaction codes?

TSTC
18. Table for Package Details?

TDEVC
19. Table for Message Texts?

T100
20. For what data table T001 is used?

To store the Company Code information
21. TCode for Repository Information Browser?

SE84
22. Selection Screen is displayed after the Initialization Event. True or False?
True.
23. Which of the following can not be created using SE11?

a. Views
b. Type Pools
c. Lock Objects
d. Search Help
Ans: All of the above can be created!
If the answer option included something like Function Modules, then that would have
been the odd man out.
24. Q 31> PARAMETERS <p1>.....LOWERCASE. User enters “AbAp”. What will the user
input be considered as in the runtime?
a. Everything in uppercase (ABAP)
b. Everything in lowercase (abap)
c. As it is (AbAp)
d. None of the above
Ans: C
25. Authority check is performed by ABAP using:

a. Authority-Check
b. Authority_Check_Dataset
c. System does it automatically
d. None
Ans: A
26. Selection screen is?

27. Which clause is used for Search help?

MATCHCODE OBJECT
28. Which statement is true?

a. Primary index contains all the primary fields
b. Secondary index can contain non primary fields
Ans: BOTH are true
29. Before 'For All Entries' what is most important to take care of? If not taken care of, what
happens?
Check that the internal table used in the select query (using For All Entries) is not
empty.
If not taken care of, the select query retrieves ALL records from database.
30. How many levels of secondary lists can be created?

Lists can be drilled down till 20 levels. Starting from the first list (main list) as “0”
(zero) the numbering can go up to 19.
31. What happens in the event AT SELECTION-SCREEN?

Validations
32. How many types of Messages are there?

A, X, E, W, I and S
33. Relationship between Domain and Data elements.

a. One domain can correspond to many Data Elements
b. One Data Element can have only ONE domain
34. Which statement triggers TOP-OF-PAGE event?

Both WRITE and SKIP statements
35. Which Search Help has highest precedence?

Search Help attached at Field Level
36. ABAP Programs are –

a. Client dependent
b. Client independent
Ans: B
37. What is created by the following statement: R_MANTR for MARA-MANTR?

An internal table with the fields: Sign, Option, Low, High
38. Difference between APPEND and COLLECT keywords?

Append: Always adds a row
Collect: may or may not add a row
39. Which FM is used to transfer the data from the Presentation Server to Application
Server?
GUI_UPLOAD
40. Instruction to write data to a file on application server?

TRANSFER
41. Table data are –

a. Client dependent
Ans: A
42. If the value is “03” in the ACTVT field of a Authorization Object then what will the user be
allowed to do?
Display
43. How can you view the short dump (run time errors)?
Using TCode ST22
44. How can standard internal tables be accessed?

a. Sequentially
b. Directly
Ans: BOTH
45. Which system variable to get the Page Number in a list?

SY-PAGNO
46. Which system variable to get the List Number in an interactive list?
SY-LSIND
47. <> means what?

NOT EQUAL TO
One of the most stupid questions that I have ever heard of!

SHD0
49. What creates data objects?

a. Data
b. Parameters
c. Constants
Ans: ALL of the above
50. TCode for processing queue files?

SM35 (Queue file => BDC Session => BDC Group => Batch Input Session)
51. Where ABAP processor does resides?

Application Server
52. What will be the output?

a. Initialization. Write: / „A‟.
b. Top-Of-Page. Write: / „B‟.
c. Start-Of-Selection. Write: / „C‟.
Ans: B, C. (A will not be output!)
53. What is meant by SAP R/3?
SAP R/3 is Real time 3 tier architecture.
54. Text elements are language dependent. True or False?

True.
55. NUMC is not a numeric data type. True or False?

True.
56. What is the order of preference for F4 Help (also called as Search Help)?
Search help order: Field level -> Data Element level -> Domain level
57. What are LPOS and SPOS in F4 Help?

LPOS determines which column comes in the final hit list in which order (left to
right) and SPOS is used for restricting screen (row-wise, from top to bottom)
58. SY-LISEL (List processing, contents of selected line)
59. Lock Objects are FM
New Dumps
60. TCode for Layout set?

SE71
61. Other names for layout set?

Form Painter, SAP Script Painter or even SE71
62. TCode for Menu Painter?

SE41
63. TCode for Screen Painter?

SE51
64. TCode for Standard text element creation?

SO10
65. TCode for global class builder?

SE24
66. Table containing standard texts?

TTDTG
68. Program to load images into SAP system for usage in SAP Scripts?
RSTXLDMC.
70. There can not be more than one Main window in a page. True or False?
False
a. PBO
b. PAI
c. POV
d. POH
72. TCode for Output Type Configuration (also known as Output Determination
Configuration)?
NACE
Character formats.

75. Function Modules generated when lock objects are created will be in the form of -
ENQUEUE and DEQUEUE
76. Output of the given loop:

DO 5 TIMES.
HIDE SY-INDEX.
WRITE SY-INDEX.
ENDDO.
Ans: 1 2 3 4 5
77. Which data type can not be used for parameter declaration?
a. D
b. N
c. C
d. F
Ans: F
78. System variable for current Screen Number?

SY-DYNNR
79. Table for print programs and SAP Script names?

TNAPR
80. Which variable is used to store the number of loop counter for looping over the table
control?
SY-LOOPL

SHD0
82. Forms can have only one main window between different pages. True or False?
False
83. SAP Scripts are used to -

Print form data

85. TCode for uploading images as “.BMP” images into SAP system?
SE78
86. Program to Import and Export Sap Scripts

RSTXSCRP
87. Sub-screens do not have their own GUI Status. True or False?
True
88. Setting Screen attribute REQUEST does what?

89. Setting screen attribute ACTIVE as 0 is equal to what?

90. Difference between the CALL SCREEN and LEAVE TO SCREEN statements.
No need to mention the answer here as this is discussed many a times.
91. If “SET PF-STATUS = SPACE” is not executed before calling a list from screen, what
happens?
The GUI Status of the calling screen itself is used for the list also
92. TCode for searching BAPI?

BAPI (TCode itself is BAPI)
93. TCode for Workbench Organizer?

SE09
94. What does TCode SE01 stands for?

Extended Transport Organizer
Note: SE10 is the TCode for Transport Organizer
95. TCode for saving SQL Trace into a local PC?

%PC + Enter <or> %PC + Ctrl/S

97. Static screen sequence can be achieved through:

Setting the “Next Screen” attribute for every screen in the Screen Attributes tab

Note: It is not LEAVE TO LIST PROCESSING
99. Program to process BDC Sessions in background?

RSBDCSUB
NEW DUMPS
1. When using Open SQL statements in an ABAP/4 program, you must ensure the following.
a) The database system being addressed must be supported by SAP.
b) The database tables being addressed must be defined in the ABAP/4 dictionary.
c) Both>>>>...
d) None
2. What is the difference between the TYPE and LIKE statements in data declaration?
a) LIKE is used to define variables that are similar to the ones previously defined whereas TYPE is used to
define variables that exist in data dictionary.>>>>>>>>.
b) LIKE is used to define variables that are similar to the ones previously defined whereas TYPE is used to
define variables to refer ABAP internal data elements.
c) LIKE is used to define variables that exist in data dictionary whereas TYPE is used to define variables to
refer ABAP internal data elements.
d) Both of them can be used interchangeably, there is no difference.
3. HIDE statement support deep structures?

a) True
b) False>>>>>>>.
c) Not applicable
d) Not applicable
4. Which of the following are true?

a) ABAP queries are created by associating them to a logical database or through a direct read/data
retrieval program.
b) ABAP queries are created from functional areas that are created from a logical database or through a
direct read/retrieval program.
c) ABAP queries are created from user groups attached to the functional areas that are created from a
logical database or through a direct read/retrieval program>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>
d) ABAP queries are created through the regular report program.
5. A logical unit of work (LUW or transaction) begins

a) Each time you start a transaction.>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>.........
b) Each time you end a transaction.
c) When the database changes of the previous LUW have been confirmed (database
commit).>>>>>>>>>...........
d) Before the database changes of the previous LUW have been cancelled (database rollback).>>>>>>........
6. A database commit is triggered by

a) ABAP/4 command COMMIT WORK.>>>>>>>.......
b) CALL SCREEN, CALL DIALOG.
c) A Remote Function Call
d) CALL TRANSACTION
7. Open SQL vs. Native SQL

a) A database interface translates SAP’s Open SQL statements into SQL commands specific to the
database in use. Native SQL statements access the database directly.>>>>>>>>>>>>>>...
b) When you use Native SQL, the addressed database tables do not have to be known to the ABAP/4
dictionary. In Open SQL, the addressed database tables must be defined in the ABAP/4
dictionary.>>>>>>..
c) There is automatic client handling in Native SQL whereas clients must always be specified in Open SQL.
d) None of above
8. The following are true about ‘EXEC SQL’.

a) You can end the Native SQL with a semicolon.>>>>>>>...
b) You can end the Native SQL with a period.
c) You cannot perform reliable authorization checks using EXEC SQL.
d) Host variables in the Native SQL are identified with a preceding hash (#).{wrong : is used}
9. What are field symbols?

a) Field symbols are like pointers in C that can point to any data object in ABAP/4 and to structures
defined in ABAP/4 dictionary.>>>>>>>>>...........
b) Field symbols have to be created with type specifications only.
c) You cannot assign one field symbol to another.
d) All operations you have programmed with the field symbol are carried out with the assigned
field.>>>>...
10. EXTRACT statement

a) The first EXTRACT statement extracts the first extract record.
b) The first EXTRACT statement creates the extract dataset and adds the first extract
record.>>>>>>>>........
c) Each extract record contains, if specified, the fields of the field group.
d) Each extract record contains, if specified, the fields of the field symbol.
11. You cannot assign a local data object defined in a subroutine or function module to a field group.
a) True>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>.........
b) False
c) Not applicable
d) Not applicable
12. Which of the following system fields keep track of each pass in LOOP statement?
a) SY-STEPL
b) SY-INDEX>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>,,,,,,,
c) SY-TABIX
d) B and C both
13.
data: begin of group1,
f1 type I value 1,
f2 type I value 1,
f3 type c value '1',
f4 type I value 1,
end of group1.
Data: begin of group2,

g1 type I value 1,
f1 type I value 1,
f2 type I value 1,
g4 type c value '1',
end of group2.
Do 2 times.
Add-corresponding group1 to group2.
Enddo.
Write: group2-g1, group2-f1, group2-f2, group2-g4.

What is the output of the above code after execution?
a) 1221
b) 2222
c) 3333
d) 1331 >>>>>>>>>........
14. Which one of the following SQL statements does NOT lock the affected database entries ?
a) insert
b) modify
c) select single for update
d) select * >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>.............
15. Which one of the following is an example of an asynchronous update?

a) insert wa into ztable.
b) call function 'update_table' in update task. >>>>>>>>>>>>>>............
c) update ztable from ztable.
d) modify ztable from wa.
16. REPORT ZTEST.
TABLES: MARC.
DATA: ZWERKS LIKE MARC-WERKS.
Which one of the following contains the length definition of ZWERKS?
a) The DATA statement

b) The Data Element used in MARC-WERKS
c) Table MARC
d) The Domain used in Data Element of MARC-WERKS>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>......
17.
1. Data: Begin of imara occurs 0.
2. Include structure mara.
3. Data: End of imara.
4 Data: number like mara-matnr value ‘123’.
5. Select * into table imara
6. From mara where matnr = number.
7. If sy-subrc = 0.
8. Write:/ imara.
9. Endif.
10. Endselect.
Which line in the above code contains a syntax error?
a) Line 5
b) Line 6
c) Line 8 >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>........
d) Line 10
18.
data: f1 type I value 1,
f2 type I value 1.
Write: / f1, f2.
Do 2 times.
Perform scope.
Enddo.
Write: / f1, f2.
Form scope.
Data: f1 type I value 2,
f2 type I value 2.
Add: 1 to f1, 1 to f2.

Write: / f1, f2.
Endform.
What is the output of this program after execution?

a) 1 1
33
44
44
b) 1 1
22
33
33
c) 1 1 >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>.........
33
33
11
d) 1 1
33
33
33
19.
data: begin of period,
f1 type I value 5,
f2 type I value 5,
f3 type I value 5,
f4 type I value 5,
f5 type I value 2,
end of period.
Data: amt type I,

total type I.
do 5 times varying amt from period-f1 next period-f2.

if sy-index <= 4.
add amt to total.
endif.
enddo.
Write: / 'Amt:',amt, 'Total', total.
What is the output of the above code after execution?

a) Amt: 2 Total: 22 >>>>>>>>>>>>>>.........
b) Amt: 2 Total: 20
c) Amt: 5 Total: 20
d) Amt: 5 Total: 10
20. data: field1(4) type c value 'ABCD'.
if field1 co 'ABCD'.
endif.
If the above statement is evaluated as true, what is the value of sy-fdpos?

a) 0
b) D >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>...correct ans is 4
c) ABCD
d) A
21.
1 case number.
2 when 1. Write '1'.
3 when 2. Write '2'.
4 when 3. Write: / '3'.
5 when number > 5. Write '>5'.
6 endcase.
Which line in the above code contains a syntax error?
a) Line 2
b) Line 4
c) Line 5 >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>.........
d) Line 6
22. Which of the following are elementary types in ABAP?

a) C,D,F,I,N,P,Q,T
b) C,D,F,I,N,P,T,X >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>.......
c) A,D,F,H,N,P,T,X
d) A,D,F,I,N,P,T,X
Tables
23. Which of the following are true?

a) TABLE is used as a synonym for STANDARD TABLE >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>.....
b) You can only access a hashed table using the generic key operations. Explicit or implicit index
operations (such as LOOP ... FROM oe INSERT itab within a LOOP) are not allowed.>>>............
c) All hashed tables are index tables.
d) We have to define the hash procedure explicitly for HASHED TABLE.
24. Can a transparent table exist in data dictionary but not in the database physically?
a) True
b) False>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>........
c) Not Applicable
d) Not Applicable
25. Which statement is used to get the number of lines in an internal table?
a) DESCRIBE table >>>>>>>>>>>>>...

b) LINES >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>......
c) LINE
d) All of the above
26. If CHECK statement is outside the loop structure and if the condition fails?
a) Subsequent statements in the current processing blocks are executed
b) Subsequent statements in the current processing blocks are not executed>>>>>>>>>>>>.........
c) Program gets terminated
d) There is an error message
27. SORT statement can sort

a) External as well as internal table
b) Database tables
c) Internal Tables>>>>>>>>>>.....
d) B and C
28. Join statements can be used with Cluster tables?

a) True
b) False>>>>>>>>>>>..........
c) Not Applicable
d) Not Applicable
29. It is always faster to use the Into Table version of a Select statement than to use Append statements?
a) True>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>...
b) False
c) Not Applicable
d) Not Applicable
30. From the performance point of view, if you want to process the data only once, which of the following
will you use?
a) Selecting the data into an internal table and then LOOP through internal table.
b) Do the processing in SELECT..END SELECT>>>>>>>>........
c) Select the records in the loop and then process each individually
d) Each of the above will be equally efficient
61. Which one of the following is output to the job log when included in an ABAP program running in the
background?
a) Write statements
b) message statements >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>............
c) report parameters
d) Submit statements
62. Your program specs call for you to read the first 10 records from a text file (fname1), and write them
out to another text file (fname2).
Which block of code will accomplish the result desired in the above scenario?
a) Open dataset fname2 for input in text mode.
Do 10 times.
Read dataset fname1 into hold_var.
Transfer hold_var to fname2.
Enddo.
b) open file fname1 for output.

Open file fname2 for input.
Read dataset fname1 into hold_var 10 times.
Transfer hold_var to fname2.
c) open file fname1 for input.

Open file fname2 for output.
Do 10 times.
Read file fname1 into hold_var.
Transfer hold_var into fname2.
Enddo.
d) open dataset fname1 for input in text mode.

Open dataset fname2 for output in text mode.
Do 10 times.
Read fname1 into hold_var.
Write hold_var to fname2.
Enddo. >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>............
63. sy-dynpro is
a) screen no>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>..........
b) program
c) table
d) field name
64. Which of the following are NOT correct usage of BDC_cursor?

a) To position the cursor on a particular field.
<bdc_tab>-FNAM = 'BDC_CURSOR'.
<bdc_tab>-FVAL = ‘fieldx’ .
b) To position the cursor on a particular field.

<bdc_tab>-FNAM = ‘fieldx’
<bdc_tab>-FVAL = 'BDC_CURSOR'. .
c) For fifth row of Table control

<bdc_tab>-FVAL = 'fieldx(5)'.
d) For fifth row of Table control

<bdc_tab>-FNAM = 'BDC_CURSOR(5) '.
65. In case of background processing of a BI session, which authorization is checked?

a) Developer of the program that schedules BI Session
b) User who executes the BI session
c) User who executes the program that schedules BI Session
d) User ID that is passed to the BDC_OPN_GROUP function module inside the calling program
66. Which of the following are TRUE about Transaction Recorder?

a) Transaction Code is SHDB >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>........
b) Transaction Code is SM35
c) It can generate ABAP code for the BDC program automatically
d) It can generate ABAP code for the Call Transaction program automatically
SAP Script
67. The following are true about SAPscript control commands.

a) If a control command is unknown or it contains syntax errors, the line containing it will be printed out
as it is.>>>>>>>>>>>>>.......
b) If a control command is unknown or it contains syntax errors, the line containing it will be treated as a
comment line.
c) A maximum of one control command may appear in each line.>>>...........
d) A maximum of six control commands may appear in each line.
68. To output SAPscript layout sets, in the print program

a) You must always start the output with OPEN_FORM and end it with CLOSE_FORM.>>>>>>>>>...
b) Within one transaction, you can use only one OPEN_FORM and CLOSE_FORM to open and close a
layout set.
c) WRITE_FORM should be used within an OPEN_FORM and CLOSE_FORM.>>>>>>>>>>..
d) WRITE_FORM can be used without an OPEN_FORM and CLOSE_FORM.
69. Which transaction do we use for debugging SAP Script?

a) SE61
b) SE72
c) SE71>>>>>>>>>............
d) None of the above.
SAP Enhancements
70. The transaction cmod and smod are

a) Used to create enhancements to standard SAP programs.>>>>>>>>>>>.....
b) Used to create enhancements to ABAP queries.
c) Used to create the user exits, menu exits and screen exits.
d) Used to modify the standard function groups.
Interfaces and Queries
71. What happens if we write COMMIT WORK is written within SELECT..END SELECT.
a) All the transactions will be committed.
b) The first transaction is committed and the program exits the loop.
c) Program will create a short dump
d) A runtime error will occur.
**
72. How many function modules can be present in a function group?
a) 30
b) 49
c) 99>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>.....
d) There is no such limit
73. Can you call a subroutine of one program from another program, which is not an include program?
a) True>>>>>>...........
b) False
c) Not Applicable
d) Not Applicable
**
74. Which of the following statements is TRUE?
a) The ABAP statement ‘IMPORT ... TO MEMORY’ overwrites the old data in ABAP memory.
b) The ABAP statement ‘EXPORT ... TO MEMORY’ appends to the already existing data in ABAP memory.
c) The ABAP statement ‘EXPORT ... TO MEMORY’ overwrites the old data in ABAP
memory.>>>>>>>>>>>>.....
d) The ABAP statement ‘IMPORT ... TO MEMORY’ appends to the already existing data in ABAP memory.
75. SAP Memory and ABAP/4 memory refer to the same memory space?
a) True
b) False >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>........
c) Not Applicable
d) Not Applicable
76. Which statement is INCORRECT when referring to SAP memory or ABAP memory?
a) SAP memory is also referred to as Global Memory. (corret)

b) SAP memory is available across transactions. (correct)
c) IMPORT/EXPORT (TO MEMORY) statements are used for SAP memory. (incorrect)
d) You can use ABAP memory to pass data between internal sessions. (incorrect)
77. Which one of the following are true about a function module?
a) Function modules CANNOT be created by a programmer.
b) Function modules are locally accessible objects.
c) Function modules use a memory area separate from calling program. >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>................
d) Function modules have inbound and outbound parameters.
IDOC
78. An IDOC structure is composed of

a) One substructure, substructure consists of several fields
b) Several segments, each segments has several data elements
c) Several substructures, each one made up of several data fields
d) Several segments, each segment consists of several data fields
79. Read the 2 statements below and pick the right answer choice
A. Archived files can be analyzed without reloading the file
B. An archived IDOC can be reloaded and then archived
a) A & B are true
b) Only B
c) Only A
d) Both are false
80. The transaction for archiving IDOC’s is

a) WARC
b) WEAR
c) SARA
d) SARC
81. An IDOC contains data for 3 purchase orders (type ORDERS01, with 1 mandatory segment, 11 other
segments which are permitted to be multiple). Read the following statements which could describe the
content of the idoc, and pick the right combination:
A. It will have 3 control records
B. It will have 1 control record
C. It will have a minimum of 3 data records
D. It will have a minimum of 1 data record
E. It will have a minimum of 48 data records
F. It will have at least 1 status record
G. It will have at least 3 status records
a) A, C, F
b) B, C, F
c) B, C, G
d) A, E, G
82. Which of the following statements is true?

A. An IDoc type can have many messages types associated with it.
B. An IDoc can have many messages associated with it.
C. A message type can be associated with many IDoc types.
a) A and C
b) A and B
c) Only A
d) All the statements
83. Pick the right answer

A. An idoc type is dependent on the direction of data flow (inbound/outbound).
B. The control record has a field ‘DOCTYP’ which indicates whether the IDOC is of the type inbound or
outbound
a) Only A is true
b) Only B is true
c) A and B are true
d) Neither A nor B are true
84. The control record field which determines the direction of the IDoc can have values
e) ‘X’ and ‘ ‘ (space)
f) ‘1’ and ‘2’,
The meaning of the values is
C. X inbound, space outbound
D. X outbound, space inbound
E. 1 inbound, 2 outbound
F. 1 outbound, 2 inbound
Pick the right combinations of statements, which are true
a) A, C
b) A, D
c) B, E
d) B, F
85. The area menu from which EDI tools can be accessed is
a) WALE
b) WEDI
c) SALE
d) SEDI
86. The transactions for documentation on IDOC structures are

a) WE60 to WE64
b) SA60 to SA64
c) WE80 to WE84
d) SA20 to SA24
Report Programming
**
87. How do you check whether a report is submitted in background?
a) The system variable, sy-batch is set to ‘X’.>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>.................
b) The system variable, sy-binpt is set to ‘X’.
c) The system variable, sy-calld is set to ‘X’.
d) Not applicable
88. Which transaction code is used executing a report (type 1 program)?
a) SE38
b) SA38 >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>...........
c) SM38 (Queue Maintenance Transaction)
d) All of the above
89. When is the TOP-OF-PAGE event triggered?

a) After executing first write statement in start-of-selection event.>>>>>>>>>>>>>......
b) At every new page in the report output
c) After the REPORT statement
d) A and B
90. Which of the following additions for SELECT-OPTIONS would disable the ranges on selection screen?
a) NO-RANGES
b) NO INTERVALS
c) NO RANGES
d) NO-INTERVALS >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>............
91. What is the structure for the following select-options? Select-options: zname like ztable-name.
a) zname-sign
zname-value
zname-low
name-high
b) zname -sign
zname-option
zname-low
zname-high
c) zname -include
zname-pattern
zname-range
d) zname-sign
zname-option
zname-low
92. Following properties are given:

· Must use mara-matnr's conversion exit
· Is a required field
· Appears as 100 on the selection screen
· Check for a valid mara-matnr
Which one of the following is the correct way to define a selection-screen parameter (n) with the above
properties?
a) parameters: n type I default '100'.
b) parameters: n like mara-matnr default ‘100’ obligatory.
At selection-screen on n.
Select single * from mara where matnr = n.
If sy-subrc ne 0.
Message e000(00) with 'Incorrect number'.
Endif.
c) parameters: n like mara-matnr default 100 obligatory.
d) parameters: n type I default 100 required.
At selection-screen on n.
Select single * from mara where matnr = n.
If sy-subrc ne 0.
Message e000 with 'Incorrect number'.
Endif.
93. Report specs call for a selection screen with 1 parameter inside a frame. Which code block will
accomplish this?
a) Selection-screen begin of frame b1 with frame title t-001.

Parameters: p1 like ztable-field1.
Selection-screen end of frame b1.
b) Selection-screen begin-of-frame b1 with frame title t-001.

Selection-screen end-of-frame b1.
c) Selection-screen begin-of-block b1 with frame title t-001.

Selection-screen end-of-block b1.
d) Selection-screen begin of block b1 with frame title t-001.

Selection-screen end of block b1. >>>>>>>>>>>...........
94. Which return code is associated with a failed authority check due to lack of user authorization for the
chosen action?
a) 0
b) 4 >>>>>>>>>>>........
c) 8
d) 12
95. You are required to create a selection screen with 1 input parameter: A date range which defaults to
the last 1 week (today-7,today)
Which is the correct block of code for the above request?

a) select-options: s_date type date.
Initialization.
Move: sy-datum to s_date-high,
sy-datum - 7 to s_date-low.
Append s_date.
b) select-options: s_date for sy-datum.
Initialization.
Move: sy-datum - 7 to s_date-low,
sy-datum to s_date-high.
Append s_date.
c) select-options: s_date type d default sy-datum - 7, sy-datum.

d) select-options: s_date for sy-datum default sy-week,
96. Which one of the following statements is a valid use of the write command?
a) write text(3)(4).
b) write text(3)4.
c) write text+(3)(4).
d) write text+3(4). >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>.....
97. When using an edit mask, which one of the following fields will be output with a leading sign?
a) field1 using edit mask '**_LLV'
b) field1 using edit mask 'RR__,_'
c) field1 using edit mask 'LL__,_'
d) field1 using edit mask 'V__'
98. For the events in Classical Reports :

1. Initialisation
2. At Selection Screen
3. Start Of Selection ( Get & Get Late in case of Logical Database )
4. End of Selection
5. Top of Page
6. End of Page
sequence of calling is :
a) 1,2,3,4, 5, 6>>>>>>...........
b) 2,1, 3,4, 5, 6
c) 1,2, 5, 6, 3,4
d) 2,1, 5, 6, 3,4
99. The sequence of events in Interactive Reports is

1. At Line Selection
2. At User Command
3. At PFKEY
4. Get Cursor
5. Read
a) 1,2,3,4, 5
b) 1,2,3,5, 4,
c) 1, 2, 4, 5, 3
d) 1, 3, 5, 4, 2
100. What is max no of lists u can attach to basic list?(interactive report)

a) 22
b) 20>>>>>>>>>>>>....
c) 18
d) 1
General
101. If a break-point statement is written in an ABAP program and the program is run in the background
mode, which of the following is true.
a) Break-point statement will be ignored and program will complete the execution.
b) System generates a Sys log message
c) Program will create a short dump
d) None of the above
102. When a program is created and transported the selections texts are always transported along with
the program.
a) True
b) False
c) Not Applicable
d) Not Applicable
103. Programs and reports are client dependent.

a) True>>>>>>>.............
b) False
c) Not Applicable
d) Not Applicable
**
104. Which transaction code is used for creating a background job?
a) SM37
b) SM35
c) SM36>>>>>>........
d) SM38
105. Can variants be transported across systems?
a) Yes
b) No
c) Not Applicable
d) Not Applicable
106. Are variants client dependent?

a) Yes
b) No
c) Not Applicable
d) Not Applicable
107. What are the functions in the editor command line?

a) F1
b) F4
c) F3>>>.....
d) F8>>>.......
108. What does the transaction code /i do?

a) Shifts to the first session of the user
b) This terminates the first session of the user
c) Terminates the current session of the user>>>>>>>>................
d) No transaction with this code exists.
109. Which transaction code is used for deleting the user lock on tables?
a) SE12
b) SE11
c) SM12>>...............
d) SM11
110. What transaction is used to create background jobs?

a) SM30
b) SM35
c) SM36 >>>>>>>............
d) SM37
111. Which one of the following transaction types is INVALID?
a) Area
b) Modal
c) Variant
d) Report
112. Which one of the following statements are TRUE?

a) After a TRANSPORT REQUEST is released, no further changes to its' objects are allowed.
b) Development classes can be viewed by using transaction SE80.
c) Local objects CANNOT be transported to another instance. . >>>............
d) A TRANSPORT REQUEST contains objects that can be transported to Quality or Production SAP
instances.
113. Which one of the following statements are FALSE about Inactive objects in SAP?
a) Development Objects are always saved as inactive versions.
b) An inactive version of a Development Object is written to developer’s pc
c) In DISPLAY mode, other users can NOT access the code of inactive version of a developer
d) Generating a runtime object is same as activating a development object.
Dialog Programming
114. Program specs call for screen 100 to appear in a modal dialog box.
Process After Input.

module do_something.
module do_something.
If field1 = 'X'.
Call screen '0100'.
Endif.
Endmodule.
Why does the above code fail to produce a modal box?

a) The code must occur in the PBO.
b) The screen is of the wrong type.
c) The screen should be numbered 900.
d) Screens are not called within modules.
115. Which one of the following statements would occur in the PBO of a dialog program using table
control?
a) module user_command.
b) set screen '0100'.
c) loop at itab.
d) loop at itab with control itab_tc. >>>>>>>>..................
NEW DUMPS
2. What are client dependant objects in abap/sap?

SAP Script layout, text element, and some DDIC objects.
3. On which event we can validate the input fields in module progams?

In PAI (Write field statement on field you want to validate, if you want to validate group of fields put in
chain and End chain statement.)
6. When top of the page event is triggered?

After excuteing first write statement in start-of-selection event.
7. Can we create field without data element and how?

In SE11 one option is available above the fields strip. Data element/ direct type.
8. How do we debug sapscript?

Go to SE71 give lay set name , go to utilities select debugger mode on.
9. Which transaction code can I used to analyze the performance of ABAP program.
TCode se30.
10. How can I copy a standard table to make my own z_table.

Go to transaction SE11. Then there is one option to copy table. Press that button. Enter the name of the
standard table and in the Target table enter Z table name and press enter.
1. What is the use of 'outerjoin'
Ans. With the use of outer join you can join the tables even there is no entry in all the tables used in the
view.
In case of inner join there should be an entry in al the tables use in the view.
2. When to use logical database?

Ans. Advantage of Logical databases:
less coding s required to retrieve data compared to normal internel tables.
Tables used LDB are in hierarchial structure.
3. What is the use of 'table index'?

Ans .Index is used for faster access of data base tables.
4. What is the use of 'FOR ALL ENTRIES'?

Ans. To avoid nested select statements we use SELECT FOR ALL ENTRIES statement.
If there r more than 10000 records SELECT FOR ALL ENTRIES is used.
Performance wise SELECT FOR ALL ENTRIES is better to use.
5. Can you set up background processing using CALL TRANSACTION?

Yes,Using No Screen Mode.
6. What are table buffers?

Table buffers reside locally on each application server in the system. The data of buffered tables can thus
be accessed directly from the buffer of the application server. This avoids the time-consuming process of
accessing the database.
Buffering is useful if table needs to be accessed more no. of times in a program.
1. How do I set a flag for a field in any table?

Create a char field of length 1. for example field STAS-LKENZ is Deletion Indicator. It means that if the
value in the field is 'X' then that record has been deleted.
1. What is the typical structure of an ABAP/4 program?

ANS:-
HEADER ,BODY,FOOTER.
2. What are field symbols .?
ANS:-
3. What should be the approach for writing a BDC program?

ANS:-
STEP 1: CONVERTING THE LEGACY SYSTEM DATA TO A FLAT FILE to internal table CALLED
"CONVERSION".
STEP 2: TRANSFERING THE FLAT FILE INTO SAP SYSTEM CALLED "SAP DATA TRANSFER".
STEP 3: DEPENDING UPON THE BDC TYPE i)call transaction(Write the program explicity)
ii) create sessions (sessions are created and processed.if success data will transfer).
4. What is a batch input session?

ANS:-
BATCH INPUT SESSION is an intermediate step between internal table and database table.
Data along with the action is stored in session ie data for screen fields, to which screen it is passed,program
name behind it, and how next screen is processed.
5. What is the alternative to batch input session?

ANS:-
Call transaction.
6. A situation: An ABAP program creates a batch input session.

We need to submit the program and the batch session in back ground. How to do it?
ANS:-
go to SM36 and create background job by giving
job name,job class and job steps (JOB SCHEDULING)
10. What are the different types of data dictionary objects?

ans:-
tables, structures, views, domains, data elements, lock objects, Matchcode objects.
11. How many types of tables exists and what are they in data dictionary?
ans :-
4 types of tables
i)Transparent tables - Exists with the same structure both in dictionary as well as in database exactly with
the same data and fields. Both Opensql and Nativesql can be used.
ii)Pool tables & iii)Cluster tables -

These are logical tables that are arranged as records of transparent tables.one cannot use native sql on these
tables
(only opensql).They are not managable directly using database system tools.
iv)Internal tables - .
13. Can a transparent table exist in data dictionary but not in the data base physically?
ANS:- NO.
TRANSPARENT TABLE DO EXIST WITH THE SAME STRUCTURE BOTH IN THE DICTIONARY
AS WELL AS IN THE DATABASE,EXACTLY WITH THE SAME DATA AND FIELDS.
14. What are the domains and data elements?

ANS:-
DOMAINS : FORMAL DEFINITION OF THE DATA TYPES.THEY SET ATTRIBUTES SUCH AS
DATA TYPE,LENGTH,RANGE.
DATA ELEMENT : A FIELD IN R/3 SYSTEM IS A DATA ELEMENT.
15. Can you create a table with fields not referring to data elements?
ANS:-
YES. eg:- ITAB LIKE SPFLI.here we are referening to a data object(SPFLI) not data element.
16. What is the advantage of structures? How do you use them in the ABAP programs?
ANS:-
Adv:- GLOBAL EXISTANCE(these could be used by any other program without creating it again).
18. What is a collect statement? How is it different from append?

ANS:-
If an entry with the same key already exists, the COLLECT statement does not append a new line, but adds
the contents of the numeric fields in the work area to the contents of the numeric fields in the existing
entry.
19. What is open sql vs native sql?
Open SQL , native SQL are the interfaces to create the database applicatons.
Open SQL is consistant across different types of existing Databases.
Native SQL is the database language specific to database.Its API is specific to the databse.
Open SQL API is consistent across all vendors
20. What does an EXEC SQL stmt do in ABAP? What is the disadvantage of using it?
ANS:-
22. What are the events in ABAP/4 language?

ANS:-
Initialization, At selection-screen,Start-of-selection,end-of-selection,top-of-page,end-of-page, At line-
selection,At user-command,At PF,Get,At New,At LAST,AT END, AT FIRST.
27. What is a function group?
ANS:-
GROUP OF ALL RELATED FUNCTIONS.
28. How are the date and time field values stored in SAP?
ANS:-
DD.MM.YYYY. HH:MM:SS
30. Name a few data dictionary objects? //rep//

ANS:-
TABLES,VIEWS,STRUCTURES,LOCK OBJECTS,MATCHCODE OBJECTS.
31. What happens when a table is activated in DD?

ANS:-
It is available for any insertion,modification and updation of records by any user.
32. What is a check table and what is a value table?

Check table will be at field level checking.
Value table will be at domain level checking ex: scarr table is check table for carrid.
37. What are select options and what is the diff from parameters?
ANS:-
38. How do you validate the selection criteria of a report?

And how do you display initial values in a selection screen?
ANS:-
validate :- by using match code objects.
display :- Parameters <name> default 'xxx'.
select-options <name> for spfli-carrid.
39. What are selection texts?

ANS:-
44. Name a few system global variables you can use in ABAP programs?
ANS:-
SY-SUBRC,SY-DBCNT,SY-LILLI,SY-DATUM,SY-UZEIT,SY-UCOMM,SY-TABIX.....
SY-LILLI IS ABSOLUTE NO OF LINES FROM WHICH THE EVENT WAS TRIGGERED.
45. What are internal tables? How do you get the number of lines in an internal table?
How to use a specific number occurs statement?
ANS:-
i)It is a standard data type object which exists only during the runtime of the program.
They are used to perform table calculations on subsets of database tables and for re-organising the contents
of database tables according to users need.
ii)using SY-DBCNT.
iii)The number of memory allocations the system need to allocate for the next record population.
46. How do you take care of performance issues in your ABAP programs?
Performance of ABAPs can be improved by minimizing the amount of data to be transferred.
The data set must be transferred through the network to the applications, so reducing the amount OF time
and also reduces the network traffic.
Some measures that can be taken are:
- Use views defined in the ABAP/4 DDIC (also has the advantage of better reusability).
- Use field list (SELECT clause) rather than SELECT *.
- Range tables should be avoided (IN operator)
- Avoid nested SELECTS.
i)system tools
ii)field symbols and field groups.
ans:-
Field Symbols : Field symbols are placeholders for existing fields. A Field Symbol does not physically
reserve space for a field,but points to a field which is not known until runtime of the program.
eg:- FIELD-SYMBOL <FS> [<TYPE>].
Field groups : A field group combines several fields under one name.At runtime,the INSERT command is
used to define which data fields are assigned to which field group.
There should always be a HEADER field group that defines how the extracted data will be sorted,the data
is sorted by the fields grouped under the HEADER field group.
47. What are datasets?

ANS:-
The sequential files(ON APPLICATION SERVER) are called datasets. They are used for file handling in
SAP.
48. How to find the return code of a statement in ABAP programs?

ANS:-
Using function modules.
49. What are interface/conversion programs in SAP?

ANS :
CONVERSION : LEGACY SYSTEM TO FLAT FILE.
INTERFACE : FLAT FILE TO SAP SYSTEM.
50. Have you used SAP supplied programs to load master data?
51. What are the techniques involved in using SAP supplied programs?
Do you prefer to write your own programs to load master data? Why?
52. What are logical databases? What are the advantages/disadvantages of logical databases?
ANS:-
To read data from a database tables we use logical database.
A logical database provides read-only access to a group of related tables to an ABAP/4 program. adv:- The
programmer need not worry about the primary key for each table.Because Logical database knows how the
different tables relate to each other,and can issue the SELECT command with proper where clause to
retrieve the data.
i)An easy-to-use standard user interface.
ii)check functions which check that user input is complete,correct,and plausible.
iii)meaningful data selection.
iv)central authorization checks for database accesses.
v)good read access performance while retaining the hierarchical data view determined by the application
logic.
disadv:-
i)If you donot specify a logical database in the program attributes,the GET events never occur.
ii)There is no ENDGET command,so the code block associated with an event ends with the next event
statement (such as another GET or an END-OF-SELECTION).
53. What specific statements do you using when writing a drill down report?
ans:-
AT LINE-SELECTION,AT USER-COMMAND,AT PF.
54. What are different tools to report data in SAP? What all have you used?
ans:-
55. What are the advantages and disadvantages of ABAP/4 query tool?
56. What are the functional areas? User groups? and how does ABAP/4 query work in relation to
these?
57. Is a logical database a requirement/must to write an ABAP/4 query?

59. What are Change header/detail tables? Have you used them?
60. What do you do when the system crashes in the middle of a BDC batch session?
ans:-
we will look into the error log file (SM35).
61. What do you do with errors in BDC batch sessions?

ANS:-
We look into the list of incorrect session and process it again. To correct incorrect session we analyize the
session to determine which screen and value produced the error.For small errors in data we correct them
interactively otherwise
modify batch input program that has generated the session or many times even the datafile.
62. How do you set up background jobs in SAP? What are the steps? What are the event driven
batch jobs?
ans:-
go to SM36 and create background job by giving job name,job class and job steps(JOB SCHEDULING)
63. Is it possible to run host command from SAP environment? How do you run?
65. Does SAP handle multiple currencies? Multiple languages?

ans:-
Yes.
68. What is SAPscript and layout set?

ans:-
The tool which is used to create layout set is called SAPscript. Layout set is a design document.
71. What are IDOCs?

ans:-
IDOCs are intermediate documents to hold the messages as a container.
72. What are screen painter? menu painter? Gui status? ..etc.
ans:-
dynpro - flow logic + screens.
menu painter -
GUI Status - It is subset of the interface elements(title bar,menu bar,standard tool bar,push buttons) used
for a certain screen.
The status comprises those elements that are currently needed by the transaction.
83. What are the general naming conventions of ABAP programs?

ANS:-
Should start with Y or Z.
91. What are the different elements in layout sets?

ans:-
PAGES,Page windows,Header,Paragraph,Character String,Windows.
92. Can you use if then else, perform ..etc statements in sap script?
ans:-
yes.
104. What is the structure of a BDC sessions.

ans:-
BDCDATA (standard structure).
105. What are the fields in a BDC_Tab Table.

ans:-
program,dynpro,dynbegin,fnam,fval.
NEW DUMPS
1. This data type has a default length of one and a blank default value.
A: I
B: N
C: C
D: D
Ans:C
2. A DATA statement may appear only at the top of a program, before START-OF-
SELECTION.
A: True
B: False
Ans:B
3. If a field, NAME1, is declared as a global data object, what will be output by the
following code?
report zabaprg.
DATA: name1 like KNA1-NAME1 value 'ABAP programmer'.
name1 = 'Customer name'.

CLEAR name1.
perform write_name.
FORM write_name.
name1 = 'Material number'.
WRITE name1.
ENDFORM.
A: Customer name
B: ABAP programmer
C: Material number
D: None of the above
Ans:C
4. All of these allow you to step through the flow of a program line-by-line except:
A: Enter /h then execute

B: Execute in debug mode
C: Enter /i then execute
D: Set a breakpoint
Ans: C
5. Which of the following may NOT be modified using the ABAP Dictionary
transaction?
A: Type groups
B: Search help
C: Lock objects
D: Function groups
Ans:D
6. In a line of code, text-100, is an example of which type of text element?

A: Text symbol
B: Selection text
C: Text title
D: Text identifier
Ans:A
7. The editor function that formats and indents the lines of code automatically is called
____.
A: Auto align
B: Pretty printer
C: Generate version
D: Syntax check
Ans:B
8. A DO loop increments the system field ____.
A: SY-LOOPI
B: SY-TABIX
C: SY-LSIND
D: SY-INDEX
Ans: D
9. The event that is processed after all data has been read but before the list is displayed
is:
A: END-OF-PAGE.
B: START-OF-SELECTION.
C: END-OF-SELECTION.
D: AT LINE-SELECTION.
Ans:A  C
10. The field declared below is of what data type?
DATA: new_fld(25).
A: P
B: N
C: I
D: C
Ans: D
11. In regard to the INITIALIZATION event, which of the following is NOT a true
statement?
A: Executed before the selection screen is displayed.

B: You should use SET PF-STATUS here.
C: You can assign different values to PARAMETERS and SELECT-OPTIONS here.
D: Executed one time when you start the report.
Ans: B
12. The event AT SELECTION-SCREEN OUTPUT. occurs before the selection screen
is displayed and is the best event for assigning default values to selection criteria.
A: True
B: False
Ans: B
13. The business (non-technical) definition of a table field is determined by the field's
____.
A: domain
B: field name
C: data type
D: data element
Ans: D
14. In regard to the three-tier client/server architecture, which of the following is a true
statement?
A: The presentation server processes the SAP program logic.

B: An application server is responsible for updating database tables.
C: Typically, there is a one-to-one ratio of database servers to presentation servers.
D: The application server layer is the level between a presentation server and a
database server.
Ans: D, b
15. What will be output by the code below?
DATA: alph type I value 3.
write: alph.
WHILE alph > 2.

write: alph.
alph = alph - 1.
ENDWHILE.
A: 3
B: 3 2
C: 3 3 2
D: 3 3
Ans: D
16. To allow the user to enter a single value on a selection screen, use the ABAP
keyword ____.
A: SELECT-OPTIONS.
B: PARAMETERS.
C: RANGES.
D: DATA.
Ans: B
17. What will be output by the following code?
DATA: BEGIN OF itab OCCURS 0, fval type i, END OF itab.

itab-fval = 1. APPEND itab.
REFRESH itab.
WRITE: /1 itab-fval.
A: 1
B: 2
C: blank
D: 0
Ans: B
18. You can define your own key fields when declaring an internal table.
A: True
B: False
Ans: B  A
19. When modifying an internal table within LOOP AT itab. _ ENDLOOP. you must
include an index number.
A: True
B: False
Ans : B
20. If itab contains 20 rows, what will SY-TABIX equal when the program reaches the
WRITE statement below?
SY-TABIX = 10.
LOOP AT itab.
count_field = count_field + 1.
ENDLOOP.
WRITE: /1 count_field.
A: 0
B: 10
C: 20
D: 30
Ans: C
21. Given:
SELECT SINGLE vbeln FROM VBAK INTO vbak-vbeln
WHERE mandt = sy-mandt
AND vbeln = pvbeln.
IF SY-SUBRC = 0.
WRITE: /1 vbak-vbeln.
ENDIF.
If VBAK is a client-dependent table, what will be the result?
A: Output of vbak-vbeln if the record is found.

B: Output of vbak-vbeln if the record is not found.
C: No output if the record is found.
D: Nothing, there is a syntax error.
22. To select one record for a matching primary key, use ____.
A: SELECT
B: SELECT INTO
C: SELECT SINGLE
D: SELECT ENTRY
Ans: C
23. In regard to MOVE-CORRESPONDING, which of the following is NOT a true

statement?
A: Moves the values of components with identical names.

B: Fields without a match are unchanged.
C: Corresponds to one or more MOVE statements.
D: Moves the values of components according to their location.
Ans: A  D
24. All of the following are valid Open SQL statements except:
A: OPEN DATASET.
B: CLOSE CURSOR.
C: DELETE.
D: COMMIT WORK.
25. To read an exact row number of an internal table, use this parameter of the READ
TABLE statement.
A: INDEX
B: TABIX
C: ROW
D: WHERE
Ans: B  A
26. To remove lines from a database table, use ____.
A: UPDATE
B: MODIFY
C: ERASE
D: DELETE
Ans: D
27. Which table type would be most appropriate for accessing table rows using an index.
A: Hashed table
B: Standard table
C: Sorted table
D: None of these may be accessed using an index.
Ans: C
28. The following code indicates:
SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF BLOCK B1.

PARAMETERS: myparam(10) type C,
Myparam2(10) type N,
SELECTION-SCREEN END OF BLOCK.
A: Draw a box around myparam and myparam2 on the selection screen.

B: Allow myparam and myparam2 to be ready for input during an error dialog.
C: Do not display myparam and myparam2 on the selection screen.
D: Display myparam and myparam2 only if both fields have default values.
Ans: A
29. If this code results in an error, the remedy is:
SELECT fld1 SUM( fld1 ) FROM tab1 INTO_
A: Remove the spaces from SUM( fld1 ).

B: Move SUM( fld1 ) before fld1.
C: Add GROUP BY f1.
D: Change to SUM( DISTINCT f1 ).
30. Given:
IF MY_IND = 'X'.
COMMIT WORK.
ELSE.
ROLLBACK WORK.
ENDIF.
If my_ind is initial, this will result in:

A: Changes are written to the database.
B: Changes are undone without writing them to the database.
C: A database error.
D: An abend.
31. When writing a SELECT statement, you should place as much load as possible on
the database server and minimize the load on the application server.
A: True
B: False
Ans: B
32. To allow the user to enter values on the screen for a list field, use:
A: OPEN LINE.
B: SET CURSOR FIELD.
C: WRITE fld AS INPUT FIELD.
D: FORMAT INPUT ON.
33. In regard to subroutines and function modules, to ensure that an actual parameter is
the same type as its corresponding formal parameter, you should ____.
A: code a SY-SUBRC check

B: specify a reference field
C: verify the types yourself when coding
D: use the DESCRIBE FIELD statement
34. In the following code, what does function FC12 do?
AT USER-COMMAND.
CASE SY-UCOMM.
WHEN 'FC11'.
SCROLL LIST LEFT BY 20 PLACES.
WHEN 'FC12'.
SCROLL LIST FORWARD.
ENDCASE.
A: Shifts the list rows up.

B: Moves the cursor.
C: Scrolls the list to the right.
D: Performs a page up.
35. What must you code in the flow logic to prevent a module from being called unless
a field contains a non-initial value (as determined by its data type)?
A: ON INPUT
B: CHAIN
C: FIELD
D: ON REQUEST
36. Which of the following is not a component of dialog programming environment?
A: Transaction code
B: Screen
C: ABAP module pool
D: Background job
37. To modify several fields in a screen without referencing each individual field name:
A: Access the SPA/GPA parameter for each of the fields.

B: Assign the fields to a single ABAP Dictionary structure.
C: Group the fields in a CHAIN.
D: Identify the fields via their group name.
38. To allow the user to execute a specific function, write code within the event ____.
A: START-OF-SELECTION.
B: AT LINE-SELECTION.
C: INITIALIZATION.
Ans:
39. Which ABAP program attribute provides access protection?
A: Status
B: Application
C: Development class
D: Authorization group
Ans:D
40. Page headers for a secondary list should be coded in which event?
A: TOP-OF-PAGE.
C: TOP-OF-PAGE DURING LINE-SELECTION.
D: AT USER-COMMAND.
Ans: C
41. Given:
PERFORM subroutine USING var.
The var field is known as what type of parameter?

A: Formal
B: Actual
C: Static
D: Value
Ans:B
42. In regard to Runtime Analysis, which of the following is NOT a true statement?
A: System-level performance problems are identified.

B: Helps you analyze the performance of any program created within the ABAP Workbench. *
C: Helps identify potentially inefficient database accesses.
D: Measurement results are saved in performance data files.
CALL SCREEN 300.
A: Start the PAI processing of screen 300.

B: Jump to screen 300 without coming back.
C: Temporarily branch to screen 300. *
D: Exit screen 300.
Ans:C
44. When making a function module call, pass internal tables via the parameter ____.
A: EXPORTING
B: IMPORTING
C: USING
D: TABLES
45. In relation to an internal table as a formal parameter, because of the STRUCTURE

syntax, it is possible to:
A: Use the DESCRIBE statement within a subroutine.

B: Loop through the internal table within a subroutine.
C: Access the internal table fields within a subroutine.
D: Add rows to the internal table within a subroutine.
46. To use a secondary table index in your SELECT statement, you should:
A: Include the index fields in the WHERE clause in the correct order
B: Use the INDEX clause of the SELECT statement
C: Include MANDT in the WHERE clause
47. To prevent duplicate accesses to a master data field:
A: Create an index on the master data field.

B: Remove nested SELECT statements.
C: Use SELECT SINGLE.
D: Buffer the data in an internal table.
Ans: A  C
48. In regard to the code below, which of the following is not a true statement?
TABLES: KNA1.
GET KNA1.
Write: /1 kna1-kunnr.
END-OF-SELECTION.
A: The GET event is processed while a logical database is running.

B: All the fields from table KNA1 may be used in the GET event.
C: You can code the GET event elsewhere in the same program.
D: None of the above.
Ans: D
SELECT fld1 FROM tab1 INTO TABLE itab

UP TO 100 ROWS
WHERE fld7 = pfld7.
A: Itab will contain 100 rows.

B: Only the first 100 records of tab1 are read.
C: If itab has less than 100 rows before the SELECT, SY-SUBRC will be set to 4.
Ans: D
50. To place a checkbox on a list, use
A: WRITE CHECKBOX.
B: FORMAT CHECKBOX ON.
C: WRITE fld AS CHECKBOX.
D: MODIFY LINE WITH CHECKBOX.
Ans:C
51. Given:
SELECT fld1 fld2 fld3 FROM tab1 INTO (fld4, fld5, fld6)
WHERE fld7 = pfld7.
WRITE: /1 fld4, fld5, fld6.
SELECT fld8 FROM tab2 INTO fld9
WHERE fld10 = tab1-fld6.
WRITE: /1 fld9.
ULINE.
ENDSELECT.
ENDSELECT.
All of the following are good performance tuning methods except:
A: Use SELECT fld1 fld2 fld3 FROM tab1 INTO itab_

B: Convert the nested SELECT statements to a database view
C: Code your own database join.
D: Use SELECT_FOR ALL ENTRIES IN itab.
CALL SCREEN 9000 STARTING AT 10 5 ENDING AT 60 20
A: Screen 9000 is called with the cursor at coordinates (10,5)(60,20).

B: Screen 9000 must be of type "Modal dialog box."
C: Display screen 9000 in a full window.
D: Screen 9000 may only contain an ABAP list.
Ans:A
53. Given:
PERFORM my_sub USING fld1 fld2.

FORM my_sub using value(fld1) fld2.
ENDFORM.
The parameter fld1 is passed by:
A: Value
B: Reference
C: Value and result
54. If the user picks the WIND function, the following code indicates:
AT USER-COMMAND.
IF SY-UCOMM = 'WIND'.
WINDOW STARTING AT 7 4 ENDING AT 65 12.
WRITE text-900.
ENDIF.
A: Display text-900 in a dialog window.

B: Display text-900 in a full screen.
C: Output text-900 on row 4, starting at column 7.
D: Draw a box around text-900 with coordinates (7,4) and (65,12)
55. In the flow logic, what must you code in both PBO and PAI when you have
included a table control in your screen?
A: CHAIN_ENDCHAIN
B: AT EXIT-COMMAND
C: LOOP_ENDLOOP
D: SET PF-STATUS
56. Within the source code of a function module, errors are handled via the keyword:
A: EXCEPTION
B: RAISE
C: STOP
D: ABEND
Ans:B
57. Which of these is NOT a valid type of function module?
A: Normal
B: Update
C: RFC
D: Dialog
Ans:D
58. To call a local subroutine named calculate answer, use this line of code:
A: PERFORM calculate answer.

B: CALL calculate answer.
C: USING calculate answer.
D: SUB calculate answer.
Ans:A
59. All of the following may be performed using SET CURSOR except:
A: Move the cursor to a specific field on a list.

B: Move the cursor to a specific list line.
C: Move the cursor to a specific pushbutton, activating that function.
D: Move the cursor to a specific row and column on a list.
60. The table control attribute <ctrl>-LINES indicates the total number of lines in the
internal table.
A: True
B: False
61. ---------
62. A select statement has built-in authorization checks.
A: True
B: False
Ans:B
63. In regard to the DESCRIBE LIST statement, which of the following is a true
statement?
A: Retrieves the ABAP report name.

B: Retrieves the number of list lines and pages.
C: Retrieves the window title.
64. By definition, what fields make up the standard internal table key?
A: All the table's fields.

B: All the non-numeric fields.
C: All the numeric fields.
D: The first field.
65. To be able to modify a group of fields on the selection screen with a single
statement, use:
A: AS CHECKBOX
B: SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF LINE
C: MEMORY ID
D: MODIF ID
66. To both add or change lines of a database table, use ____.
A: INSERT
B: UPDATE
C: APPEND
D: MODIFY
Ans:D
A: SELECT
B: SELECT INTO
C: SELECT SINGLE
D: SELECT ENTRY
Ans:C
68. After adding rows to an internal table with COLLECT, you should avoid adding
More rows with APPEND.
A: True
B: False
Ans:A
69. What addition to the READ TABLE statement must be used when reading a hashed
or sorted internal table to ensure that a binary search will be used?
A: WITH KEY
B: WITH TABLE KEY
C: SEARCH TYPE
D: WHERE
70. If this code results in an error, the remedy is
SELECT * FROM tab1 WHERE fld3 = pfld3.

WRITE: /1 tab1-fld1, tab1-fld2.
ENDSELECT.
A: Add a SY-SUBRC check.

B: Change the * to fld1 fld2.
C: Add INTO (tab1-fld1, tab1-fld2).
D: There is no error.
Ans: C  D
71. To summarize the contents of several matching lines into a single line, use this
SELECT statement clause.
A: INTO
B: WHERE
C: FROM
D: GROUP BY
Ans:D
72. What is output by the following code?
DATA: BEGIN OF itab OCCURS 0,

letter type c,
END OF itab.
itab-letter = 'A'. APPEND itab.

itab-letter = 'B'. APPEND itab.
itab-letter = 'C'. APPEND itab.
itab-letter = 'D'. APPEND itab.
LOOP AT itab.
SY-TABIX = 2.
WRITE itab-letter.
EXIT.
ENDLOOP.
A: A
B: ABCD
C: B
D: BCD
Ans: C
73. This selection screen syntax forces the user to input a value:
A: REQUIRED-ENTRY
B: OBLIGATORY
C: DEFAULT
D: SELECTION-SCREEN EXCLUDE
74. To create a list of the top 25 customers, you should use
A: DELETE ADJACENT DUPLICATES

B: READ TABLE itab INDEX 25
C: LOOP AT itab FROM 25
D: APPEND SORTED BY
Ans:D
DATA: itab1 LIKE struc1 OCCURS 0 WITH HEADER LINE,

itab2 LIKE struc1 OCCURS 0 WITH HEADER LINE.
itab1[] = itab2[].
A: Set the type of itab1 to the type of itab2.

B: Move the header line of itab2 to itab1.
C: Move all the rows of itab2 to itab1.
D: Move the last row of itab2 to itab1.
76. -----------
77. In regard to Native SQL, which of the following is NOT a true statement?
A: A CONNECT to the database is done automatically.

B: You must specify the SAP client.
C: The tables that you address do not have to exist in the ABAP Dictionary.
D: Will run under different database systems.
Ans:D
78. To change one or more lines of a database table, use ____.
A: UPDATE
B: INSERT
C: INTO
D: MOD
Ans:A
79. Which is the correct sequence of events?
A: AT SELECTION-SCREEN, TOP-OF-PAGE, INITIALIZATION

B: START-OF-SELECTION, AT USER-COMMAND, GET dbtab
C: INITIALIZATION, END-OF-SELECTION, AT LINE-SELECTION
D: GET dbtab, GET dbtab LATE, START-OF-SELECTION
Ans:B
80. Which of the following is NOT a numeric data type?
A: I
B: N
C: P
D: F
Ans: B
81. Which of these sentences most accurately describes the two-level domain concept?
A: Two different Domains may use the same Data element.

B: A single field may use two different Domains.
C: Two different Data elements may use the same Domain.
D: A single field may use two different Data elements.
Ans:C
82. Which of the following is NOT a required attribute when creating an ABAP
program?
A: Application
B: Title
C: Status
D: Type
Ans:
83. Page headers for a basic list can be coded in the event:
A: NEW-PAGE.
C: INITIALIZATION.
D: TOP-OF-PAGE.
Ans:D
84 -----------
85. The complete technical definition of a table field is determined by the field's:
A: Domain
B: Field name
C: Data type
D: Data element
86. Assuming a pushbutton with function code 'FUNC' is available in the toolbar of a
list report, what event is processed when the button is clicked?
A: AT USER-COMMAND.
B: AT PFn.
C: AT SELECTION-SCREEN.
D: END-OF-SELECTION.
Ans:B
87. The major difference between DO and WHILE is:

A: WHILE requires a logical expression.
B: You cannot use the CONTINUE statement with WHILE.
C: A WHILE loop may not be nested within another WHILE loop.
D: Endless loops are not possible with WHILE.
Ans:A
88. You can change the length of a data object of type I by adding ( ) after the field
name in the data declaration, as in the following statement:
DATA: counter(3) type I.
A: True
B: False
Ans:
89. Which of the following is not a valid ABAP relational operator?
A: CP
B: NC
C: O
D: NS
Ans:
90. A concrete field is associated with a field-symbol via ABAP keyword
A: MOVE
B: WRITE
C: ASSIGN
D: VALUE
91. The following event may be explicitly coded, but it is also implied.
A: END-OF-SELECTION.
C: AT LINE-SELECTION.
D: AT SELECTION-SCREEN.
Ans:
92. Which of the following describes the internal representation of a type D data object?
A: DDMMYYYY
B: YYYYDDMM
C: MMDDYYYY
D: YYYYMMDD
Ans:D
93. What is the transaction code for the ABAP Editor?
A: SE11
B: SE38
C: SE36
D: SE16
Ans:B
94. Given:
REPORT ZINTERAC.
WRITE 'First List'.
AT PF5.
WRITE: 'Second List'.
After running the report, how would the user receive the output, "Second List?"
A: No further action is required

B: Double-click the "First List" row
C: Press the keyboard function key F5
D: This is not possible for the given code
Ans:C
95.To branch from dialog processing to list processing, use:
A: LEAVE TO SCREEN 0.
B: LEAVE TO LIST-PROCESSING.
C: CALL SCREEN.
D: LEAVE LIST-PROCESSING.
96. In regard to SET PF-STATUS, you can deactivate unwanted function codes by
using ____.
A: EXCLUDING
B: IMMEDIATELY
C: WITHOUT
D: HIDE
97. Function module source code may have its own local data.
A: True
B: False
Ans:A
98. The ABAP statement you will typically use in a 'CANCEL' function is:
A: CALL SCREEN 0.
B: COMMIT WORK.
C: ROLLBACK WORK.
D: UPDATE.
Ans:C
99. After double-clicking a line on a basic list, what will the system field SY-LSIND
equal?
A: 0
B: 2
C: 1
D: The value is unchanged.
REPORT ZLISTTST.
START-OF-SELECTION.
WRITE: text-001.
FORMAT HOTSPOT ON.
WRITE: text-002.
FORMAT HOTSPOT OFF.
AT LINE-SELECTION.
WRITE / text-003.
A: Text-002 may not be selected.

B: The value of text-002 is stored in a special memory area.
C: Text-002 may be clicked once to trigger the output of text-003.
Ans:C
101. All of the following are considered to be valid ABAP modularization techniques
except:
A: Subroutine
B: External subroutine
C: Field-group
D: Function module
Ans:C
102. In an R/3 environment, where is the work of a dialog program performed?
A: On the application server using a dialog work process service.

B: On the presentation server using a dialog work process service.
C: On the database server using a dialog work process service.
Ans: B  A
103. Which of the following is NOT one of the types of internal tables in ABAP?
A: Standard
B: Sorted
C: Hashed
D: Unique
Ans:D
104. In regard to a subquery, which of the following is a true statement?
A: SELECT SINGLE may be used.

B: UPDATE may not use a subquery.
C: Allows you to program a second SELECT as part of the WHERE clause.
D: The outer SELECT is processed first.
Ans:A
105. In regard to internal tables, which of the following is NOT a true statement?
A: May be used to buffer data in memory.

B: Data values are retained when the program is finished.
C: Typically used for storing data from one or more database tables.
D: Consists of rows with the identical structure.
Ans:
106. To code a horizontal line on a selection screen, use SELECTION-SCREEN:
A: COMMENT
B: HLINE
C: ULINE
D: SKIP
Ans:C
107. To select all database entries for a certain WHERE clause into an internal table in one step, use
A: SELECT_INTO TABLE itab_
B: SELECT_INTO itab_
C: SELECT_APPENDING itab
D: SELECT_itab_
Ans:A
108. To code a blank line on a selection screen, use SELECTION-SCREEN:
A: COMMENT
B: EXCLUDE
C: ULINE
D: SKIP
Ans: D
109. To limit the number of records selected from the database, use ____.
A: WHERE
B: WHEN
C: IF
D: CASE
Ans:A
110. To limit your SELECT statement to user-entered SELECT-OPTIONS, use ____.
A: IN
B: EQ
C: NE
D: BT
Ans:A
111. ------
112. The CASE statement may not contain a logical expression, as in
CASE my_fld > 3.
A: True
B: False
Ans:B
113. The ____ type of ABAP Dictionary view consists of one or more transparent tables
and may be accessed by an ABAP program using Open SQL.
A: Database view
B: Projection view
C: Help view
D: Entity view
Ans: B  A
114. Name the type of ABAP Dictionary table that has these characteristics:
Same number of fields as the database table

Same name as database table
Maps 1:1 to database table
A: Pooled
B: Cluster
C: Transparent
D: View
Ans:C
115. Page headers for a secondary/details list can be coded in the event:
A: GET.
B: INITIALIZATION.
D: NEW-PAGE.
Ans:C
116. Page footers are coded in the event:
A: TOP-OF-PAGE.
B: END-OF-SELECTION.
C: NEW-PAGE.
D: END-OF-PAGE.
Ans:D
117. This data type has a default length of eight and a default value = '00000000'.
A: P
B: D
C: N
D: C
Ans: B
118. Which of these sentences most accurately describes the GET VBAK LATE. event?
A: This event is processed before the second time the GET VBAK event is
processed.
B: This event is processed after all occurrences of the GET VBAK event are
completed.
C: This event will only be processed after the user has selected a basic list row.
D: This event is only processed if no records are selected from table VBAK.
Ans:B
119. Given:
DO.
Write: /1 'E equals MC squared.'.
ENDDO.
This will result in ____.
A: output of 'E equals MC squared.' on a new line one time

B: an endless loop that results in an abend error
C: output of 'E equals MC squared.' on a new line many times
D: a loop that will end when the user presses ESC
Ans.B
120. The following code indicates
write: /5 'I Love ABAP'.
A: Output 'I Lov' on the current line

B: Output 'I Love ABAP' starting at column 5 on the current line
C: Output 'I Lov' on a new line
D: Output 'I Love ABAP' starting at column 5 on a new line
Ans: D
121. Which of the following is NOT a component of the default standard ABAP report
header?
A: Date and Time

B: List title
C: Page number
D: Underline
Ans: A
122. This data type has a default length of one and a default value = '0'.
A: P
B: C
C: N
D: I
Ans: C
123. A BDC program is used for all of the following except:
A: Downloading data to a local file

B: Data interfaces between SAP and external systems
C: Initial data transfer
D: Entering a large amount of data
124. In regard to CALL, which of the following is NOT a valid statement?
A: CALL FUNCTION
B: CALL SCREEN
C: CALL TRANSACTION
D: CALL PROGRAM
Ans: D
125. The output for the following code will be
report zabaprg.
DATA: my_field type I value 99.
my_field = my_field + 1.
clear my_field.
WRITE: 'The value is', my_field left-justified.
A: The value is 99
B: The value is 100
C: The value is 0
Ans: C
126. CONSTANTS: var_one (3) type C value 'DOG'.
IF var_one = 'dog'.
WRITE: /1 'Bark!'.
ELSE.
WRITE: /1 'Meow!'.
ENDIF.
WRITE: var_one.
This will result in the output:
A: Bark! DOG
B: DOG
C: Meow! DOG
Ans: C
127. Dialog programs must be executed via a transaction code.
A: True
B: False
128. Within an interactive list event, you can override the value of SY-LSIND.
A: True
B: False
129. To indicate that your new function module is ready to be freely used by anyone,
you should:
A: Activate it.
B: Release it.
C: Add documentation.
D: Send out an e-mail.
Ans: A
130. To set up a screen field to allow default values to be stored across user sessions:
A: Turn on the field attribute flag for SPA/GPA.

B: Enter a value in the search-help field attribute.
C: Set the field to display only.
D: Use the identical names concept.
131. All of the following are true statements regarding SET TITLEBAR except:
A: Sets the title of the output list window.

B: A title is active for all screens until another SET TITLEBAR statement occurs.
C: Changes the report's title attribute.
D: A title is defined for a single program.
132. Which of the following is NOT included in the Performance Trace tool for
analyzing database accesses within a program?
A: SQL Trace Analysis

B: Runtime Trace Analysis
C: Enqueue Trace Analysis
D: RFC Trace Analysis
133. Which system field contains the contents of a selected line?
A: SY-CUCOL
B: SY-LILLI
C: SY-CUROW
D: SY-LISEL
Ans: D
134. To include a field on your screen that is not in the ABAP Dictionary, which
include program should contain the data declaration for the field?
A: PBO module include program

B: TOP include program
C: PAI module include program
D: Subroutine include program
135. To exchange data between reports without an external subroutine call, you may
use:
A: IMPORT_MEMORY data_object MEMORY ID 'ID'.

B: READ_DATA data_object.
C: EXPORT data_object TO MEMORY ID 'ID'.
D: SAVE data_object MEMORY ID 'ID'.
136. Function module source code may not call a subroutine.
A: True
B: False
Ans: B
137. All of the following will delete all rows of an internal table with a header line
except:
A: CLEAR itab.
B: REFRESH itab.
C: CLEAR itab[].
D: FREE itab.
Ans:A
138. After a DESCRIBE TABLE statement SY-TFILL will contain
A: The number of rows in the internal table.

B: The current OCCURS value.
C: Zero, if the table contains one or more rows.
D: The length of the internal table row structure.
Ans:A
139. To allow the user to enter a range of values on a selection screen, use the ABAP
keyword:
A: DATA.
B: RANGES.
C: PARAMETERS.
D: SELECT-OPTIONS
Ans: B  D
140. An internal table that is nested within another internal table should not contain a
header line.
A: True
B: False
Ans:A
141. If the following code results in a syntax error, the remedy is:
DATA: itab TYPE SORTED TABLE OF rec_type WITH UNIQUE KEY field1
WITH HEADER LINE.
itab-field1 = 'Company'. itab-field2 = '1234'. INSERT TABLE itab.

itab-field1 = 'Bank'. itab-field2 = 'ABC'. INSERT TABLE itab.
SORT itab.
LOOP AT itab.
write: /1 itab-field1, itab-field2.
ENDLOOP.
A: There is no syntax error here

B: Remove the SORT statement
C: Change INSERT to APPEND
D: Add a WHERE clause to the loop
Ans:C
142. In regard to the OCCURS parameter, which of the following is a true statement?
A: Determines the maximum number of rows when using APPEND itab

SORTED BY.
B: Sets the upper limit for adding rows with APPEND itab.
C: Allocates memory in blocks of 800 Bytes.
Ans:A
143. To get the number of rows in an internal table, use the ABAP statement:
A: READ TABLE itab INDEX nlines.

B: DESCRIBE TABLE itab LINES nlines.
C: COUNT TABLE itab LINES INTO nlines.
D: COLLECT itab LINES nlines.
144. Which of the following is NOT a true statement in regard to a sorted internal table
type?
A: May only be accessed by its key.

B: Its key may be UNIQUE or NON-UNIQUE.
C: Entries are sorted according to its key when added.
D: A binary search is used when accessing rows by its key.
Ans: C  A
145. To ensure that you select data directly from the database, use ____.
A: CLIENT-SPECIFIED
B: BYPASSING BUFFER
C: ORDER BY
D: GROUP BY

SELECT fld1 fld2 FROM tab1 WHERE fld3 = pfld3.
ENDSELECT.

B: Change the WHERE clause to use fld1 or fld2.
C: Remove the /1 from the WRITE statement.
D: Add INTO (tab1-fld1, tab1-fld2).
Ans:D
147. Given:
SELECT-OPTIONS: s_opt FOR kna1-kunnr NO-EXTENSION.
The user may enter only a:
A: From value
B: To value
C: Single range
D: Exclusion range
148. Which of the following is not a standard pre-defined data type?
A: D
B: O
C: F
D: X
E: T
Ans: B
149. Which of the following would be stored in a table as master data?
A: Customer name and address

B: Sales order items
C: Accounting invoice header
D: Vendor credit memo
Ans: A
150. The following statement will result in a syntax error.
DATA: price(3) type p decimals 2 value '100.23'.
A: True
B: False
Ans: B
151. What standard data type is the following user-defined type?
TYPES: user_type.
A: N
B: C
C: I
D: Undefined
Ans: B
152. Which of the following is NOT a character data type?

A: F
B: D
C: T
D: X
Ans: A
153. The transport route of an ABAP workbench object is determined by the object's:
A: Client designation
B: Program type
D: Naming convention
154. The SAP service that ensures data integrity by handling locking is called:
A: Update
B: Dialog
C: Enqueue/Dequeue
D: Spool
155. In regard to the AT USER-COMMAND event, which of the following is NOT a

true statement?
A: The standard system function 'BACK' is processed here.

B: Executed when a function key is pressed.
C: SY-UCOMM contains the current function code.
D: Function codes from your own menu painter status are processed here.
156. The order in which an event appears in the ABAP code determines when the event
is processed.
A: True
B: False
Ans: B
157. In regard to the START-OF-SELECTION event, which of the following is a true

statement?

B: This is the only event in which a SELECT statement may be coded.
C: Executed when the user double-clicks a list row.
D: Automatically started by the REPORT statement.
Ans:D
158. In regard to a screen's flow logic, which of the following in not a true statement?
A: Contains PBO and PAI module statements.

B: Uses the same syntax as the ABAP modules.
C: Determines the processing sequence of ABAP logic for a screen.
D: Controls what happens before a screen is output and what happens after user input.
159. In regard to performance, which of the following is a true statement?
A: WHILE is faster than DO.

B: Nested selects are efficient.
C: CHECK is very inefficient.
D: NE in a WHERE clause is better than EQ.
Ans: C
160. This flow logic statement is used to make multiple fields open for input after an
Error or warning message.
A: GROUP
B: FIELD-GROUP
C: CHAIN
D: LOOP AT SCREEN
161. Errors to be handled by the calling program are defined in a function module's
____.
A: exceptions interface
B: source code
C: exporting interface
D: main program
Ans :A
162. In regard to a function group, which of the following is NOT a true statement?
A: Combines similar function modules.

B: Shares global data with all its function modules.
C: Exists within the ABAP workbench as an include program.
D: Shares subroutines with all its function modules.
Ans: D
163. All of the following pertain to interactive reporting in ABAP except:
A: Call transactions and other programs from a list.

B: Secondary list shows detail data.
C: Good for processing lists in background.
D: AT USER-COMMAND
Ans:C
164. A template that groups up to ten fields for testing access privileges is known as
____.
A: Authorization
B: Authorization object
C: User profile
D: Authority profile
Ans: B
165. To allow a basic list line to branch to a different SAP transaction use:
A: LEAVE TRANSACTION
B: SUBMIT TRANSACTION
C: EXECUTE TRANSACTION
D: CALL TRANSACTION
166. If a table contains many duplicate values for a field, minimize the number of
records returned by using this SELECT statement addition.
A: MIN
B: ORDER BY
C: DISTINCT
D: DELETE
Ans:C
167. To select data from more than one table, you may use all of the following except:
A: INNER JOIN.
B: LEFT OUTER JOIN.
C: A database view.
Ans:D
168. Assuming itab has a header line, what will be output by the following code?
READ TABLE itab INDEX 3 TRANSPORTING field1.

WRITE: /1 itab-field1, itab-field2.
A: The contents of the third row's itab-field1.

B: The contents of the third row's itab-field1 and itab-field2.
C: The contents of the third row's itab-field2.
D: Nothing.
READ TABLE itab WITH KEY field1 = sy-langu

field2 = counter.
A: Read table itab row-by-row until finding an entry other than field1 = sy-langu and
field2 = counter.
B: Read the row with an index number equal to the value stored in counter.
C: Read the internal table using the binary search method to find field1 = sy-langu and
field2 = counter.
D: Read the first row found in itab that has field1 = sy-langu and field2 = counter.
170. Predefined selection criteria values assigned to a report are called:
A: Variants.
B: Matchcodes.
C: Search-helps.
D: Screen-batches.
171. Which of the following will NOT add rows to an internal table?
A: INSERT
B: APPEND
C: COLLECT
D: MODIFY
Ans:D
INITIALIZATION.
concatenate 'IEQ' sy-uname into suname.
A: The field suname will be output in the page header.

B: SELECT-OPTION suname will contain the user name in its from value at
runtime.
C: The user name is set equal to the value contained in field suname.
D: A default value of 'IEQ' is assigned to the PARAMETER suname.
173. The SAP service that handles system output is called:
A: Update
B: Batch
C: Enqueue/Dequeue
D: Spool
Ans: D
174. Data types contain data values and data objects describe the data.
A: True
B: False
175. An event starts with an event keyword and ends with:
A: Program execution.
B: END-OF-EVENT.
C: Another event keyword.
D: END-EVENT.
176. An ABAP data type may be declared with reference to the SAP data type P.
A: True
B: False
177. Pressing the enter key in PC mode while entering code in the ABAP editor will do
all of the following except:
A: Insert a blank line after the current line

B: Insert a blank line before the current line
C: Select the beginning of a block of lines
D: Split the current line at the cursor position
178. Data types may be defined in the ABAP dictionary.
A: True
B: False
Ans: A
179. To trigger an interactive event from within an ABAP program without user
interaction, use the statement:
A: SET USER-COMMAND
B: SET PF-STATUS
C: CALL FUNCTION
D: AT USER-COMMAND
180. What value must ch_field contain so that "Nice job!" will be output?
Write: /1 'Nice'.
CHECK ch_field NE 'X'.
Write: 'job!'.
A: 'X'
B: Anything other than 'X'
C: "Nice job!" will not be output by this code
181. To view the contents of an ABAP Dictionary table, use transaction ____.
A: SE16
B: SE10
C: SE36
D: SE37
182. To write a custom text on the selection screen use SELECTION-SCREEN:
A: SKIP.
B: COMMENT.
C: TEXT.
D: FIELD.
Ans:B
183. You may declare your own internal table type using the TYPES keyword.
A: True
B: False
Ans:A
184. To make a selection criterion case-sensitive, use:
A: ACCEPTING CASE
B: LOWER CASE
C: UPPER CASE
D: CASE
185. Instead of using OCCURS 50, you could use:
A: ROWS 50
B: INDEX 50
C: DEFAULT 50
D: INITIAL SIZE 50
Ans: D
186. ABAP Open SQL enables you to access all tables within the SAP system,
regardless of the database system installed.
A: True
B: False
Ans:A
187. The following code reorders the rows so that:
DATA: itab LIKE kna1 OCCURS 0 WITH HEADER LINE.
itab-name1 = 'Smith'. itab-ort01 = 'Miami'. APPEND itab.
itab-name1 = 'Jones'. itab-ort01 = 'Chicago'. APPEND itab.
itab-name1 = 'Brown'. itab-ort01 = 'New York'. APPEND itab.
SORT itab BY name1 ort01.
A: Smith appears before Jones

B: Jones appears before Brown
C: Brown appears before Jones
D: Miami appears before New York
Ans: C
188. Which Open SQL statement should not be used with cluster databases?
A: UPDATE
B: MODIFY
C: DELETE
D: INSERT
Ans:
189. You should never nest SELECT statements because this results in a syntax error.
A: True
B: False
Ans:B
190. To properly tune the following code, you should:
WHERE fld7 = pfld7.
CHECK tab1-fld9 = pfld9.
ENDSELECT.
A: Add a SY-SUBRC check after ENDSELECT.

B: Remove the INTO clause of the SELECT statement.
C: Take the WRITE statement out of the SELECT_ENDSELECT.
D: Move the CHECK statement into the WHERE clause.
191. To declare a table control in the module pool, use:
A: CONTROLS ctrl_name TYPE TABLE CONTROL.

B: TYPES ctrl_name TABLEVIEW.
C: DATA ctrl_name TYPE TABLE CONTROL.
D: CONTROLS ctrl_name TYPE TABLEVIEW USING SCREEN 100.
192. The ABAP keyword for adding authorizations to a program is ____.
A: AUTH-CHECK
B: AUTHORITY-CHECK
C: AUTHORIZATION-CHECK
D: AUTHORITY-OBJECT
Ans:B
193. Adding a COMMIT WORK statement between SELECT_ENDSELECT is a good method for improving
performance.
A: True
B: False
Ans:B
194. To prevent certain users from using a transaction code, you can do all of the
following except:
A: Remove the transaction code from the user profile.

B: Hide the menu path from the user.
C: Add an authorization object to the transaction definition.
D: Code your own ABAP authorization check in the program associated with the
transaction.
Ans:B
195. In regard to data transported in PAI when the FIELD statement is used, which of
the following is NOT a true statement?
A: Fields in PBO are transported directly from PAI.

B: Fields with identical names are transported to the ABAP side.
C: Fields not defined in FIELD statements are transported first.
D: Fields that are defined in FIELD statements are transported when their
corresponding module is called.
SELECT fld1 fld2 FROM tab1 APPENDING TABLE itab

WHERE fld1 IN sfld1.
A: Add rows to the existing rows of itab.

B: Add rows to itab after first deleting any existing rows of itab.
C: Select rows from tab1 for matching itab entries.
D: Nothing, this is a syntax error.
Ans:A
197. The control block ON CHANGE OF fld1_ENDON may be used between

SELECT_ENDSELECT.
A: True
B: False
Ans:A
198. The following statement writes what type of data object?
WRITE: /1 'Total Amount:'.
A: Text literal
B: Text variable
C: In-code comment
D: Text integer
199. In order to change the data contents of an ABAP Dictionary table via standard
functions you must first:
A: Enter delivery class = A

B: Turn on the Tab.Maint.Allowed flag
C: Enter data class = USER
D: Use a size category of 1
200. The following code will output:
write: /1 'Start'.
PERFORM write_next.
write: 'End'.
FORM write_next.
write: 'next'.
EXIT.
write: 'more'.
ENDFORM.
A: Start next
B: Start next more
C: Start next End
D: Start more End
Ans:c
201. This event retrieves data from a logical database.
A: READ
B: SELECT
C: GET
D: AT USER-COMMAND
Ans:C
202. Which statement does not contain a syntax error?
A: DATA invoice_number(10) type N default '1234567890'.

B: TYPES cust_type like kna1 occurs 0.
C: CONSTANTS apple(10) type c value 'Apple', orange(10) type c value 'Orange'.
D: DATA data_obj type p decimals 2 value 234.98.
Ans: A
203. An administrative unit in which SAP services are started and stopped at the same
time is called:
A: Message server
B: Instance
C: Gateway
D: Profile
204. ABAP Open SQL contains both Data Definition Language (DDL) statements and
Data Controlling Language (DCL) statements.
A: True
B: False
205. Which keyword adds a line anywhere within an internal table?
A: APPEND
B: MODIFY
C: ADD
D: INSERT
Ans:
206. To total the numeric fields at a control break, use:
A: ADD.
B: SUM.
C: COUNT.
D: TOT.
207. To select unique values of a field, use ____.
A: INTO TABLE
B: UP TO 1 ROWS
C: DISTINCT
D: ORDER BY
Ans:C
208. After a successful SELECT statement, what does SY-SUBRC equal?
A: 0
B: 4
C: 8
D: Null
Ans: A
209. Which dialog programming section is used to initialize a screen's field values?
A: PBO
B: PAI
C: INITIALIZATION
210. Which dialog programming section is used to handle user functions?
A: PBO
B: PAI
C: INITIALIZATION
211. In regard to a dialog step, which of the following is NOT a true statement?
A: Begins at start of PAI of the current screen.

B: Ends at end of PBO of the next screen.
C: Ends when the next screen is displayed.
D: Begins when the next screen is displayed
212. SET SCREEN 200. LEAVE SCREEN.
A: Come back to the calling screen from screen 200.

B: Exit screen 200.
C: Branch back to the previous screen.
D: Branch to screen 200 without coming back.
213. SELECT fld1 fld2 fld3 FROM tab1 INTO (itab-fld4, itab-fld5, itab-fld6)
WHERE fld7 = pfld7.
APPEND itab.
ENDSELECT.
Which of the following is a good performance tuning technique?
A: Change the SELECT statement to use INTO TABLE itab.

B: Add MOVE statements to fill the header line of itab.
C: Remove the internal table itab from the SELECT statement.
D: This code is optimized; no change is required.
214. From program zprog1, to call a subroutine named sub_name in program zprog2,
code the following:
A: CALL zprog2(sub_name).
B: PERFORM sub_name(zprog2).
C: PERFORM (sub_name)zprog2.
D: INCLUDE zprog2(sub_name).
215. All of the following are true in regard to a parameter passed by reference, except:
A: A pointer to the memory location of the parameter's value is passed.

B: Changing the formal parameter immediately changes the passed parameter.
C: Besides USING, no additional syntax is required.
D: New memory is allocated for the parameter's value.
Ans:D
216. If an internal table is declared without a header line, what else must you declare to
work with the table's rows?
A: Another internal table with a header line.

B: A work area with the same structure as the internal table.
C: An internal table type using the TYPES statement.
D: A PARAMETER.
Ans:B
217. When coding AT FIRST fld1. _ ENDAT. within an internal table loop, you should
avoid using:
A: SORT itab by fld1.

B: LOOP AT itab WHERE fld1 = pfld.
C: SUM.
D: WRITE itab-fld1.
218. To grant a set of access privileges to a user ____.
A: enter the authorization profile name in the user master record

B: assign the user to the authority object's list of allowed users
C: include the user name in the ABAP authorization check
D: none of the above
Ans:A
219. Which statement correctly declares a field-symbol?
A: FIELD-SYMBOLS fs.
B: FIELD-SYMBOLS <fs>.
C: FIELD-SYMBOLS [fs].
D: FIELD-SYMBOLS (FS).
Ans:B
220. This event occurs before a selection screen is displayed and may be used to assign
default values.
A: INITIALIZATION.
B: TOP-OF-PAGE.
C: START-OF-SELECTION.
D: GET.
Ans:A
221. In regard to PERFORM, which of the following is NOT a true statement?

A: May be used within a subroutine.
B: Requires actual parameters.
C: Recursive calls are allowed in ABAP.
D: Can call a subroutine in another program.
Ans:B
222. You declare a local data object that retains its value across multiple subroutine
calls using the keyword
A: DATA
B: TYPES
C: PARAMETERS
D: STATICS
Ans:D
223. When creating a transparent table in the ABAP Dictionary, which step
automatically creates the table in the underlying database?
A: Adding technical settings to the table

B: Checking the table syntax
C: Saving the table
D: Activating the table
Ans:D
224. If you forget the syntax of an ABAP keyword, how can you get help on that
keyword?
A: Double-click the keyword

B: Click once on the keyword and press the F1 key
C: Highlight the keyword and press the Enter key
D: Choose the menu path Help -> Settings
Ans:B
225. Entering transaction SE80 will take you to an interface tool for managing
application development objects. This tool is called the ____.
A: ABAP editor
B: ABAP workbench
C: Object list
D: Repository browser
Ans: B
226. The declarative keyword for defining your own data types in an ABAP program is
____.
A: DATA
B: TYPE-GROUPS
C: TYPES
D: DATA-TYPE
Ans:C
227. To output a control break grand total for an entire internal table, use:
A: AT LAST
B: AT NEW
C: ON CHANGE OF
D: LOOP AT itab FROM
Ans:
228. Internal tables passed with TABLES are passed by:
A: Value
B: Value and result
C: Changing
D: Reference
Ans: D
229. SELECT fld1 FROM tab1 INTO fld4

WHERE fld7 = pfld7.
tot = tot + fld4.
ENDSELECT.
A good performance tuning technique would be to change the SELECT statement to use:
A: GROUP-BY.
B: SUM.
C: TOT.
D: MAX.
230. Database locks are sufficient in a multi-user environment.
A: True
B: False
231. Which keyword changes any line within an internal table?
A: INSERT
B: APPEND
C: ALTER
D: MODIFY
Ans: D
232. To get the average value of a database table field as you select it, use ____.
A: GET AVERAGE
B: SELECT AVERAGE
C: SELECT AVG
D: COMPUTE AVG
Ans:
233. In regard to a dynamic WHERE clause, which of the following is not a true
statement?
A: Include an internal table in parentheses without blanks.

B: The IN operator may be used with the dynamic values internal table.
C: The dynamic internal table may have two or more fields.
D: The dynamic internal table may be empty.

Ans:
235. What is the transaction code for the ABAP Dictionary?
A: SE10
B: SE38
C: SE11
D: SE37
Ans:C
236. The TABLES statement declares a data object.
A: True
B: False
Ans:A
237. Given this code:
AT LINE-SELECTION.
Write: /1 'Thanks!'.
What will trigger the output of the word "Thanks!"?
A: Executing the ABAP report

B: Double-clicking a list row
C: Clicking once on a list row and pressing Enter
Ans:
238. --------
239. Before a function module may be tested, it must first be:
A: Linked
B: Authorized
C: Released
D: Active
Ans: D
240. All of the following pertain to a subroutine's local data object except:
A: Declared inside of the subroutine.

B: Available only within the subroutine.
C: Must follow the same declaration syntax as Global data.
D: Value is known to all subroutines
Ans: D
241. After coding an authorization check, what else should you code to handle a failed
check?
A: WRITE 'You are not authorized'.

B: IF SY-SUBRC NE 0. EXIT. ENDIF.
C: Nothing; the program stops automatically.
D: CHECK AUTHORITY-OBJECT
Ans:B
242. In regard to HIDE, which of the following is NOT a true statement?
A: Saves the contents of variables in relation to a list line's row number.

B: The hidden variables must be output on a list line.
C: The HIDE area is retrieved when using the READ LINE statement.
D: The HIDE area is retrieved when an interactive event is triggered.
Ans:
243. If you want to use a SPA/GPA parameter value as a default value for a selection
screen field, use:
A: MATCHCODE OBJECT
B: MODIF ID
C: DEFAULT
D: MEMORY ID
244. To assign an initial value, include this option of the PARAMETERS statement:
A: FIRST
B: INITIALIZATION
C: VALUE
D: DEFAULT
Ans: D
245. To delete duplicate lines from an internal table use the ABAP statement:
A: SORT itab WITH UNIQUE ROWS.

B: REMOVE DUPLICATES FROM itab.
C: DELETE itab.
D: DELETE ADJACENT DUPLICATES FROM itab
Ans: D
246. At runtime Native SQL is converted to ABAP Open SQL.
A: True
B: False
Ans: B

FREE itab.
A: 2
B: 0
C: blank
D: 1
Ans: 2
248. Given this code, what will be the resulting output?

report zabaprg.
DATA: address(45) type C value '1600 Penn Ave.',
street like address.
address = '100 Washington Place'.

WRITE: /1 'He lives at', street.
A: He lives at 100 Washington Place

B: He lives at
C: He lives at 1600 Penn Ave.
D: He lives at 100 Washington Place, 1600 Penn Ave.
E: None of the above
Ans: B
249. For a table field that you create, you may create your own Data Element, but you
must use an existing Domain.
A: True
B: False
Ans: B
NEW DUMPS
Q1> What is the sys var for:
Date Sy-Datum
Time Sy-UZEIT
Username Sy-UNAME
ANS time ( with time zone) -- sy-timelo
Q2> Which statement triggers TOP OF PAGE event?

ANs WRITE
Q3> Which event occurs first?

INITIALIZATION
Q4> What happens after AT SELECTIONSCREEN

VALIDATIONS
Q5> TABLE FOR TRANSACTION codes

TSTC
Q6> Domain and data elements

ans one domain can have many Data Elements.
One Data Element can have ONE domain.
Q7> which has highest precendence
ANS SEARCH HELP AT FIELD LEVEL.
Q8> Default Pass by value in?

RFC
Q9> <> means?

Not equal to
Q10> Invalid Data type?
HEX
Q11> loop
tablename-fldname='Accenture'
Append table
Endloop
ans --> Infinite loop.
Q12> Which event is triggered when 'At Line-Selection'

'PICK' , when there is a double click.
Q13> Progs are

client indep
client dep
ans --> client dependent
Q14> Default mode for file to open ---

Input mode
Q15> Wht cannot b created from se11 ABAP Data dic

Q16> What is created by the following statement:

R_MANTR for MARA-MANTR
ans -- An internal table with the fields sign,options,low,high
Q17> what occurs in next screen?

Information
Q18> Do....Endo which var?

Sy-index
Q19> For structures like tables must have primary key?

ANS TRUE
Q20> wht does Append and collect do?

ANS Append: Adds a row; collect: may or may not add a row.
Q21> Where can we see the o/p of the background processes?

ANS SP01
Q22> RS-SET-SELECTIONSCREEN-STATUS
ANS it sets the GUI screen's status.
Q23> Instruction to transfer the data from the presentation Server to Application Server
ANS GUI_Upload
Q] Instruction to transfer the data from the Application Server to presentation Server
ANS GUI_Download
Q24> Instruction to write fm internal table to file on application server.

Transfer.
Q25> How can u view the short dump(run time errors)?

st22
Q26> If the value is 03 in the ACTVT table then wht will the user b allowed to do?
Display
Q27> Which Of the following is client dependent?

LAyout Forms
Q28> ans --> Change In B ( fr the ques AT NEW B)
Q29> Select All Entries is used for?

Q 30> Wht is the keyword used in the PARAMETERS

Values
Value
Default
ANS Default
Q31> How can internal tables be accessed?

Sequentially
directly
ans-- both sequentially and directly
NEW DUMPS
ABAP DICTIONARY
1. Table T1 wants to ensure that the key field t1-fielda entered is valid against a field t2-fielda in table T2.
Which is the foreign key table
a) T3 from the dictionary
b) T1
c) T2
2. What happens when a 1 to many relationships is encountered with an inner join?

a) Redundant data is not returned to the resultant set
b) Redundant data from the outer table is included
c) Redundant data from the inner table is included
d) Run time error
3. You have made changes to an existing table that contains data. What takes place when the Database
Conversion utility is executed?
a) The table in the database is recreated
b) The indexes for the table needs to manually be reconstructed in the
ABAP Dictionary
c) Both a and b
d) Neither a nor b
4. You have added an append structure to a standard SAP table. What happens to the standard table when a
new version of the table is imported during an upgrade?
a) The standard table is returned to standard. Therefore, the append
structure must be manually re-applied
b) When the standard tables are activated, the append structure is automatically appended
to the standard table
c) The append fields are automatically appended to the table upon activation but you must still
convert the table
d) All append structures are deleted. A new append structure must be created and then appended to
the standard table
1. Subquery is usually more efficient

a) True
b) False
2. What is true about a structure?

a) The STRUCTURES statement is used to define a structure in a program
b) Structures contain data beyond the runtime of a program
c) A physical database table is created for a structure
d) The TABLES statement is used to define a structure in a program
3. Which of the following does not physically exist in the underlying database
a) Internal table
b) View
c) Transparent Table
d) All of the above
4. How can you perform a direct database read from a buffered table?
a) Buffering can be turned off on the application server by the programmer using
the ABAP Workbench
b) Add the BYPASSING BUFFER clause on the select statement
c) Do not have buffering in the technical attributes
d) Cannot be done
5. What can be assigned directly to a data element?

a) Table type
b) Built-in type
c) Table field
d) Check table
6. Which of the following Dictionary Objects gets stored as a Runtime Object?

a) Tables
b) Table Types
c) All of the above
7. Full buffering would be appropriate for what type of tables

a) Tables with generic Keys
b) Internal Tables
c) Small Static tables
d) Transaction Tables
8. Identify the case where table buffering should be set

a) When the most current data is not required
b) When the most current data is required
c) For Global Master Data
d) For Small Static non volatile tables
9. What is true about the primary index of a table?

a) The key fields of the table make up the primary index
b) Database Administrator designates the primary index ID
c) The developer designates the fields to be used as the primary index
10. Conversion exits are attached to

a) Table
b) Table field
c) Data element
d) Domain
11. One of the following statements is false:

a) A transparent table can exist in data dictionary but not in the database physically
b) A transparent table can exist in database but not in the data dictionary
c) Data element can directly refer to built-in type
d) Domain can directly refer to built-in type
12. The following are the lock mode available in Lock objects
a) Exclusive, cumulative
b) Shared
c) All of the above
PERFORMANCE
1. How many records will the resultant set of an inner join contain for the following
The SQL has been written with an INNER JOIN between VBAK
(header; Primary Key = VBELN) and VBAP (Line items; Primary Key = VBELN, POSNR) for o
ne sales order having ten line items? The inner join is on VBELN?
a) No records
b) Five records
c) One record
d) Ten records
1. Identify the inefficient SQL Programming techniques

a) Use of LIKE operator on a non-index field
b) Providing no or very few filter criteria
c) All answers are correct
d) No answers are correct
2. Which workbench tools are used to analyze Database performance?

a) Performance trace (ST05)
b) Extended Program check (SLIN)
c) None of the answers are correct
d) All answers are correct
3. Mark the SQL statement that does not bypass R/3 table buffers
a) SELECT with INNER JOIN
b) SELECT with GROUP BY
c) Select…. Up to 1 Rows
d) SELECT DISTINCT
4. Which of the following are good candidates for R/3 table buffering
a) Change Document tables CDHDR and CDPOS
b) Configuration tables like T001
c) Transactional tables like VBAK
d) Master tables like MARA
1. For large internal tables that are accessed by random key, which is the most efficient READ operation
a) Read a hashed table by table key
b) READ itab with additional BINARY SEARCH clause
c) READ itab by index
2. What field characteristic ensures a table field is a good candidate for indexing
a) The Field is selective
b) The Field overlaps with other index fields
c) The Field is not selective
d) Does not matter
3. Which of the following can cause long running SQL queries on the database
a) SQL with access using a secondary index field
b) SQL that does not pick any DB index
c) For All Entries’ over an INNER JOIN
d) All of the above
4. Which of the following is correct in the case of READ with BINARY SEARCH on a standard internal
table
a) The internal table needs to be sorted using the key fields
b) The internal table need not be sorted
c) The internal table needs to be sorted using the fields in sequence as used in
BINARY SEARCH
5. Accessing the database from which of the following media is the fastest
a) Database buffer (SGA in case of Oracle)
b) R/3 app server buffer
c) All answers are correct
d) Database disk
6. Which of the following are good technical criteria for buffering?
a) Often read, but seldom changed
b) Big, usually > 100MB
c) Temporary data inconsistencies not acceptable
d) Access rarely from Key fields
PROGRAMMING
1. How is security handled at the application level?

a) The authorization concept is used to restrict access to data and transactions
b) The authorization concept is used to restrict access to the dictionary
c) The authorization concept is used to restrict access to servers and work processes
d) The authorization concept is used to restrict access to users
2. What table contains the valid activities and values for a specific authorization object?
a) T100
b) TACT
c) TACTZ
d) T001
3. What is true of passing by value and result in the following code?

Perform calculate_sales using amount.
FORM calculate_sales changing value(f_amount)
a) Formal Parameter f_amount is allocated it’s own memory space

b) Formal parameter is not copied to memory space of actual parameter
c) The address of the actual parameter is passed to the formal parameter
1. How are repository objects organized?

a) By repository class
b) By group
c) By user
d) By development class
2. Which statements would bypass current loop processing in the DO LOOP and continue processing with
the next loop pass
Report ABC.
Data:……
Start-of-Selection.
Perform Form A.
End-of-Selection.
Form A.
Do 10 Times.
A = A + 1.
….
Enddo.
Endform.
a) Continue
b) EXIT
c) Reject
3. What tasks could be performed in SAPNET?

a) Registering customer objects for local development
b) Registering changes to SAP objects
c) Registering changes to customer objects
d) It is not for the customers
4. You are in screen painter. What is a requirement when assigning program fields to the screen?
a) The program must be activated
b) The data objects must be activated
c) Data objects must be activated in the dictionary
d) The fields attributes have to be manually defined in the screen painter
5. When does the ABAP runtime system send a selection screen to the presentation server
a) At the beginning of program processing
b) When the user presses the exit key
c) At the End-of-Selection event
d) When the processing block has ended
6. What clause on the Select statement is used to invoke authorization checking

a) Authority-check
b) CHECK
c) User Master Record
d) It is not possible
7. What is the value of result after the following code is executed. Assume that the user default is set to
Fixed Point Arithmetic
DATA: result TYPE p DECIMALS 2.
Result = '3000.00' * '0.30'.
a) Result = 900.0000
b) Result = 90.00
c) Result = 9000000
8. Which of the statements below is false about subroutines

a) Subroutines can take any amount of parameters
b) Subroutines can be called from within the program and other programs
c) Subroutines are 'expanded' at compilation
d) All of the above
9. The advantages of using text elements are

I) avoids hard coding
II) Text can be maintained without changing the source code
III) Coding effort is reduced
IV) Useful for multi lingual capability
a) I and II only
b) II and III only
c) I, II, III only
d) I, II, IV only
1. What possibilities are made available to the user when using selection screens
a) Write program
b) Select tables
c) User input
d) none
2. What is the default length for Integer Data Types?

a) 4
b) Size must be specified
c) 2
d) 1
3. Identify one that is not an internal table type

a) Standard
b) Hashed
c) Sorted
d) Indented
4. What program type can be executed directly?

a) Include
b) Executable
c) Function Group
d) Class
5. Select the one item that is not a SAP Default Navigation Button on a standard list
a) Back/Exit/Cancel
b) Find
c) Save
d) Cut/Paste
6. Macros can be debugged

a) True
b) False
7. The tool allows you to combine and automate sequences of repeatable transactions in test procedures
a) CAT
b) CATT
c) CCMS
d) TMS
8. Identify the processing blocks of an ABAP program

a) Function
b) Dialog Module
c) Declarations
d) Global data
9. Identify developer tools that are not delivered with R/3?

a) SQL Trace
b) Debugger
c) Dictionary Trace
d) CATT
10. At what point does the standard selection screen (as a result of a select-options) get displayed
a) After Initialization event
b) Before the Report Statement
c) At Start-of-Selection event
d) Prior to Initialization event
11. What kind of internal table is best suited for single record access by key
a) Keyed
b) Sorted
c) Hashed
d) Standard
12. What does the following statement mean

Write 'Hello'(001)
a) Add the variable 'Hello' to message 001

b) This is not a valid statement
c) Write out 'Hello' and the contents of text element 001
d) If Text Element 001 is not in your login language, then 'Hello' is
displayed
13. Ranges are same as number ranges
a) True
b) False
14. For a ABAP object to be transported to another system it has to be assigned to

a) Local Object
b) RFC destination
c) Development class
d) Idoc type
15. Which of the statements below is false about Macro

a) Macros can only be used in the program
b) Macros can take any number of parameters
c) Macros are expanded at compilation
d) Macros cannot be nested
16. Which of the statements below is false about function modules

a) The name of a FUNCTION has to be unique throughout the system
b) Functions can be called internally
c) Both a and b
17. The statement “Describe field f” gives the properties of

a) Field
b) Internal table
c) List
d) All of the above
18. The system variable which gives the number of records fetched in a select statement
is
a) Sy-tabix
b) Sy-index
c) Sy-dbcnt
d) Sy-subrc
USER DIALOG
1. An Internal table is filled with the data below. What are the contents of the header line the first time the
sum statement is executed?
Carrier Connection Seats
AA FFF 10
AA FFF 20
DL FFF 30
report ztest.
…
Data: begin of itab_structure,
carrier like sflight-carrid,
connection like sflight-connid,
seats like sflight-seatsmax,
end of itab_stucture.
Data: itab type standard table of itab_structure
with header line.
loop at itab.
at new carrier.
sum.
endat.
endloop.
a) *****30
b) AA***30
c) AAFFF30
d) AAFFF10
2. What happens to memory when the export is executed without specifying ID

a) The ABAP memory is completely overwritten
b) SAP Memory is overwritten
c) ABAP memory sets up a new default area
3. Which modularization unit do not use ABAP memory pass to data?

a) Parameter Ids
b) Function modules
c) Remove this record
d) Reports called with SUBMIT and Return
4. What happens when number range interval buffering is active for internal numbers
a) Duplicate numbers will never be encountered in the system
b) A programmer can choose to ignore buffering on request
c) The numbering sequence is contiguous
5. What is proper coding practice in the flow logic of a Dynpro when a subscreen is defined on the screen?
a) The Call Subscreen statement is not required
b) Call Subscreen in the PBO only
c) Call Subscreen in the PAI and PBO
d) Call Subscreen in the PAI only
6. Screen 200 follows screen 100. Screen 100 is displayed with GUI Status 'BASE'. Screen 200 is then
displayed without issuing the SET PF-STATUS what will take place
a) Screen 200 is displayed without a status
b) Status 'BASE' is displayed
c) Standard List Status
d) Run Time Error
7. If you do not SUPPRESS DIALOG in a dynpro before you LEAVE TO LIST-PROCESSING, the
following will happen?
a) The report will be displayed on the screen only after the user presses the enter
key
b) The screen will be displayed with the report that was built, but the gui- status will be
the one from the previous screen
c) The previous screen (calling screen) will be redisplayed
1. What is true about extract dataset?

a) More than one extract dataset is allowed per program
b) The header must be defined as one of the field groups
c) Definition of a field group immediately reserves storage space for the fields
d) The field group HEADER is not a part of each extract record
2. In the catch statement, what is every runtime error assigned to

a) Case
b) Error Class
c) Catch Class
d) Development Class
3. Your screen has a table control defined to it. In the PAI, what does the SY-LOOPC system variable
contain?
a) Loop Counter
b) Number of filled lines
c) Number of table control lines
4. What is the result of following code?

DO 4 TIMES.
IF SY-INDEX = 2.
CONTINUE.
ENDIF.
WRITE SY-INDEX.
ENDDO.
a) 1234
b) 134
c) 2
5. What type of ABAP query list would be appropriate if the user wanted to determine the top10 sales
persons?
a) Basic lists
b) Statistics
c) Percentage
d) Ranked lists
6. What does the following code achieve?

At Selection-Screen on value-request for sales.
Call screen 100.
a) When the user presses F1, Screen 100 is displayed instead of the normal possible
values search help
b) When the user presses F4, Screen 100 is displayed instead of the normal possible values
search help
c) When the user presses F1, Screen 100 is displayed in addition to the normal help screen
d) When the user presses F4, Screen 100 is displayed in addition to the normal help screen
7. How many statistics or ranked lists are allowed per query?

a) 1
b) 9
c) 10
d) Unlimited
8. Program A makes a call to program B with “Submit program B and return”. How many LUW’s are
involved?
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 0
9. In PBO, what field contains the total number of lines in table control tc_flight
a) SY-DYNNR
b) TC_FLIGHT-TOTAL_LINES
c) SY-STEPL
d) TC_FLIGHT-LINES
10. Screen 100 calls screen 200. Screen 200 makes a request to perform list processing with the suppress
dialog option. Where does processing resume after returning from the list
a) To the beginning of the transaction
b) There is no return if the statement LEAVE TO LIST-PROCESSING is used
c) To the next screen defined in the screen attributes of screen 100
d) To the next screen defined in the screen attributes of screen 200
11. A screen field has been dynamically changed in a dialog program. When does it get re-initialized?
a) Only when the program encounters more code to modify the field attributes
b) At the end of the transaction
c) At PAI execution
d) At PBO execution
12. What is needed in your tabstrip to have scrolling take place on the application server
a) Assign Function Type = P
b) Assign Function Type = Space
c) Assign Function Code = Space
d) Assign Function Code = P
13. Indicate the functions that are capable of transporting data to screen fields
a) F4IF_FIELD_VALUE_REQUEST
b) DYNPREAD
c) DYNP_VALUES_READ
14. What attribute in a table control must be defined in order to activate row selection functionality
a) LINE_SEL_MODE
b) Function code
c) w/selcolumn
d) TOP_LINE
1. Mark the invalid program text element

a) Text Symbols
b) Parameter
c) Titles/Headers
d) Selection Texts
2. What is the order of events fire?

10 Start-of-Selection
20 End-of-Selection
30 Initialization
40 Get
50 At Selection-Screen
a) 30 10 50 40 20
b) 30 50 10 40 20
c) 50 10 40 10 20
3. Name the transaction used to create background jobs

a) SM13
b) SE12
c) SM37
d) SM36
4. What is the READ LINE statement used for?

a) Reading the Basic List
b) Reading Internal Tables
c) Reading Structures
d) Reading Database Tables
5. The Ok_code serves what purpose

a) Determines successful user action
b) Contains function codes
c) Contains screen field values
6. What happens when a user presses F1 on a screen field

a) The system will display the documentation of the field to which a screen field refers
b) The system will display the documentation of the domain to which a screen field refers
c) The system will display the documentation of the data element to which a screen
field refers
d) The system will display the technical information of the field to which a screen field refers
7. Which Statement Interrupts processing of Current screen?

a) Set Screen 100
b) Call Screen 100
c) Leave to Transaction
d) Leave Screen
8. What field is not mandatory when creating a transaction?

a) Program
b) Authorization Object
c) Screen Number
d) Transaction Text
9. How many At Exit-Command Modules are allowed in the PBO?

a) 1
b) 0
c) Unlimited
d) 2
10. A complex data object must be declared in your Top Include for a table control. What is it's TYPE?
a) CXTAB
b) Table
c) TableControl
d) TableView
11. In a selection screen if the Parameter is left blank, then a select query which has a where condition on
the above field will fetch
a) Entire data in the particular table
b) No data
c) Will give error message
12. Pushbuttons can be placed in the following except

a) Screen
b) Selection screen
c) Menu bar
d) Sub screen
13. What is the option on the “Parameters” statement in a report program to include a SPA/GPA
parameter ID
a) Parameter ID
b) Memory ID
c) Value
d) Default Parameter ID
14. Dialog program consists of the following except

a) Screen
b) Menu
c) Function pool
d) Transaction code
15. Menu bar will have the following menus by default when created
a) File, help
b) System, help
c) Edit, Help
d) Window, System
16. After changing a field attribute in a dynpro, what statement is used to activate the change
a) COMMIT
b) ACTIVATE
c) SET
d) MODIFY
17. Which of the following corresponds to the command entry /ntcod?
a) LEAVE PROGRAM
b) SUBMIT TRANSACTION tcod
c) LEAVE TO TRANSACTION tcod
d) CALL TRANSACTION tcod
18. Where is the current active tab stored for a tabstrip?

a) ACTIVETAB
b) Tab strip
c) Function Code
d) OK_Code
19. What will cause the AT USER-COMMAND to fire

a) Normal Function Codes
b) Type T Functions Codes
c) Type S Function Codes
d) Function Codes that Start with P
20. Within the AT USER-COMMAND processing block which system variable function code
a) SY-GUI
b) SY-FCODE
c) SY-UCOMM
d) SY-KEY
21. Select the method which cannot be used to access data on the database.
a) ABAP/4 Open SQL
b) Read Table
c) LDB
d) Native SQL
22. Mark the sort statement that is more efficient

a) Sort itab by keys
b) Sort Itab Ascending
c) Sort ITAB
d) Sort ITAB BY (fieldname)
23. Number of lines for defining column header in Text elements is

a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
24. Where do you define a LDB to a program

a) Tables Statement
b) Get Statement
c) Data Statement
d) Program Attributes
25. What table is used to store transaction codes?

a) tstc
b) tstct
c) txn
d) txncodes
26. Which statement prevents duplicate internal table entries

a) Delete Duplicates
b) Collect
c) Append
d) Insert
27. What does a LDB provide?

a) Central performance improvements for update accesses
b) Consistent and flexible user interface
c) Method to define access the data in a random manner
IDOC
1. Idoc type has the following as the building blocks

a) Data element
b) Segment
c) Domain
d) Fields
2. Idoc type has the following components except

a) Segment type
b) Segment definition
c) Segment Fields
d) Segment documentation
3. Different types of processing in ALE is as given in the following except
a) Inbound Processing
b) Outbound Processing
c) Message Processing
d) Status Processing
4. In ALE the model view consists of the following information except

a) Sender system
b) Receiver system
c) Message type
d) Idoc type
5. One of the statements is true about ALE status processing

a) Inbound status has number range from 0-49
b) Outbound status has number range from 0-49
c) Inbound status has number range from 50 and above
d) Inbound status has number range from 0-99
6. The smallest unit of entity in Idoc is

a) Field
b) Domain
c) Data element
d) Character
.
ARCHITECTURE
1. What definitions are recommended to be client specific?

a) Customizing
b) Repository
c) Dictionary
d) All of the above
2. Personalization is usually performed outside of the ABAP workbench. Which of the following would be
considered Personalization?
a) SET/GET Parameters
b) Desktop Shortcuts
c) Variant Transactions
d) All of the above
3. What programming language is used to develop the business applications?

a) ABAP
b) C++
c) C
d) Cobol
4. In commercial, organizational and technical terms, a self-contained unit in an R/3 system with separate
master records and its owns set of tables is called as
a) Instance
b) Application server
c) Client
d) Database
5. What is used by Basis to move Repository objects across SAP systems?

a) Customizing Organizer
b) Workbench Organizer
c) Transport System
d) ABAP Workbench
6. Static data records that have a long life are considered to be

a) Master Data
b) Client data
c) Transactional data
d) Customer documents
7. The start of an SAP Transaction also marks the start of what?

a) DB LUW
b) Asynchronous Update
c) SAP LUW
d) Commit Point
8. The system R/3 agent that identifies the type of task and sends the job to an idle work process is called as
a) Work process
b) Instance
c) Dispatcher
d) Roll Area
9. What are the tasks of the dispatcher?

a) Assigning users to work processes
b) Release locks
c) Distributing transaction load
d) Performing program syntax checks
10. What is the role of the dispatcher?

a) Dispatches tasks to non R3 systems
b) Issues SQL requests to the underlying database
c) Manages services between R/3 systems
d) Controls resources for the R/3 applications
11. Which is not a type of RFC call

a) Synchronous
b) Remote
c) Asynchronous
d) Transactional
12. How many servers in a 3-tier R/3 system

a) 3 for each tier
b) 1
c) Only 3
d) At least 3
13. How would you determine the program name currently being executed?
a) F4
b) F9
c) Use menu option System>Status
d) Look in the dictionary
14. Which work process manages SAP locks?

a) Gateway
b) Dequeue
c) Enqueue
d) Authorization management
15. What type of object is recorded in customizing change requests?

a) Versions
b) Client independent
c) Client specific
d) System Wide
16. What is the system landscape that SAP recommends?

a) 3 clients in 1 system
b) 1 client in 3 separate systems
c) 3 clients in 3 separate systems
d) All are recommended
1. Identify the order of tasks that would take place in a development project
A. Project Leader creates a change request and assigns developers to the change request
B. Developer creates repository objects and assigns objects to a development class
C.WBO creates a task for each developer assigned to the change request
D. Project Leader releases change request
E. Developer releases task
F. Objects are exported to the transport directory
a) B A C D E F
b) A C B E D F
c) A B C D E F
d) Any sequence
2. A user has made a modification to a SAP subroutine. A new upgrade release is to be applied and SAP
has made modifications to the same subroutine that the user has modified. What will happen during
upgrade using the modification assistant?
a) The modification assistant will prompt you for a change request to reapply the change
b) Options 'replace' and 'insert' is made available for you to decide on how to handle the
upgrade
c) The user modifications are automatically inserted into the new subroutine release
d) The user modifications must be reapplied manually
3. What interface protocol is RFC based on

a) LU6.2
b) CPI-C
c) SNA
d) TCP/IP
4. What part of an SAP system is responsible for converting OPEN SQL statements to Native SQL?
a) Basis System
b) Dispatcher
c) Database Server
d) Database Interface
5. Which is not a valid R3 configuration

a) Three Tier
b) Two tier client server
c) Central
d) Single Database
1. What type of requests are used to transport repository objects

a) Object Browser
b) Workbench
c) Customizing
d) Repository
2. A business user makes a request to have an ABAP program modified. What factors will contribute to a
successful modification of the program
a) Keep a modification log of all changes
b) The developer should encapsulate the code into modularization units
c) Both a and b
3. Which service is responsible for communication between distributed dispatchers?

a) Dialog
b) Message
c) Gateway
d) Communication
4. What is a R/3 system?

a) Instance plus system services
b) Instance plus Database
c) Database
d) Multiple Application Servers
5. Which Basis configuration would typically run on one server?

a) Database
b) 2 Tier Presentation
c) 3 Tier
d) Central
6. What does SAPNET not provide?

a) Seek Problem resolution
b) Search the Note database
c) Look for training courses
d) Connect to other SAP sites
7. What message types can be generated by transactional documents?

a) Abend
b) Email
c) Workflow
d) All of the above
8. What administration function is not provided by CCMS?

a) Starting and stopping SAP
b) System Alerts
c) Program Syntax Checks
d) System Configuration
9. Define Instance
a) Multiple application servers
b) Work processes only
c) A presentation, application and database server
d) Dispatcher, work processes, and services
DATA TRANSFER
1. You are recording a transaction using the transaction recorder. The Parameter ID has set the value of a
field on the screen. What needs to be done in order to capture the screen field by the recorder?
a) You must manually program parameter ID's
b) Do not touch the screen field
c) Modify the screen field to a new value
d) Modify the screen field to the same value
2. Where is the transaction data stored for a batch input session?

a) APQD - session body
b) APQD - session header
c) APQI - session body
1. In each call of function BDC_INSERT the BDC table contains data for
a) More than 1 transaction
b) Only 1 transaction
c) Only 1 dynpro screen
d) Dynpro screen conversion
2. Which of the definitions best describes a BAPI?

a) BAPI is a programming language that external parties use to update R/3 Data
b) BAPI is a programming interface that provide external access to R/3 Data
c) BAPI provides internal representation of SAP Data
3. How is the data posted in a batch input session?

a) Real time
b) Always synchronously
c) Always asynchronously
d) Either synchronously or asynchronously
4. Identify a valid LSMW import technique

a) Class Objects
b) Transaction Recorder
c) EDI
d) Enjoy Controls
5. What does the Direct Input Method use to perform the data transfer?
a) Controls
b) Batch input
c) Call Transaction
d) Functions
6. Using SM35, what is not a valid column displayed on the Batch Input Session Overview screen
a) Created By
b) Locked
c) Time
d) Statistics
7. Datasets are used for downloading or uploading data from/to

a) Presentation server
c) Database server
d) Middleware
8. Function module GUI_UPLOAD is used for uploading data from

a) Presentation server
c) Database server
d) Middleware
9. What is a requirement of the legacy data, in order for the standard SAP transfer programs to work
properly?
a) It must be initialized to blanks first
b) It must be delivered in character format
c) It must be received in upper case
d) It must be delivered in binary format
10. What is the authorization object S_BDC_MONI used for?

a) Online transaction access
b) BDC processing
c) BDC scheduling
d) BDC creation
11. Errors are automatically logged in the following BDC method

a) Call transaction method
b) Call session method
c) Both a and b
12. What is true about the KEEP parameter in the function BDC_OPEN_GROUP
a) Will only save the log when set
b) Does not have to be set to retain sessions with errors
c) Will delete successful sessions when KEEP is set to X
d) Can not be defaulted
13. How are fields handled that are not used in a SAP record layout structure?
a) They must be deleted from the structure
b) They must be filled with a NODATA character
c) They must be initialized to spaces
d) All of the above
14. How many BDC sessions can an ABAP program have open at one time?
a) Unlimited
b) Only one
c) Only 2
d) It depends on the name of the session
15. A dataset can be opened using which options to create a fixed length record format
a) In text mode for input
b) In binary mode for output
c) In text mode for appending
d) In binary mode for appending
16. File ABC DOES NOT Exist on the Application server. What is the effect of "OPEN DATASET ABC
FOR APPENDING"?
a) File is opened but cannot be written to
b) File cannot be created and SY-SUBRC is set to 8
c) A new file is created
17. What reserved word is required for platform specific physical paths in the assignment of a logical path
to a physical path?
a) Filename
b) Fieldpath
c) Path
d) Class path
18. What is not contained in the Include BDCRECXX?

a) Functions to open and close BDC sessions
b) BDC Insert Record Structure
c) BDCDATA Record Structure
d) Select-Options
19. Which are optional parameters on the Call Transaction Using.. .. Statement
a) Update
b) Using
c) Local
d) All of the above
20. What is required if you are going to transfer legacy data into SAP using a STANDARD transfer
program
a) You must format the data according to the SAP specified format
b) You must create a sequential file in your own format
c) You must develop the ABAP code yourself
d) RFC destination has to be created
1. Which is not a valid Call Transaction processing mode?

a) N
b) E
c) S
d) A
2. What processing is performed by the DOWNLOAD function?
a) Moves data from an internal table to a file on the presentation server
b) Moves data from a record structure to a file on the application server
c) Moves data from an internal table to a file on the application server
d) All of the above
3. What is one of the first things the developer/user should do before a customer transfer program is
developed?
a) Make sure your Sap license is valid
b) Write a conversion program
c) Record the transaction that is to be loaded
4. What transaction will take you to the Data Transfer Workbench?

a) TXDA
b) SHDB
c) SM35
d) SXDA
5. What are rules in the LSMW used for?

a) Calculating Amount of space needed
b) Converting data from the external system
c) Determining the transaction to be loaded
d) All of the above
6. What is not a valid Data Transfer Method?

a) Batch Input
b) Call Method
c) BAPI
d) All of the above
7. What will happen if a Transfer statement is issued on a file that has not yet been opened?
a) ABAP will attempt to open the file for input
b) ABAP will issue a syntax error
c) ABAP will attempt to open the file for output
d) ABAP will issue a runt time error
DATABASE UPDATES
1. What is true about V2 updates within the same SAP LUW?

a) Each V2 function module for a given COMMIT WORK always runs in its own (separate)
DB LUW
b) They are usually time critical updates
c) An error in one V2 function module cause all other V2 functions to be rolled
back
d) V2 errors cause V1 updates to be rolled back
2. Refer to the following code. How would you program a generic lock on all rows of a table that have key
values 'AA', '111' for the first 2 fields
Call Function Enqueue_ESMYLOCK
Exporting
Field1 = …
Field2 = …
Field3 = …
a) Field1 = Generic, Field2 = Generic, Field3 = Space

b) Field 1 = ’AA’, FIELD2 = ’111’, Field3 = Initial
c) Field 1 = ’AA’, FIELD2 = ’111’, Field3 = Space
d) It is not possible in this case
3. Defining a Lock Object as Exclusive would specify what kind of locking
a) Prevents a single user with read-write access from attaining further locks to the
same set of table rows. This is useful when you are using recursive routines to make updates
b) Allows multiple users to access the specified table rows, but with read-access only. No write-
accesses are allowed at any time
c) Gives single users read and write access to the specified table rows. No other users may
access the rows
4. The Scope Parameter for your lock object function module has been set to 2. What does this imply?
a) Locks generated in the dialog program are passed on to the update program
b) You must release the locks programmatically
c) An update termination error holds the locks
d) The locks are not automatically released when the updates complete
5. When a COMMIT WORK is issued, in what order does processing occur. Refer to the following code
1. Dialog-task FORM routines logged with PERFORM.. ON COMMIT
2. High-priority (V1) update-task function modules.
3. Low-priority (V2) update-task function modules.
a) 3, 2, 1
b) 2, 3, 1
c) 1, 2, 3
d) 1, 3, 2
1. What attribute on an update task function module determines how update requests are processed
a) Application
b) Function Group
c) Function Type
d) Processing type
2. When are V2 updates processed?

a) After all V1's are complete
b) Before V1's are started
c) After each related V1
d) Parallel to relative V1's
3. How does a Perform… on Commit differ from a Perform statement?
a) Subroutines called using on commit have no interface
b) Subroutines called using on commit pass parameters by value only
c) Subroutines called using on commit pass parameters by reference only
4. If you trigger a lock object and some other user already locks it, what exception would be raised?
a) 01 - Foreign_Lock
b) 03 - Already_Locked
c) 08 - General_Failure
d) 02 - System Failure
5. What message type does not implicitly trigger database commits for the table updates specified in your
program
a) E type MESSAGE statement
b) I type MESSAGE statement
c) A type MESSAGE statement
d) W type MESSAGE statement
6. Which update request always run asynchronously

a) Transactional
b) Local
c) V2
d) V1
7. What takes place after each dialog step?

a) System passes a Database commit to the database system
b) The SAP LUW is concluded
c) A Commit Work is executed
d) The application gathers data for update processing
8. Which statements would conclude a SAP LUW?

a) ROLLBACK WORK
b) CALL Transaction
c) MESSAGE S101
d) All of the above
9. Which does not provide synchronous processing

a) An update-task function module triggered with COMMIT WORK
b) Batch Input Programs
c) PERFORM.. .. ON COMMIT
d) An update-task function module triggered with COMMIT WORK AND WAIT
1. When activating a Lock object, what is subsequently generated?

a) Generic Lock Keys
b) A Dictionary Table
c) Function Modules
2. How would you define a lock object?

a) Use the Data Browser
b) Create it as an object in the dictionary
c) Through a Function Call
d) Any of the above
3. How could you reset the program context of your program?

a) End the dialog program
b) Issue a COMMIT WORK statement
c) Issue a warning message (type W)
d) Issue a ROLLBACK WORK statement in the program
4. What is true about using memory to pass data?

a) Each external session has own ABAP memory
b) SAP Memory cannot be accessed by all external sessions
c) ABAP memory can be accessed by SAP memory
d) ABAP memory is used to pass data between the external sessions of
an internal session
5. What order is recommended when setting and releasing locks in your program
a) Lock data, read data, release locks, update database
b) Read data, lock data, update database, release locks
c) Lock data, read data, update database, release locks
d) Any of the above order
6. Three Locks have been set in a Transaction. What are methods that would cause the release of all three?
a) CALL FUNCTION DEQUEUE_ALL
b) Reset Command
c) Commit Work
DEBUGGING
1. How would you set breakpoints in your program for debugging?

a) In the program editor, set breakpoint
b) In Development workbench, set breakpoint
c) Start program in background mode
d) Not possible
2. Break points can be set at the following except

a) Subroutines
b) Function modules
c) Macros
d) Statements
ENHANCEMENTS
1. Match the definition in group 1 with the exit type in group 2

Group 1
a. Placing your own code in the include of a supplied function module
b. Defining your own text for the supplied function codes
c. Creating subscreens for the subscreen areas
d. Adding function modules for the data elements
Group 2
1. Field Exit
2. Screen Exit
3. Menu Exit
4. Function Exit
a) B-1, A-4, C-3, D-2

b) A-4, B-3, C-2, D-1
c) A-3, B-2, C-1, D-4
d) A-2, B-3, C-1, D-4
2. A user has made a modification to a SAP subroutine. A new upgrade release is to be applied and SAP
has made modifications to the same subroutine that the user has modified. What will happen during
upgrade using the modification assistant?
a) Options 'replace' and 'insert' is made available for you to decide on how to handle the
upgrade
b) The modification assistant will prompt you for a change request to reapply the change
c) The user modifications are automatically inserted into the new subroutine release
d) The user modifications must be reapplied manually
1. In the case of a screen exit, how is global data accessed by the Subscreen
a) The developer uses preplanned function module exits
b) Use the MOVE statement to move the screen data to the TOP include
. of the subscreen
c) Global data is available to subscreens so no special programming is
required
2. Which is not considered a way to tailor an R/3 system

a) Personalization
b) Enhancement
c) Customizing
d) Interfacing
3. Where in a function module XAAA would global data of an enhancement be declared?

a) In the TOP include ZxaaaTOP
b) In the TOP include LxaaaTOP
c) In the TAP include LxaaaTAP
d) In the Include with your other code changes
4. What is an SD User Exit technically considered

a) Customizing
b) User Include
c) Modification
d) Enhancement
5. A customer defined enhancement project uses function group XG99. Identify the invalid include
generated for the enhancement project
a) ZXG99F01
b) ZXG99E01
c) ZXG99L01
d) ZXG99U01
6. Identify the valid statement when coding a field exit" width

a) MESSAGE I101
b) SUBMIT RSCA101X.
c) BREAK-POINT
d) MESSAGE E101
7. What is characteristic of a modification to SAP?

a) New versions may need to be adjusted to include the modification
b) Changes are lost during an upgrade to a new release
c) Adjustment is automatic during an upgrade
d) Modified objects lose their connection to the standard
8. What is true about append structures

a) A table can have more than one append structure
b) A table can have only one append structure
c) An append-structure can be assigned to more than one specific table
d) All of the above
9. How many modification logs are available in your system

a) Determined by Basis group - this is a configurable item
b) Minimum of 1
c) 0
d) Maximum of 1
10. Where in a function exit does the customer code get inserted?
a) In the include of the calling program that calls the function
b) In the include program that can be found in the function module that
corresponds to the enhancement component
c) In the function module itself that corresponds to the enhancement component
d) In the program that calls the function module that corresponds to the enhancement component
11. How does a customer benefit by using SSCR

a) To log enhancements made by a development user
b) To log modifications made by a development user
c) To log Customizing made by a development user
d) All of the above
12. What keyword would you look for in order to determine if a screen exit has been provided by SAP?
a) CALL CUSTOMER-SCREEN
b) CALL CUSTOMER-SUBSCREEN
c) CALL SCREEN-EXIT
d) CALL SCREEN CUSTOMER
13. If you want to make a change to the standard delivered SAP system to fit your business needs, what is
the first thing you should do?
a) Create a custom object within the customer name range
b) Check configuration to see if the proposed change is feasible
c) Change the relevant SAP repository object
d) Log on to OSS and ask SAP to apply the change
1. Which of the following types of enhancements do not need to be assigned to an enhancement project
a) Menu exit
b) Screen
c) Program exit
d) Field exit
2. What is the customer name range for fields in an append structure

a) ZZ or YY
b) ZZ_ or YY_
c) Z or Y
d) Z_ or Y_
3. What term is used when a developer makes a change to an SAP object

a) Modification
b) Custom development
c) User Exit
d) Copy
4. If you noticed a function code in a menu that began with + (plus sign), what type of exit would you be
observing
a) A text exit
b) A screen exit
c) A menu exit
d) A program exit
5. What term is used when a developer makes a change to an SAP object?
a) Copy
b) Modification
c) Custom development
d) User Exit
6. What type of requests are used to transport repository objects

a) Workbench
b) Customizing
c) Repository
d) Object Browser
7. Which of the following methods require higher maintenance when new releases of SAP are installed
a) Customizing
b) Enhancements to the SAP Standard
c) Modifications to the SAP Standard
d) Append Structures
8. If you are using a screen exit provided by a SAP application, when typically does the data get exported
to the subscreen
a) In a PAI module of the main screen
b) In a PBO module of the main screen
c) In a PBO module of the subscreen
d) In a PAI module of the subscreen
9. What object is not supported by the modification assistant?
a) Text Elements
b) Menus
c) Functions
d) User exits
10. Identify the key word that determines if a CMOD function exit has been provided" width
a) CALL PROGRAM-EXIT
b) CALL CUSTOMER-FUNCTION
c) CALL CUSTOMER-SUBSCREEN
d) CALL USER-EXIT
11. What transaction should be used to change keywords and short texts for SAP data elements
a) SE12
b) SMOD
c) SE30
d) CMOD
12. What is the term used when a change is made to a customer object in a system other than the original
system
a) Change
b) Modification
c) Correction
d) Repair
RFC-BAPI
1. RFC Destination is maintained in transaction

a) SE59
b) SM59
c) SM13
d) SE13
2. The RFC types are the following except

a) Queue RFC
b) Asynchronous RFC
c) Transaction RFC
d) Background RFC
3. The transactional RFC is stored in the following tables

a) ARFCSSTATE
b) ARFCSDATA
c) Both a and b
4. One of the statements is true about tRFC

a) The function module is executed exactly once
b) The function module is executed more than once
c) The function module is executed at least once
d) The function module is executed 3 times
5. Different type of RFC destinations can be the following except

a) R/2 connection
b) Internal connection
c) CPIC connection
d) Logical destination
6. Append and include structure is not allowed in BAPI data structures

a) True
b) False
7. The following steps has to be carried out to release a BAPI except

a) Release the BAPI Function Module
b) Release the Business Object Type in the BOR
c) Release the BAPI data structure
d) Release the BAPI as a method in the BOR
8. One of the statements regarding BAPI is false

a) BAPI has an underlying Remote enabled Function module
b) Exception cannot be raised in BAPI
c) Screen can be output using BAPI
d) BAPI must have its own authorization check
9. BAPI can be called from ABAP, JAVA, VB.etc

a) True
b) False
SAP-SCRIPTS
1. Of the following which one is the window type for a form?

a) Variable Window
b) Main Window
c) Constant Window
d) All of the above
2. Standard texts are created using transaction

a) SE10
b) SM10
c) SO10
3. Of the following function modules, one is not related to sapscript

a) OPEN_FORM
b) CLOSE_FORM
c) EXIT_FORM
d) END_FORM
4. One of the following statements regarding smartforms is false

a) Sapscript has form painter for creating the layout of a form
b) Sapscript has PC Editor for entering texts and fields into output areas
c) Sapscript has navigation tree for maintaining the form logic
d) Sapscript has a wizard to create the layout
5. One of the transactions is not related to smartforms

a) SMARTSTYLES
b) SMARTFORMS
c) SMARTTEXTS
d) SE71
6. One of the system fields is not used in smartforms

a) SFSY-DATE
b) SFSY-TIME
c) SFSY-FORMNAME
d) SFSY-PAGENAME
1. Find the statements that are true: sapscript

a) Are client specific
b) Are modified using transaction SE71
c) Can have specific styles defined
d) All of the above
2. Barcodes can be printed in sapscript

a) True
b) False
3. Sapscript form contains the following except

a) Paragraph format
b) Windows
c) Page windows
d) Selection texts
4. Logos cannot be printed on a sapscript

a) True
b) False
5. Role of an ABAP program in sapscript is the following except

a) Retrieves application data from the DB
b) Chooses a layout set for printing
c) Select the output device
d) Formats the layout set
6. One of the graphic formats which is supported in Smartforms is

a) .bmp
b) .tiff
c) .gif
d) .jpg
7. Given below are some of the control commands in sapscript except

a) Protect
b) New-page
c) Tables
d) Define
NEW DUMPS
System data
Organizational Data
Project Data
Master Data
When a SQL Update is performed

When user presses F1 - Technical info
When a SQL Insert is performed
In Screens only
contains only entries that match in the on clause

contains all entries from the left table
contains all entries from the right table
fields from unmatched rows in the right table are null filled
fields from unmatched rows in the left table are null filled
The append fields are automatically appended to the table upon activation but you must still
convert the table
When the standard tables are activated, the append structure is automatically appended to
the standard table
The standard table is returned to standard.Therefore, the append structure must be
manually re-applied
All append structures are deleted. A new append structure must be created and then
appended to the standard table
Data Elements
Data Models
Domains
Tables
Documentation
table type
domain
built-in type
check table
table field
The key fields of the table make up the primary index

The developer designates the fields to be used as the primary index
The primary index ID is designated by the Database Adminstrator
The primary index is automatically created when the table is activated
same data type only is required for check field and referenced field
all key fields MUST have domain equality between check table and foreign key table
same domain is required for check field and referenced field
same data element is required for check field and referenced field
To provide data security at the application level

To insulate the ABAP/4 developer from the database
To support the creation and management of metadata
To connect to the operating system
A view contains data

Maintenance Views are not updateable
A view is automatically created on the database upon activation
Views can be buffered
Field Name
Status
Size Category
Data Class
Buffering
A Left Outer Join is not permitted in OPEN SQL

A join statement is found to the right of the join operator
Only 'Or' can be used as a logical operator in the ON condition
At least one field frorm the table on the right is required for comparison in the ON condition
T3 from the dictionary

T2
T1
One record of the check table is assigned to many records of the foreign key table
Many records of the check table are assigned to one record of the foreign key table
One record of the foreign key table is assigned to one record in the check table
Sales Order
Vendors
Country Keys
Cost Centres
Data Models
Data Elements
Data definitions
Structures
Table Types
Structures contain data beyond the runtime of a program.
The STRUCTURES statement is used to define a structure in a program
The TABLES statement is used to define a structure in a program
A physical database table is created for a structure
Domain short text

Data element documentation
Search help
Domain Help values
contains all entries from both tables

contains all entries from the right table
contains only entries that match
contains all entries from the left table
type
data element
table field
check table
table
Length
Fixed Values
Label
Type
Header
Data Base Modify

All database access
Data Base Retrieval
Data Base Updates
It does not correspond to an object in the underlying database and does not get created
When the table is activated
When the database administrator physically creates the table
At the end of the table creation after it is saved.
At the beginning of the table creation
Add an elementary search help to the standard search help

Perform a modification to the standard search help
Add a collective search help to the standard search help
Enhance the standard search help with an append search help
the choice can be made to use or bypass buffers

buffers are always used
buffers are always bypassed
Transparent Table
View
Internal table
Structure
data is filtered in the database

data is filtered in the sapgui
data is filtered on the network
data is filtered at the application server
Next time user signs on

After Database is re-organized
Immediately, providing the object is activated
Next time program is re-generated
$INIT
$TAB
$FREE
$RESET
All of the answers are correct

Tables
Data Elements
Structures
Table Types
redundant data from the 'left hand table' is included

redundant data from the 'right-hand table' is included
redundant data from either table is not returned to the resultant set
run time error
For Global Master Data

For Small Static non volatile tables
When the most current data is required
When the most current data is not required
Buffering can be turned off on the application server by the programmer using the ABAP
Workbench
Add the BYPASSING BUFFER clause on the select statement
Do not have buffering in the technical attributes
data element
domain
values
nothing
The field must be linked to another field of type CUKY

The field must be numeric
No other requirement exists
Decimals must be defined in the domain
restrict value range

administration data
Import
Export

The revised table in the ABAP/4 Dictionary is activated
Data in the table is automatically deleted and must be reloaded
The table in the database is renamed and eventually deleted
The table in the database is recreated
The indexes for the table needs to manually be reconstructed in the ABAP Dictionary
When you activate a transparent table in the ABAP Workbench

When you activate a transparent table in the Dictionary
When Basis creates the tablespace at the OS layer
When you create a transparent table
Value Table
Repository
Domain
Dictionary
Data Element
Foreign key fields can accept only values which exist in the check table
Foreign key fields can accept any values regardless of the check table
Check table fields can accept only values which exist in the check table
When a table is read frequently and the data is always changing

When a table is read infrequently
When a table is read frequently and the data seldom changes
When a table is linked to check tables
The key of the text table consists of the key of the check table plus an additional language key
Cardinality must be defined as 1:1
The type of foreign key field defined must be "No Key /Candidates"
Value Range
Admin data
SPOS
LPOS
DPOS
Transparent Table
Database View
SearchHelp
Help Query
Small Static tables

Internal Tables
Tables with generic Keys
Transaction Tables
The first field is mandt with a external data type CLNT and specified as a key field
The first field is mandt with a domain CLNT but not specified as a key field
The option 'Client Specified' is added to the Select statement
Depends how Basis has configured the client
Semantic Domain
Physical Definition
Technical Domain
Business Object
specify conditions in the FROM clause

There is no way to omit records from the left table
specify conditions in the ON clause
specify conditions in the WHERE clause
structure
table
table type
structured type
dialog behaviour
user master record parameters
the interface of the search help
the selection method that determines the values to be displayed
When the database administrator physically creates the table

At the end of the table creation after it is saved
When the table is activated
At the beginning of the table creation
It does not correspond to an object in the underlying database and does not get created
NEW DUMPS
A: SET USER-COMMAND
B: SET PF-STATUS
C: CALL FUNCTION
D: AT USER-COMMAND
Ans: A
A: SE16
B: SE10
C: SE36
D: SE37
Ans: A
A: SKIP.
B: COMMENT.
C: TEXT.
D: FIELD.
Ans: B
A: ACCEPTING CASE
B: LOWER CASE
C: UPPER CASE
D: CASE
Ans: B
A: ROWS 50
B: INDEX 50
C: DEFAULT 50
D: INITIAL SIZE 50
Ans: D
*188. Which Open SQL statement should not be used with cluster databases?
A: UPDATE
B: MODIFY
C: DELETE
D: INSERT
Ans:DELETE

Ans: A
following except:

transaction.
Ans: B
*195. In regard to data transported in PAI when the FIELD statement is used, which of


SELECT_ENDSELECT.
A: True
B: False
Ans: A

Ans: A

Ans: A

Ans: B
A: AT LAST
B: AT NEW
C: ON CHANGE OF
Ans: A
*233. In regard to a dynamic WHERE clause, which of the following is not a true
statement?

screen field, use:
A: MATCHCODE OBJECT
B: MODIF ID
C: DEFAULT
D: MEMORY ID
Ans: D
18. Assuming tab1-fld7 is not a key field, how can you prevent reading all the table rows?
WHERE fld7 = pfld7.
ENDSELECT.
A: Take fld7 out of the WHERE clause.

B: Create an index in the ABAP Dictionary for tab1-fld7.
C: Use INTO TABLE instead of just INTO.
D: Take the WRITE statement out of the SELECT_ENDSELECT.
19. Which of the following is NOT a required attribute when creating an ABAP program?
A: Application
B: Title
C: Status
D: Type
21. Within the ABAP program attributes, Type = 1 represents:
A: INCLUDE program
B: Online program
C: Module pool
D: Function group
E: Subroutine pool


D: Nothing
9. To read a single line of an internal table, use the following:
A: LOOP AT itab. _ ENDLOOP.

B: READ itab.
C: SELECT SINGLE * FROM itab.
D: READ TABLE itab

25. In regard to data transported in PAI when the FIELD statement is used, which of the following
is NOT a true statement?

D: Fields that are defined in FIELD statements are transported when their corresponding module
is called.
29. Assuming a pushbutton with function code 'FUNC' is available in the toolbar of a list report,
what event is processed when the button is clicked?
A: AT USER-COMMAND.
B: AT PFn.
30. In regard to field selection, what option of the SELECT statement is required?
A: FOR ALL ENTRIES

B: WHERE
C: INTO
D: MOVE-CORRESPONDING
32. To declare a selection criterion that does not appear on the selection screen, use:
A: NO-DISPLAY
B: INVISIBLE
C: MODIF ID
D: OBLIGATORY
35. Which of the following would be best for hiding further selection criteria until a function is
chosen?
A: AT NEW SELECTION-SCREEN
B: SELECTION-SCREEN AT LINE-SELECTION
C: SUBMIT SELECTION-SCREEN
D: CALL SELECTION-SCREEN

66. When is it optional to pass an actual parameter to a required formal parameter of a function
module?
A: The actual parameter is type C.

B: The formal parameter contains a default value.
C: The formal parameter's \"Reference\" attribute is turned on.
D: It is never optional.
68. Adding a COMMIT WORK statement between SELECT_ENDSELECT is a good method for
improving performance.
A: True
B: False
70. To bypass automatic field input checks, include this in PAI.
A: AT EXIT-COMMAND
B: ON INPUT
C: ON REQUEST
D: LEAVE TO SCREEN 0
71. Within a function module's source code, if the MESSAGE_RAISING statement is executed,
all of the following system fields are filled automatically except:
A: SY-MSGTY
B: SY-MSGNO
C: SY-MSGV1
D: SY-MSGWA********
17) What is sequence of event triggered in report?
There are 6 events in report:

1) Initialization
2) At Selection-Screen
3) Start-of-Selection
4) Get
5) Get Late
6) End-of-Selection
7) Top-of-Page
End-of-Page
9) At Line Selection
10) At User Command
11) At PF (nn)
WHERE fld7 = pfld7.
ENDSELECT.
D: Take theWRITE statement out of the SELECT_ENDSELECT.
chosen?

A: AT EXIT-COMMAND***********
B: ON INPUT
C: ON REQUEST
D: LEAVE TO SCREEN 0.
1) Authorization Objects
( this question has more than 1 answer )
a) Stored in User Master
b) Defines fields for a complex authority check******
c) Grouped together in profiles *******
d) Covers up to 10 fields ******
e) Consists of up to 10 authorization objects
2) Authorization Checking
a) performed with SELECT statement
b) performed with AUTHORITY-CHECK ******
c) determines if user has authority in master record
d) always refers to authorization profile ******
e) system admin defines which authorization checks are executed
3) Authorization
a) contains value for field of an authorization object *****
b) defines fields for a complex authorization object
c) can be grouped together in profiles *****
d) always refer to a particular authorization
e) authorizations and profiles are stored in user master record
4) Using SM35 – in which case does the system check authorization:

a) always
b) process / foreground ******
c) display errors only *****
d) process / background ******
e) system decides based on profile
5) Search Helps:
a) called at POV ******
b) controls how fixed values are displayed when F4 is pressed
c) allow different views of info when help is required ******
d) object stored in data dictionary ********
e) field names starting with H_
6) Append Structures
a) append to table without modifying table itself ******
b) can be assigned to several tables
c) same as substructure
d) use like any other structure ********
e) you must convert table once append is added
7) Check table
a) value table assigned to a domain ******
b) internal table whose contents are used to check input values
c) table assigned to 1 or more fields if a FK (foreign key) table for checking input values *******
d) table for which a FK is defined
e) table to which a FK refers ********
8) Modify SAP objects:

a) R/3 prevents modifications be user id DDIC and SAP*
b) Objects can be changed with registration **********
c) Register objects in OSS *********
d) Carry out modification without registration
e) Adjust modified object in upgrade ***********
9) Activities required at upgrade when applying hot pack:

a) adjust modified object ******
b) everything is automatic
c) release correction before update *******
d) abap dictionary tables, data elements and domains are adjusted during upgrade *******
e) abap dictionary objects not handled seperately
10) SELECT-OPTIONS COUNTRY FOR LFA1-LAND1:

What will internal table be?
a) LAND1
b) LFA1
c) COUNTRY ******
d) LFA1-LAND1
11) In program A function module F is called from function group G for the first time. Which one is
correct:
a) coding of entire function group G is loaded in the roll area *****
b) global data from A can be accessed in F
c) A and F have common work areas for dictionary table
d) Function module F is called in a separate internal session
e) Function module F can not call any sessions
12) from transaction A you call transaction B with LEAVE TO TRANSACTION B:
a) internal system session opened for B ********
b) LEAVE can be used to return from B to A
c) Data from A can be accessed in B
d) A can pass data to B with export *******
e) A can pass data using SET ******
13) What is a SAP LUW:

a) a modularised unit in ABAP programs
b) all the updates for 1 SAP transaction
c) a logical grouping of database updates that should all be performed at the same time *******
d) the section of program code from setting a lock until it is released
e) all actions between first and last database update in transaction
14) Why do update functions have attributes of either START NOW (v1) or START
DELAYED(V2):
a) define whether update task triggered immediately
b) combine synchronous and asynchronous updates
c) assign different priorities ********
d) take different speed of servers into account
e) enable reaction to termination n V1
15) Relationship between SAP transactions and database transactions:

a) each SAP corresponds to one database
b) update requests of one SAP transaction are distributed amongst several database transactions
*******
c) one database group change request of several SAP
d) database transaction is an internal system representation of SAP transactions
10. Which of the following is not a true statement in regard to a hashed internal table type?
A: Its key must always be UNIQUE.
B: May only be accessed by its key.
C: Response time for accessing a row depends on the number of entries in the table.
D: Declared using internal table type HASHED TABLE.
chosen?
B: SELECTION-SCREEN AT LINE-SELECTION*******
25. In regard to data transported in PAI when the FIELD statement is used, which of the following
is NOT a true statement?
D: Fields that are defined in FIELD statements are transported when their corresponding module
is called.
***************************************************************************************************************
*********
test1
Q.No Question Option A Option B Option C Option D AnswSimp
1 ERP stands for Enterprise Reserves Enterprise ResearchEnterprise Resource plann Enterprise RequiC S
2 ABAP is a _________generation languageFirst Second Third Fourth D VS
3 Where do you enter transaction code? Menubar Command field ABAP editor None B S
4 Which is the Transaction code for DataSE38 SE54 SE80 SE16 C VS
5 SE41 transaction code is Screen painter ABAP editor Menu painter Function builderC S
6 Local Objects are stored in Package $TMP $Test $Temp $Local A VS
7 SAP R/3 System consists of 1 or more cl 1 0 A VS
8 R/3 Stands for Real time / 3 server Real Time / 3 Tier Response / 3 tier Resource / 3 tier B VS
9 SAP Application are developed using ABAP Cobol C,C++ All A S
10 Number of sessions that can be opened 9 1 6 5C S
11 Table that stores Transaction codes is? TADIR T100 TSTC TFDIR C M
12 ABAP Processor located in Dispatcher Message server Gateway Work process D M
13 Database interface converts Open SQL 1 0 A S
14 Technical attributes of a field are store Domain Data Element Check table Value Table A S
15 To display table contents we can use? Data Dictionary Data Browser SM30 All D M
16 Data types are? Pure descriptions No memory is asso Desribe the technical propeAll D C
17 Table fields are assigned to? Data element Domain Structure Data type A M
18 Which tables allows to create secondarPooled Clustered Transparent All C M
19 Which type of buffering uses key fieldsFull single record Generic None C C
20 Components (Fields) in a structure? Refers to Data elemeCan be defined as f Cannot be made as primaryAll D C
21 Value table assignment in a domain? Enforces referential Provides input helpProposes Value table as cheAll C M
22 Data element definition consists of? Data type Size Field labels None C M
23 Package can be created in? SE11 SE38 SE16 SE80 D S
24 What is ture about database views? Multiple tables can bUses inner join Foreign key relation must eAll B C
25 Which type of view can only refer to si Database view Maintenance view Projection view Help view C M
26 Enqueue Server is located in ? Database server Central Host Message server None B C
27 Which of the input help will be given hValue range at domaCheck table assignmSearch help at data elemenSearch help at TaD C
28 Which of the following is not a data typDomain Data Element Structure Table type A M
29 New fields can be added to Standard SAInclude structure Append Structure Both None B M
30 Check Table ? Value table assigned Table assigned to a Assigned while creating a sAll B C
31 Which Tables in ABAP Dictionary do noPooled tables Cluster tables Transparent tables with LCAll D C
32 Component that provides external comMessage server Kernel Gateway Dispatcher C M
33 Component that handles communicatioPresentation server Dispatcher Enqueue server Message server B M
34 To find all the Views created based on Data browser Repository infornatWhere Used List Object NavigatorC C
35 The definition of foreign key must exis Database view Projection view Help view Maintenance vieD C
36 Text table must have the following dataLANG CHAR CLNT LCHR A C
37 Which interface setting of the search h SPOS LPOS Import Export B M
38 ABAP Programs are Client dependent 1 0 B S
39 Can we change the technical settings ofYes No A M
40 Which is not a Numeric data type in DDINT4 DEC CURR NUMC D M
41 The physical storage are a of table in d Delivery class Data class Size category Package B M
42 Which statements will create data objeDATA Constants Parameters All D M
43 Field-symbols can be assigned to fields 1 0 A C
44 Which of the following is not a Text eleTitle List heading Text symbol Selection text A M
45 Input values for selection screen can b Text symbol Text element Variant Attribute C M
46 Default data type in ABAP? String C N I B S
47 Which of the following is not a data ob Field string Constant Internal table Field symbol D S
48 Using WRITE statement we cannot dispICON Symbol Check box Radiobutton D C
49 Parameter statement does not allow th I P F C C S
50 Field that stores the iteration number i Sy-subrc Sy-index Sy-Tabix Sy-dbcnt B S
test2
Q.NQuestion Option A Option B Option C Option D AnsweSimple
Ver
Simple
1 Which event do you use to generate page Top-of-Page End-of-page Top-of-page during Start-of- C M
headers for a details list? line-selection selection
2 Tcode for Transport workbench? SE01 SE09 SE80 SE84 B M
3 Function group global definitions can Screens Internal tables Workareas All D M
consist of?
4 In which parameter passing technique no Pass by reference Pass by value Pass by value and All A S
memory is allocated for actual parameters return
for a subroutine?
5 How do you define the selection screen of a Interface between It is a list It is created by user None A M
program? program and user at runtime
6 Which addition in the PARAMETERS Value Default Initial None B S
statement allows you to place default values
on the selection screen?
7 How can you suppress the default title of a No standard page New-Page Standard page Reserve A S
list? heading heading
8 What does AT SELECTION-SCREEN do? To create a detail Selection screen To fetch data from Initializing the B M
list validation database table fields
9 What system field indicates the list you are Sy-linct Sy-pfkey Sy-lsind Sy-linsz C M
on?
10 Use of Editor lock Others can see as User can see as Others can see but User can see C M
well as change the well as change cannot make but cannot
program the program changes in the make changes
program in the program
11 Function code that triggers the event AT SAVE PICK CHOOSE RW B C
LINE-SELECTION
12 Which is not a Numeric data type in ABAP I F N P C S
13 Which of the following internal table allows Standard Hashed Sorted Indexed C M
both unique and non-unique key
14 The current row of internal table is stored in SY-LINNO SY-INDEX SY-TLENG SY-TABIX D M
15 Field-symbols can be assigned to fields 1 0 A VS

dynamically?
16 Which of the following is not a Text Title List heading Text symbol Selection text A M
element?
17 Input values for selection screen can be Text symbol Text element Variant Attribute C M
stored as a?
18 Default data type in ABAP? String C N I B VS
19 Which of the following is not a data object? Field string Constant Internal table Field symbol D S
20 Using WRITE statement we cannot display? ICON Symbol Check box Radiobutton D C
21 Macros can be called from external 1 0 B S

programs
22 Event that is triggered when user interacts Start-of-selection At User- At selection-screen Get B M
with GUI items? command output
23 Automatic checks in screen does not Mandatory field Check table Data format Primary key D C
include? check entry uniqueness
24 Visible lines of table control is stored in? SY-STEPL SY-LOOPC SY-TFILL <TC>-LINES B M
25 Which of the following is not an input field? Radiobutton Checkbox Listbox Pushbutton D M
26 At Exit-command module is processed in? PBO PAI POV POH B M
27 The command used for validating more than Loop at Screen …. Field fieldname Chain …. Endchain None of the C M
one field simultaneously Endloop Check above
check_field
28 Screen field attributes can be modified in PBO PAI POV POH A C
the event
29 Which type of message will execute a E A W S B C
ROLLBACK?
30 Messages are stored in table T001 T100 TSTC BDCMSGCOLL B M
31 ABAP program screens are System dependent Client dependent Module dependent Program D C
dependent
32 Tcode for Extended syntax check? SE30 ST05 SE16 SLIN D S
33 When PBO gets executed? After screen is After user has After user enters Before screen D M
displayed pressed a some value is displayed
function code
34 Where do you set the GUI status for a In PAI module In PBO module In POV module None of the B M
screen? above
35 Global data definitions in online(DIALOG) screen Layout top Include Within Within B S
programs are located at CHAIN….ENDCHAINModule….EndM
36 Field automatically generated in screens for SY-UCOMM SY-STEPL PICK SY-DYNNR A S
receiving and transmitting function code
37 Absolute line number of selected list is SY-STEPL SY-LINNO SY-LILLI SY-LISEL C C
stored in
38 Which of the following is not supported in Radiobutton Checkbox Input on Hotspot on A M
WRITE statement?
39 Command that terminates loop processing SKIP CONTINUE EXIT CHECK C S
<CONDITION>
40 Field symbol can be assigned to Elementary Work area Internal table All D M
variable
41 Adding duplicate rows in an internal table is Append Collect Delete adjacent Insert B C
prevented by the command duplicates
42 Which of these commands can be used in On change of At new <field> At first At end of A S
any loop? <field> <field>
43 Command that deallocates memory of Refresh Describe Free Clear C S
internal table?
44 Duplicate entries can be always stored in? Standard table Sorted table Hashed table All A S
45 Internal table storage will be in? Database server Application Presentation server Message server B S
server
46 Internal table contents can be processed in a 1 0 A S
loop without using a workarea
47 Insert command cannot be used on? Standard table Hashed table Sorted table None of the C M
above
48 Select-options creates ? Work area Internal table Field group Field symbol B S
49 A selection screen cannot have? Radiobutton Listbox Chechbox Table control D C
50 Statement that returns control to calling Call screen <no> Leave to screen Leave to screen 0 None C C
screen <no>
final
Q.No Question Option A Option B Option C Option D Answer Simple
BELOW ARE THE QUESTIONS FROM THE FIRST TEST ( SOME QUESTIONS ARE CHANGED)
1 In SAP R/3 communication between application serverMessage serv Enqueue serve Dispatcher Gateway B S
2 Tcode for Transport workbench? SE01 SE09 SE80 SE84 B M
3 Tcode for Screen painter? SE11 SE41 SE51 SE80 C S
4 Which operations are possible in Data Browser? Display Create entries Update entries All D S
5 Append structure is possbile in? Transparent tPooled table Cluster table All A S
6 Local Objects are stored in Package $TMP $Test $Temp $Local A VS
7 SAP R/3 System consists of 1 or more clients 1 0 A VS
8 R/3 Stands for Real time / 3 sReal Time / 3 TiResponse / 3 tie Resource / 3 tier B VS
11 Table that stores Transaction codes is? TADIR T100 TSTC TFDIR C M
12 ABAP Processor located in Dispatcher Message serverGateway Work process D M
14 Searchhelp of a field can be assigned in? Domain Data Element Both B M
15 Which option in Parameters Statement invokes a sear Obligatory Memory id Matchcode id Help id C C
17 Table structure changes can be adjusted using? Data browserDatabase utilityTable maintenaObject Navigator C M
18 Advantage of assigning a value table in domain? Proposal of chProvides input Enforces integr All A C
19 Single record buffering is used only by the SELECT SIN 1 0 A S
20 Components (Fields) in a structure? Refers to DataCan be defined Cannot be madeAll D C
21 Value table assignment in a domain? Enforces refe Provides input Proposes Value All C M
22 Data element definition consists of? Data type Size Field labels None C M
23 Package can be created in? SE11 SE38 SE16 SE80 D S
24 What is ture about database views? Multiple tableUses inner join Foreign key relaAll B C
25 Which type of view can only refer to single table? Database viewMaintenance v Projection viewHelp view C M
26 Enqueue Server is located in ? Database servCentral Host Message server None B C
27 Which of the input help will be given high priority? Value range aCheck table assSearch help at dSearch help at TaD C
28 Which of the following is not a data type in DDIC? Domain Data Element Structure Table type A M
29 A table can have more than one append structure 1 0 A S
31 Which Tables in ABAP Dictionary do not permit AppenPooled tables Cluster tables Transparent tabAll D C
32 Component that provides external communications frMessage serv Kernel Gateway Dispatcher C M
33 Component that handles communication between SAPPresentation Dispatcher Enqueue serverMessage server B M
34 To find all the Views created based on a Table we can Data browserRepository infoWhere Used LisObject Navigator C C
35 The definition of foreign key must exist between tableDatabase viewProjection viewHelp view Maintenance view
D C
36 Text table must have the following data type in one of LANG CHAR CLNT LCHR A C
37 Which interface setting of the search help will determSPOS LPOS Import Export B M
38 ABAP Programs are Client dependent? 1 0 B S
39 Can we change the technical settings of a Standard SA Yes No A M
40 Which is not a Numeric data type in DDIC? INT4 DEC CURR NUMC D M
41 The physical storage are a of table in database in deterDelivery classData class Size category Package B M
42 Which statements will create data objects? DATA Constants Parameters All D M
43 Field-symbols can be assigned to fields dynamically? 1 0 A C
44 Which of the following is not a Text element? Title List heading Text symbol Selection text A M
45 Input values for selection screen can be stored as a? Text symbol Text element Variant Attribute C M
46 Default data type in ABAP? String C N I B S
47 Which of the following is not a data object? Field string Constant Internal table Field symbol D S
48 Using WRITE statement we cannot display? ICON Symbol Check box Radiobutton D C
49 Parameter statement does not allow the data type? I P F C C S
50 Field that stores the iteration number in DO loop? Sy-subrc Sy-index Sy-Tabix Sy-dbcnt B S
BELOW ARE THE QUESTIONS FROM THE TOPICS NOT COVERED IN THE PREVIOUS TESTS
51 Event triggered for user action on Screen? PBO PAI START-OF-SELEGET B S
52 Automatic checks in screen does not include? Mandatory fieCheck table entData format Primary key uniqD C
53 Visible lines of table control is stored in? SY-STEPL SY-LOOPC SY-TFILL <TC>-LINES B M
54 Which of the following is not an input field? Radiobutton Checkbox Listbox Pushbutton D M
55 At Exit-command module is processed in? PBO PAI POV POH B M
56 in BDCDATA structure Screen start can be set using? FNAM FVAL DYNPRO DYNBEGIN D S
57 Data of different transactions can be stored in a single 1 0 A S
58 Function module that stores the transaction data in a BDC_INSERT BDC_TRANSACTBDC_OPEN_GROBDC_START A M
59 Command that does not return Sy-subrc? OPEN DATASECLOSE DATASEREAD DATASETTRANSFER D M
60 Mode for both read and write in OPEN DATASET? INPUT OUTPUT APPENDING UPDATE D M
61 Tcode for SQL trace? SE30 ST05 SE16 SLIN B S
62 In SAP script text formatting can be done using? Paragraph forCharacter formBoth None C M
63 The formal parameters of the subroutine called from lSYST SLIS ITCSY SSCRFIELDS C C
64 Tcode for SAP Script Standard texts? SE71 SE72 SE74 SO10 D S
65 Standard text can be called from a form using commaInclude Define Protect Read text A S
66 Function module that has to be called to process the teSTART_FORMWRITE_FORM CONTROL_FORM

OPEN_FORM B C
67 How many persons can conduct trace at any time on All allocated Maximum of 2 Only one None C M
server? available person can
users to the conduct Trace
server at any time
68 Scheduling batch input session in background can be RSTXLDMC RSBDCSUB RSBDCREO None B M
THESE ARE ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS FOR ABAP TEST 16TH JUNE NAVEEN
69 The component of the application server that converts OPEN SQL iMessage server Database interfaceDispatcher Task handler B S
70 Comminication with external R/3 and non-SAP systems is carried oWork process Request Queue Gateway Dispatcher C S
71 Which of the commands gives a list of opened sessions /N /O /Nxxxx /Oxxxx B M
72 Transaction code for Repository Information System SE84 SE11 SE51 SE38 A S
73 Objects that cannot be transported are In Development In Package Local Objects None of the above
74 Transaction code for Form Painter SE41 SE51 SE91 SE71 D S
75 Which of the following is client independent Master Data Transaction Data Database Table Customising data
76 DATA objects can be declared globally in TYPE GROUPS 1 0 A M
77 The Program type for a report is Executable Module pool Function pool Class pool A S
78 A date field of datatype "D" stores date in the format YY/MM/DD DD/MM/YY YYYY/MM/DD YYYYMMDD D M
79 Default values for a DATA object can be set using the extension keyDEFAULT VALUE SET IMPORT B M
80 Which of the Keywords gives a selection screen DATA TYPES PARAMETERS CONSTANTS C S
81 The description for a PARAMETER field can be maintained throughText Symbols Selection Texts List Heading None of the above B C
82 The maximum length of a PARAMETERS variable is 8 9 10 12 A C
83 The VALUE Keyword can be used with TYPES Statement 1 0 B S
84 The Value of a CONSTANT can be altered within the program 1 0 B S
85 The Data object which is a collection of fields is refered to as Field Strings Structures Work Area All the above D M
86 Which of the commands does not give a LIST WRITE ULINE VLINE SKIP C S
87 Which of the additions to the write statement will supress the leadNO SIGN NO ZERO HIDE ZERO SUPRESS ZERO B M
88 The write statement cannot provide SYMBOL ICON ULINE RADIOBUTTON D C
89 The Domain provides a field with Syntatic DescriptSemantic DescriptiDocumentation Help A S
90 Specifying the Value table in the domain does a foreign key check 1 0 B M
91 Choose the option that a Data element does not provide Field DescriptionDocumentation Search help Fixed values D S
92 Foreign key validation takes place at the Screen level 1 0 A C
93 A SAP Standard table can be enhanced through Include Structur Deep Structure Append Structure Nested Structure C C
94 Index acess is faster because an index uses Linear Search Hash Function Binary Search None of the above C S
95 How many types of buffering are available for a table 1 2 3 4C S
96 The Line Type gives the field descriptions for a table type 1 0 A M
97 Choose the table without an index operation Standard Table Sorted Table Hashed Table None of the above C S
98 A sorted table can further be sorted using the SORT command 1 0 B M
99 Dynamic Screen Modification is done in the POV POH PAI PBO D M
100 Choose the automatic validation that occurs on a field Mandatory CheckInteger type check Numeric type checkCurrency Check A S
101 A BDC Session can be scheduled in background using RMDATIND RSTXLDMC RSBDCSUB RSDEBUG C C
102 A BDC Session is an asynshronous method 1 0 A S
103 Error log in Call transaction is stored in nternal table of type BDCDATA BDCMSGCOLL BDCERROR BDCITAB B C
104 Open dataset / Close dataset is used for Local Files Sequential Files Both None B S
105 Logos in a SAP Script is uploaded using RSTXLDMC RSDBUG RSBDMIDOC RMDATIND A M
106 Graphical images is uploaded into SAP System using Tcode SE38 SE71 SE78 SE93 C M
107 The Standard style used by Scripts & Smartforms is STYLE STANDARD Times Roman Times new Roman A S
108 Background Pictures can be displayed through SCRIPTS SMARTFORMS Both None B M
*se18 and se19 for badi.
se18 business ad-ins definitions to customers.
se19 to impelement badi.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*cL_exithandler to locate badi.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*Three interactive events are possible for an interactive report.
at line selection,
at user command and
at-pf status.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*can we write in screens.
No.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*screen commands in sap abap.
call screen
set screen
leave screen
leave to screen.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*how many databse servers can sap r/3 system hold.
one and only one.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*Can a subscreen be called into another subscreen?
No.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*how many application servers can sap r/3 system hold.
multiple application servers.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*smart forms and smart styles are client independent.
Yes.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*sap scripts can be converted in to forms.
Yes.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*sap forms can be converted in to smart styles.
Yes.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*What must you code in the flow logic to prevent a module from being
called unless a field contains a non-initial value (as determined by its
data type)?
ON INPUT.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*In regard to CALL, which of the following is NOT a valid statement?
CALL PROGRAM.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*Database locks are sufficient in a multi-user environment.
Yes.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*Which of the following does not physically exist in the underlying database? More than one
answer is correct.
a) View
b) Internal table
c) Structure
d) Transparent Table
e) Domain
Ans : B,C,E.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
**Which of the following do not exist in the underlying database?
a) Transparent Table
b) Structure
c) View
d) Internal tables
Ans : B,D
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*Select single needs how many fields in the database table?
One communication with the database.
Allows the user to access a single table entry from the database.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*What are the classical events in sap abap report ?
Initialization (Not in sequence)
At selection screen output
at selection screen
start of selection
end of selection
top of page
end of page
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*Static attribute can be created using ?
class-data.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*SELECT-OPTIONS COUNTRY FOR LFA1-LAND1:
What will internal table be?
a) LAND1
b) LFA1
c) COUNTRY
d) LFA1-LAND1
Answer : B (LFA1)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*Which is not a conversion tool ?
BDC
LSMW
ABAP QUERY - Answer.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*Not a classical report event - At Line Selection.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*Application server's time is stored in - SY-UZEIT.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*If you want to turn off any subroutein / loop immediately or unconditionallyy then what
will we give ?
Exit.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*More than 20 entries in an internal table, what type of search ?
Binary search.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*A dictionary table is made available for use within an ABAP program via the _____
statement.
TABLES.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*Field structures in BDCMSGCOLL.
All of the above.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*Transaction code for translation tools.
SE63.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*Where will you validate entries ?
PAI.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*Number of Types of windows in smart forms ?
4.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*In smart forms how many MAIN windows can you define ?
1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*Most apprpriate option to save data in BDC tables.
FIELD NAME :'BDC_OKCODE and FIELD VALUE :'/11'.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*Program type for dialog pool programing?
M.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*Which one allows you to derive a new class from an existing class?
Inheritance.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*Which of the following cannot be called remotely ?
Normal FM.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*Which view consists one or more tables ?
Database View.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
Choose the most appropriate.
a.selection-screen begin of block ABC with frame title text-001.
b. some thing
c. some thing
d. All of the above.
Answer : D.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
*Transaction code for standard text element creation?
S010.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------
System field for time : uzet, timelo
Error log table created:
Distinct or aggregate can be used for read data from buffered
table? - True or false
ANSWER: FALSE
Scripts and smart forms are client independent? – True or false

ANSWER: FALSE
Smartform is client independent but SAP Script is client dependent.
How many database servers?

How many application servers?
Transaction code for scrips? – ANSWER: SE71
SE71 - Form painter
SE72 - Style maintenance
SE78 - SapScript Graphics Management
SO10 - Create standard text module
Type1 – Online Programming

ANSWER: EXECUTABLE PROGRAM
Type 1
You can start a type 1 program by entering its program name. For this reason, they are also known as executable programs.
When you start a type 1 program, processors are started in the runtime environment that call a series of processing blocks (event
blocks) in a predefined sequence. The sequence is oriented towards reporting tasks. This is why executable programs are also
known as reports.
Qty – Occuerence 10
Sub Screen
a) Cannot be GUI access
b) Cannot has OK code
c) Cannot call screen
d) Can have at exit command {THIS MUST BE ‘CAN NOT HAVE AT EXIT COMMAND’, THEN THE
ANSWER WILL BE ALL OF THE ABOVE}
e) All of the above
 GUI status cannot be set to the sub screen.

 OKCODE is not applicable to the sub screen.
 Sub screen cannot call another screen. But, a subscreen can be called within a subscreen
using CALL SUBSCREEN.
 It cannot contain AT EXIT-COMMAND.
Transaction code for translation tool ? SE 63

Which one of the following is a not a database component ?
a) Structure
b) Views
c) Internal Table
d) Transparent table
e) Domain
BDC (Batch Data Communication) – Cannot download the local file

--> Local Files data is uploaded into Internal table using FM GUI_UPLOAD.
--> Local Files data is downloaded from Internal table using FM
GUI_DOWNLOAD.
EDI – Vice Versa

Inheritence Sub Class can be
Select Query
a) ALV report
b) Classical Report
c) Interactive Report
Check is preferred in where query ? True or false

{NOT SURE but it maybe TRUE because CHECK stops the program from further
execution of program.
CHECK sel: Checks the selection criterion requested by the statement SELECT-OPTIONS
sel. If the result of this check is negative, the processing in this event is terminated and the
GET events for any subordinate database tables are not processed either.}
Which doesn’t perform the DATA Conversion ?

a)BDC
b) LSMWG
c)Abap Query
d) All
All are used for transferring or migrating of the data, not conversion.
Interactive Event
a) Start of selection
b) PF status
c) At line Selection
d) All of above
Selection Screen block abc
Selection Screen window

Call selection screen 500 at 10 10
(all of the above)
To Interrupt a process, the following keyword is used ?

a)/bend
b)/ex
c)/exit
d/n
Which will come out from the subroutine ?

a) Stop
b) Exit
A subroutine normally ends at the ENDFORM statement. However, you can terminate them earlier by
using the EXIT or CHECK statement
Which can be used if you have to remove more than 20

records?
a) Binary Search
b) Linear Search
Binary search has less number of iterations as compared to linear search.
Order in Dialog Programming

a) Program then flow logic
Static attribute can be created using

a) Class-data
b) Private
c) Private public
d) Static
Control Common in SAP scripts.

a) If errors make it as comment line
b) If error print as….
c) Only 1
d) Can have 6 in a line (B and C)
How many joins does abap support?

a) Inner
b) Outer
c) Self
d) Equi
e) All
Checks
a) Automatic input Class
b) In flow logic
c) In Dialog Module
d) All
Select options COUNTRY for LFA1-LIFNR. The internal Table will
be?
a) Country
b) LFA1
c) LIFNR
d) All
Set Mask is used for

a) Date
b) Currency
c) Both
Module Program events include?

a) PBO
b) POH
c) POV
d) PAI
e) All
Subscreen can have GUI access? Yes/No
ANSWER: NO
THERE ARE 4 TYPES OF WINDOWS IN SMARTFORMS AND 3 TYPES IN SCRIPTS.

ABAP/4 Questions & Answers
A: I
B: N
C: C
D: D
Ans:C
SELECTION.
A: True
B: False
Ans:B
following code?
report zabaprg.

CLEAR name1.
perform write_name.
FORM write_name.
WRITE name1.
ENDFORM.
A: Customer name
B: ABAP programmer
C: Material number
Ans:C

D: Set a breakpoint
Ans: C
transaction?
A: Type groups
B: Search help
C: Lock objects
D: Function groups
Ans:D
A: Text symbol
B: Selection text
C: Text title
D: Text identifier
Ans:A
____.
A: Auto align
B: Pretty printer
C: Generate version
D: Syntax check
Ans:B
A: SY-LOOPI
B: SY-TABIX
C: SY-LSIND
D: SY-INDEX
Ans: D
9. The event that is processed after all data has been read but before the list is displayed
is:
A: END-OF-PAGE.
Ans:A  C
DATA: new_fld(25).
A: P
B: N
C: I
D: C
Ans: D
statement?

Ans: B
A: True
B: False
Ans: B
____.
A: domain
B: field name
C: data type
D: data element
Ans: D
14. In regard to the three-tier client/server architecture, which of the following is a true
statement?

database server.
Ans: D, b
write: alph.
WHILE alph > 2.

write: alph.
alph = alph - 1.
ENDWHILE.
A: 3
B: 3 2
C: 3 3 2
D: 3 3
Ans: D
keyword ____.
A: SELECT-OPTIONS.
B: PARAMETERS.
C: RANGES.
D: DATA.
Ans: B

REFRESH itab.
A: 1
B: 2
C: blank
D: 0
Ans: B
A: True
B: False
Ans: A
19. When modifying an internal table within LOOP AT itab. _ ENDLOOP. you must
A: True
B: False
Ans : B
SY-TABIX = 10.
LOOP AT itab.
ENDLOOP.
A: 0
B: 10
C: 20
D: 30
Ans: C
21. Given:
AND vbeln = pvbeln.
IF SY-SUBRC = 0.
ENDIF.

A: SELECT
B: SELECT INTO
C: SELECT SINGLE
D: SELECT ENTRY
Ans: C

statement?

Ans: D
24. All of the following are valid Open SQL statements except:
A: OPEN DATASET.
B: CLOSE CURSOR.
C: DELETE.
D: COMMIT WORK.
TABLE statement.
A: INDEX
B: TABIX
C: ROW
D: WHERE
Ans: B  A
A: UPDATE
B: MODIFY
C: ERASE
D: DELETE
Ans: D
27. Which table type would be most appropriate for accessing table rows using an
index.
A: Hashed table
B: Standard table
C: Sorted table
Ans: C


Ans: A

C: Add GROUP BY f1.
30. Given:
IF MY_IND = 'X'.
COMMIT WORK.
ELSE.
ROLLBACK WORK.
ENDIF.

D: An abend.
A: True
B: False
Ans: B
A: OPEN LINE.
D: FORMAT INPUT ON.

AT USER-COMMAND.
CASE SY-UCOMM.
WHEN 'FC11'.
WHEN 'FC12'.
ENDCASE.
A: ON INPUT
B: CHAIN
C: FIELD
D: ON REQUEST
A: Transaction code
B: Screen
C: ABAP module pool
D: Background job

C: INITIALIZATION.
Ans:
39. Which ABAP program attribute provides access protection?
A: Status
B: Application
D: Authorization group
Ans:D
A: TOP-OF-PAGE.
D: AT USER-COMMAND.
Ans: C
41. Given:
A: Formal
B: Actual
C: Static
D: Value
Ans:B

B: Helps you analyze the performance of any program created within the ABAP
Workbench. *
CALL SCREEN 300.

D: Exit screen 300.
Ans:C
A: EXPORTING
B: IMPORTING
C: USING
D: TABLES
45. In relation to an internal table as a formal parameter, because of the STRUCTURE
syntax, it is possible to:
A: Use the DESCRIBE statement within a subroutine.

B: Loop through the internal table within a subroutine.
C: Access the internal table fields within a subroutine.
D: Add rows to the internal table within a subroutine.
Ans: C
46. To use a secondary table index in your SELECT statement, you should:
A: Include the index fields in the WHERE clause in the correct order
B: Use the INDEX clause of the SELECT statement
C: Include MANDT in the WHERE clause

Ans: A  C
48. In regard to the code below, which of the following is not a true statement?
TABLES: KNA1.
GET KNA1.
Write: /1 kna1-kunnr.
END-OF-SELECTION.
A: The GET event is processed while a logical database is running.

B: All the fields from table KNA1 may be used in the GET event.
C: You can code the GET event elsewhere in the same program.
Ans: D

UP TO 100 ROWS
WHERE fld7 = pfld7.

Ans: D
50. To place a checkbox on a list, use
A: WRITE CHECKBOX.
Ans:C
51. Given:
WHERE fld7 = pfld7.
SELECT fld8 FROM tab2 INTO fld9
WHERE fld10 = tab1-fld6.
WRITE: /1 fld9.
ULINE.
ENDSELECT.
ENDSELECT.
All of the following are good performance tuning methods except:
A: Use SELECT fld1 fld2 fld3 FROM tab1 INTO itab_

B: Convert the nested SELECT statements to a database view
C: Code your own database join.
D: Use SELECT_FOR ALL ENTRIES IN itab.

Ans:A
53. Given:

ENDFORM.
A: Value
B: Reference
C: Value and result
54. If the user picks the WIND function, the following code indicates:
AT USER-COMMAND.
IF SY-UCOMM = 'WIND'.
WINDOW STARTING AT 7 4 ENDING AT 65 12.
WRITE text-900.
ENDIF.
A: Display text-900 in a dialog window.

B: Display text-900 in a full screen.
C: Output text-900 on row 4, starting at column 7.
D: Draw a box around text-900 with coordinates (7,4) and (65,12)
A: CHAIN_ENDCHAIN
B: AT EXIT-COMMAND
C: LOOP_ENDLOOP
D: SET PF-STATUS
A: EXCEPTION
B: RAISE
C: STOP
D: ABEND
Ans:B
A: Normal
B: Update
C: RFC
D: Dialog
Ans:D

Ans:A

internal table.
A: True
B: False
61. ---------
A: True
B: False
Ans:B
statement?


D: The first field.
statement, use:
A: AS CHECKBOX
C: MEMORY ID
D: MODIF ID
A: INSERT
B: UPDATE
C: APPEND
D: MODIFY
Ans:D
A: SELECT
B: SELECT INTO
C: SELECT SINGLE
D: SELECT ENTRY
Ans:C
A: True
B: False
Ans:A
A: WITH KEY
B: WITH TABLE KEY
C: SEARCH TYPE
D: WHERE

ENDSELECT.

Ans: C  D
A: INTO
B: WHERE
C: FROM
D: GROUP BY
Ans:D

letter type c,
END OF itab.

LOOP AT itab.
SY-TABIX = 2.
WRITE itab-letter.
EXIT.
ENDLOOP.
A: A
B: ABCD
C: B
D: BCD
Ans: A
A: REQUIRED-ENTRY
B: OBLIGATORY
C: DEFAULT

D: APPEND SORTED BY
Ans:D

itab1[] = itab2[].

76. -----------

Ans:D
A: UPDATE
B: INSERT
C: INTO
D: MOD
Ans:A

Ans:B
A: I
B: N
C: P
D: F
Ans: B

Ans:C
program?
A: Application
B: Title
C: Status
D: Type
Ans: A,C
A: NEW-PAGE.
C: INITIALIZATION.
D: TOP-OF-PAGE.
Ans:D
84 -----------
A: Domain
B: Field name
C: Data type
D: Data element
A: AT USER-COMMAND.
B: AT PFn.
Ans: A

Ans:A
A: True
B: False
Ans:

A: CP
B: NC
C: O
D: NS
Ans:
A: MOVE
B: WRITE
C: ASSIGN
D: VALUE
Ans: B
92. Which of the following describes the internal representation of a type D data
object?
A: DDMMYYYY
B: YYYYDDMM
C: MMDDYYYY
D: YYYYMMDD
Ans:D
A: SE11
B: SE38
C: SE36
D: SE16
Ans:B
94. Given:
REPORT ZINTERAC.
WRITE 'First List'.
AT PF5.

Ans:C
C: CALL SCREEN.
using ____.
A: EXCLUDING
B: IMMEDIATELY
C: WITHOUT
D: HIDE
Ans: A
A: True
B: False
Ans:A
A: CALL SCREEN 0.
B: COMMIT WORK.
C: ROLLBACK WORK.
D: UPDATE.
Ans:C
equal?
A: 0
B: 2
C: 1
Ans:C
REPORT ZLISTTST.
START-OF-SELECTION.
WRITE: text-001.
FORMAT HOTSPOT ON.
WRITE: text-002.
FORMAT HOTSPOT OFF.
AT LINE-SELECTION.
WRITE / text-003.

Ans:C
except:
A: Subroutine
C: Field-group
D: Function module
Ans:C

Ans: A
A: Standard
B: Sorted
C: Hashed
D: Unique
Ans:D

Ans:A

Ans:
A: COMMENT
B: HLINE
C: ULINE
D: SKIP
Ans:C
107. To select all database entries for a certain WHERE clause into an internal table in
one step, use

D: SELECT_itab_
Ans:A
A: COMMENT
B: EXCLUDE
C: ULINE
D: SKIP
Ans: D
A: WHERE
B: WHEN
C: IF
D: CASE
Ans:A
A: IN
B: EQ
C: NE
D: BT
Ans:A
111. ------
CASE my_fld > 3.
A: True
B: False
Ans:B
A: Database view
B: Projection view
C: Help view
D: Entity view
Ans: B  A

A: Pooled
B: Cluster
C: Transparent
D: View
Ans:C
A: GET.
B: INITIALIZATION.
D: NEW-PAGE.
Ans:C
A: TOP-OF-PAGE.
C: NEW-PAGE.
D: END-OF-PAGE.
Ans:D
A: P
B: D
C: N
D: C
Ans: B
processed.
completed.
Ans:B
119. Given:
DO.
ENDDO.

Ans.B

Ans: D
header?
A: Date and Time

B: List title
C: Page number
D: Underline
Ans: A
A: P
B: C
C: N
D: I
Ans: C

Ans:B
A: CALL FUNCTION
B: CALL SCREEN
C: CALL TRANSACTION
D: CALL PROGRAM
Ans: D
report zabaprg.
clear my_field.
A: The value is 99
B: The value is 100
C: The value is 0
Ans: C
IF var_one = 'dog'.
WRITE: /1 'Bark!'.
ELSE.
WRITE: /1 'Meow!'.
ENDIF.
WRITE: var_one.
A: Bark! DOG
B: DOG
C: Meow! DOG
Ans: C
A: True
B: False
A: True
B: False
you should:
A: Activate it.
B: Release it.
Ans: A


Ans: B

Ans: D
A: SY-CUCOL (This Transaction code return Horizontal cursor position in the display
on a dynpro. Counting begins at column 2.)
B: SY-LILLI (This Transaction code return List line for which a list event was
triggered. Counting begins at 1 and includes the page header.)
C: SY-CUROW (This Transaction code return Vertical cursor position on the screen
display of a screen. Counting begins at line 1.)
D: SY-LISEL(Content of the list line in the list buffer, on which the cursor was
positioned while a list event was triggered (restricted to the first 255 lines)
Ans: D

use:

A: True
B: False
Ans: B
except:
A: CLEAR itab.
B: REFRESH itab.
C: CLEAR itab[].
D: FREE itab.
Ans:A

Ans:A
keyword:
A: DATA.
B: RANGES.
C: PARAMETERS.
D: SELECT-OPTIONS
Ans: BD.
header line.
A: True
B: False
Ans:A
WITH HEADER LINE.

SORT itab.
LOOP AT itab.
ENDLOOP.

Ans:C

SORTED BY.
Ans:A

type?

Ans: A
A: CLIENT-SPECIFIED
B: BYPASSING BUFFER
C: ORDER BY
D: GROUP BY

ENDSELECT.
Ans:D
147. Given:
A: From value
B: To value
C: Single range
D: Exclusion range
A: D
B: O
C: F
D: X
E: T
Ans: B

Ans: A
A: True
B: False
Ans: B
TYPES: user_type.
A: N
B: C
C: I
D: Undefined
Ans: B
A: F
B: D
C: T
D: X
Ans: A
B: Program type
A: Update
B: Dialog
C: Enqueue/Dequeue
D: Spool
Ans: C

true statement?

is processed.
A: True
B: False
Ans: B

statement?

Ans:D

Ans: B

Ans: C
A: GROUP
B: FIELD-GROUP
C: CHAIN
D: LOOP AT SCREEN
Ans:C
____.
B: source code
D: main program
Ans :A

Ans: D

D: AT USER-COMMAND
Ans:C
____.
A: Authorization
C: User profile
Ans: B
D: CALL TRANSACTION
A: MIN
B: ORDER BY
C: DISTINCT
D: DELETE
Ans:C
A: INNER JOIN.
B: LEFT OUTER JOIN.
C: A database view.
Ans:D


D: Nothing.

field2 = counter.
field2 = counter.
field2 = counter.
A: Variants.
B: Matchcodes.
C: Search-helps.
D: Screen-batches.
A: INSERT
B: APPEND
C: COLLECT
D: MODIFY
Ans:D
INITIALIZATION.
concatenate 'IEQ' sy-uname into suname.
A: The field suname will be output in the page header.

B: SELECT-OPTION suname will contain the user name in its from value at
runtime.
C: The user name is set equal to the value contained in field suname.
D: A default value of 'IEQ' is assigned to the PARAMETER suname.
A: Update
B: Batch
C: Enqueue/Dequeue
D: Spool
Ans: D
A: True
B: False
B: END-OF-EVENT.
D: END-EVENT.
A: True
B: False

A: True
B: False
Ans: A
A: SET USER-COMMAND
B: SET PF-STATUS
C: CALL FUNCTION
D: AT USER-COMMAND
Write: /1 'Nice'.
Write: 'job!'.
A: 'X'
A: SE16
B: SE10
C: SE36
D: SE37
A: SKIP.
B: COMMENT.
C: TEXT.
D: FIELD.
Ans:B
A: True
B: False
Ans:A
A: ACCEPTING CASE
B: LOWER CASE
C: UPPER CASE
D: CASE
A: ROWS 50
B: INDEX 50
C: DEFAULT 50
D: INITIAL SIZE 50
Ans: D
A: True
B: False
Ans:A


Ans: C
A: UPDATE
B: MODIFY
C: DELETE
D: INSERT
Ans:
A: True
B: False
Ans:B
WHERE fld7 = pfld7.
ENDSELECT.


A: AUTH-CHECK
B: AUTHORITY-CHECK
D: AUTHORITY-OBJECT
Ans:B
193. Adding a COMMIT WORK statement between SELECT_ENDSELECT is a good

method for improving performance.
A: True
B: False
Ans:B
following except:

transaction.
Ans:B



Ans:A

SELECT_ENDSELECT.
A: True
B: False
Ans:A
A: Text literal
B: Text variable
C: In-code comment
D: Text integer

write: /1 'Start'.
PERFORM write_next.
write: 'End'.
FORM write_next.
write: 'next'.
EXIT.
write: 'more'.
ENDFORM.
A: Start next
B: Start next more
C: Start next End
D: Start more End
Ans:c
A: READ
B: SELECT
C: GET
D: AT USER-COMMAND
Ans:C

Ans: A
time is called:
A: Message server
B: Instance
C: Gateway
D: Profile
A: True
B: False
A: APPEND
B: MODIFY
C: ADD
D: INSERT
Ans:
A: ADD.
B: SUM.
C: COUNT.
D: TOT.
A: INTO TABLE
B: UP TO 1 ROWS
C: DISTINCT
D: ORDER BY
Ans:C
A: 0
B: 4
C: 8
D: Null
Ans: A
A: PBO
B: PAI
C: INITIALIZATION
A: PBO
B: PAI
C: INITIALIZATION


B: Exit screen 200.
WHERE fld7 = pfld7.
APPEND itab.
ENDSELECT.

code the following:

Ans:D

D: A PARAMETER.
Ans:B
217. When coding AT FIRST fld1. _ ENDAT. within an internal table loop, you should
avoid using:

C: SUM.
D: WRITE itab-fld1.

Ans:A
Ans:B
default values.
A: INITIALIZATION.
B: TOP-OF-PAGE.
D: GET.
Ans:A

Ans:B
A: DATA
B: TYPES
C: PARAMETERS
D: STATICS
Ans:D

C: Saving the table
Ans:D
keyword?

Ans:B
A: ABAP editor
B: ABAP workbench
C: Object list
Ans: B
____.
A: DATA
B: TYPE-GROUPS
C: TYPES
D: DATA-TYPE
Ans:C
A: AT LAST
B: AT NEW
C: ON CHANGE OF
Ans:
A: Value
B: Value and result
C: Changing
D: Reference
Ans: D

WHERE fld7 = pfld7.
tot = tot + fld4.
ENDSELECT.
A good performance tuning technique would be to change the SELECT statement to

use:
A: GROUP-BY.
B: SUM.
C: TOT.
D: MAX.
A: True
B: False
A: INSERT
B: APPEND
C: ALTER
D: MODIFY
Ans: D
A: GET AVERAGE
B: SELECT AVERAGE
C: SELECT AVG
D: COMPUTE AVG
Ans:
statement?


Ans:
A: SE10
B: SE38
C: SE11
D: SE37
Ans:C
A: True
B: False
Ans:A
AT LINE-SELECTION.

Ans:
238. --------
A: Linked
B: Authorized
C: Released
D: Active
Ans: D

Ans: D
check?

B: IF SY-SUBRC NE 0. EXIT. ENDIF.
Ans:B

Ans:
screen field, use:
A: MATCHCODE OBJECT
B: MODIF ID
C: DEFAULT
D: MEMORY ID
A: FIRST
B: INITIALIZATION
C: VALUE
D: DEFAULT
Ans: D

C: DELETE itab.
Ans: D
A: True
B: False
Ans: B

FREE itab.
A: 2
B: 0
C: blank
D: 1
Ans: 2
report zabaprg.


B: He lives at
Ans: B
A: True
B: False
Ans: B
Documented by Vaibhav Sharan

Date : 10/08/2007.
Question Option A Option B Option C Option D Answer Simple/ V
In SAP R/3 communication between application servers is managMessage serveEnqueue serve Dispatcher Gateway B S
Tcode for Transport workbench? SE01 SE09 SE80 SE84 B M
Tcode for Screen painter? SE11 SE41 SE51 SE80 C S
Which operations are possible in Data Browser? Display Create entries Update entries All D S
Append structure is possbile in? Transparent t Pooled table Cluster table All A S
Local Objects are stored in Package $TMP $Test $Temp $Local A VS
SAP R/3 System consists of 1 or more clients 1 0 A VS
R/3 Stands for Real time / 3 s Real Time / 3 TiResponse / 3 tie Resource / 3 tier B VS
Table that stores Transaction codes is? TADIR T100 TSTC TFDIR C M
ABAP Processor located in Dispatcher Message serverGateway Work process D M
Searchhelp of a field can be assigned in? Domain Data Element Both B M
Which option in Parameters Statement invokes a searchhelp? Obligatory Memory id Matchcode id Help id C C
Table structure changes can be adjusted using? Data browser Database utilityTable maintenaObject Navigator C M
Advantage of assigning a value table in domain? Proposal of chProvides input Enforces integr All A C
Single record buffering is used only by the SELECT SINGLE statem 1 0 A S
Components (Fields) in a structure? Refers to DataCan be defined Cannot be madeAll D C
Value table assignment in a domain? Enforces referProvides input Proposes Value All C M
Data element definition consists of? Data type Size Field labels None C M
Package can be created in? SE11 SE38 SE16 SE80 D S
What is ture about database views? Multiple table Uses inner join Foreign key relaAll B C
Which type of view can only refer to single table? Database viewMaintenance v Projection viewHelp view C M
Enqueue Server is located in ? Database servCentral Host Message server None B C
Which of the input help will be given high priority? Value range atCheck table assSearch help at dSearch help at TaD C
Which of the following is not a data type in DDIC? Domain Data Element Structure Table type A M
A table can have more than one append structure 1 0 A S
Which Tables in ABAP Dictionary do not permit Append structurPooled tables Cluster tables Transparent tabAll D C
Component that provides external communications from R/3? Message serveKernel Gateway Dispatcher C M
Component that handles communication between SAP Gui and WPresentation sDispatcher Enqueue serverMessage server B M
To find all the Views created based on a Table we can use? Data browser Repository infoWhere Used LisObject Navigator C C
The definition of foreign key must exist between tables while creDatabase viewProjection viewHelp view Maintenance view
D C
Text table must have the following data type in one of the key fieLANG CHAR CLNT LCHR A C
Which interface setting of the search help will determine the fiel SPOS LPOS Import Export B M
ABAP Programs are Client dependent? 1 0 B S
Can we change the technical settings of a Standard SAP table? Yes No A M
Which is not a Numeric data type in DDIC? INT4 DEC CURR NUMC D M
The physical storage area of table in database in determined by? Delivery class Data class Size category Package B M
Which statements will create data objects? DATA Constants Parameters All D M
Field-symbols can be assigned to fields dynamically? 1 0 A C
Which of the following is not a Text element? Title List heading Text symbol Selection text A M
Input values for selection screen can be stored as a? Text symbol Text element Variant Attribute C M
Default data type in ABAP? String C N I B S
Which of the following is not a data object? Field string Constant Internal table Field symbol D S
Using WRITE statement we cannot display? ICON Symbol Check box Radiobutton D C
Parameter statement does not allow the data type? I P F C C S
Field that stores the iteration number in DO loop? Sy-subrc Sy-index Sy-Tabix Sy-dbcnt B S
Event triggered for user action on Screen? PBO PAI START-OF-SELEGET B S
Automatic checks in screen does not include? Mandatory fieCheck table entData format Primary key uniqD C
Visible lines of table control is stored in? SY-STEPL SY-LOOPC SY-TFILL <TC>-LINES B M
Which of the following is not an input field? Radiobutton Checkbox Listbox Pushbutton D M
At Exit-command module is processed in? PBO PAI POV POH B M
in BDCDATA structure Screen start can be set using? FNAM FVAL DYNPRO DYNBEGIN D S
Data of different transactions can be stored in a single session? 1 0 A S
Function module that stores the transaction data in a session? BDC_INSERT BDC_TRANSACTBDC_OPEN_GROBDC_START A M
Command that does not return Sy-subrc? OPEN DATASECLOSE DATASEREAD DATASETTRANSFER D M
Mode for both read and write in OPEN DATASET? INPUT OUTPUT APPENDING UPDATE D M
Tcode for SQL trace? SE30 ST05 SE16 SLIN B S
In SAP script text formatting can be done using? Paragraph forCharacter formBoth None C M
The formal parameters of the subroutine called from layout set mSYST SLIS ITCSY SSCRFIELDS C C
Tcode for SAP Script Standard texts? SE71 SE72 SE74 SO10 D S
Standard text can be called from a form using command? Include Define Protect Read text A S
Function module that has to be called to process the text elementSTART_FORM WRITE_FORM CONTROL_FORM
OPEN_FORM B C
How many persons can conduct trace at any time on server? All allocated Maximum of 2 Only one None C M
available person can
users to the conduct Trace
server at any time
Scheduling batch input session in background can be done usingRSTXLDMC RSBDCSUB RSBDCREO None B M
The component of the application server that converts OPEN SQL into NATIVE SMessage server Database interfaceDispatcher Task handler B S
Comminication with external R/3 and non-SAP systems is carried out by the Work process Request Queue Gateway Dispatcher C S
Which of the commands gives a list of opened sessions /N /O /Nxxxx /Oxxxx B M
Transaction code for Repository Information System SE84 SE11 SE51 SE38 A S
Objects that cannot be transported are In Development CIn Package Local Objects None of the above
Transaction code for Form Painter SE41 SE51 SE91 SE71 D S

Which of the following is client independent Master Data Transaction Data Database Table Customising data
DATA objects can be declared globally in TYPE GROUPS 1 0 A M
The Program type for a report is Executable Module pool Function pool Class pool A S
A date field of datatype "D" stores date in the format YY/MM/DD DD/MM/YY YYYY/MM/DD YYYYMMDD D M
Default values for a DATA object can be set using the extension keyword DEFAULT VALUE SET IMPORT B M
Which of the Keywords gives a selection screen DATA TYPES PARAMETERS CONSTANTS C S
The description for a PARAMETER field can be maintained through Text Symbols Selection Texts List Heading None of the above B C
The maximum length of a PARAMETERS variable is 8 9 10 12 A C
The VALUE Keyword can be used with TYPES Statement 1 0 B S
The Value of a CONSTANT can be altered within the program 1 0 B S
The Data object which is a collection of fields is refered to as Field Strings Structures Work Area All the above D M
Which of the commands does not give a LIST WRITE ULINE VLINE SKIP C S
Which of the additions to the write statement will supress the leading zeros NO SIGN NO ZERO HIDE ZERO SUPRESS ZERO B M
The write statement cannot provide SYMBOL ICON ULINE RADIOBUTTON D C
The Domain provides a field with Syntatic DescriptiSemantic DescriptiDocumentation Help A S
Specifying the Value table in the domain does a foreign key check 1 0 B M
Choose the option that a Data element does not provide Field Description Documentation Search help Fixed values D S
Foreign key validation takes place at the Screen level 1 0 A C

A SAP Standard table can be enhanced through Include StructureDeep Structure Append Structure Nested Structure C C
Index acess is faster because an index uses Linear Search Hash Function Binary Search None of the above C S
How many types of buffering are available for a table 1 2 3 4C S
The Line Type gives the field descriptions for a table type 1 0 A M
Choose the table without an index operation Standard Table Sorted Table Hashed Table None of the above C S
A sorted table can further be sorted using the SORT command 1 0 B M
Dynamic Screen Modification is done in the POV POH PAI PBO D M
Choose the automatic validation that occurs on a field Mandatory CheckInteger type check Numeric type checkCurrency Check A S
A BDC Session can be scheduled in background using RMDATIND RSTXLDMC RSBDCSUB RSDEBUG C C
A BDC Session is an asynshronous method 1 0 A S
Error log in Call transaction is stored in nternal table of type BDCDATA BDCMSGCOLL BDCERROR BDCITAB B C
Open dataset / Close dataset is used for Local Files Sequential Files Both None B S
Logos in a SAP Script is uploaded using RSTXLDMC RSDBUG RSBDMIDOC RMDATIND A M
Graphical images is uploaded into SAP System using Tcode SE38 SE71 SE78 SE93 C M
The Standard style used by Scripts & Smartforms is STYLE STANDARD Times Roman Times new Roman A S
Background Pictures can be displayed through SCRIPTS SMARTFORMS Both None B M
Which event do you use to generate page headers for a details Top-of-Page End-of-page Top-of-page Start-of- C M
list? during line- selection
selection
Tcode for Transport workbench? SE01 SE09 SE80 SE84 B M
Function group global definitions can consist of? Screens Internal tables Workareas All D M
In which parameter passing technique no memory is allocated Pass by Pass by value Pass by value All A S
for actual parameters for a subroutine? reference and return
How do you define the selection screen of a program? Interface It is a list It is created by None A M
between user at
program and runtime
user
Which addition in the PARAMETERS statement allows you to Value Default Initial None B S
place default values on the selection screen?
How can you suppress the default title of a list? No standard New-Page Standard page Reserve A S
page heading heading
What does AT SELECTION-SCREEN do? To create a Selection To fetch data Initializing the B M
detail list screen from database fields
validation table
What system field indicates the list you are on? Sy-linct Sy-pfkey Sy-lsind Sy-linsz C M
Use of Editor lock Others can User can see Others can see User can see but C M
see as well as as well as but cannot cannot make
change the change the make changes changes in the
program program in the program program
Function code that triggers the event AT LINE-SELECTION SAVE PICK CHOOSE RW B C
Which is not a Numeric data type in ABAP I F N P C S
Which of the following internal table allows both unique and Standard Hashed Sorted Indexed C M
non-unique key
The current row of internal table is stored in SY-LINNO SY-INDEX SY-TLENG SY-TABIX D M
Field-symbols can be assigned to fields dynamically? 1 0 A VS
Which of the following is not a Text element? Title List heading Text symbol Selection text A M
Input values for selection screen can be stored as a? Text symbol Text element Variant Attribute C M
Default data type in ABAP? String C N I B VS
Which of the following is not a data object? Field string Constant Internal table Field symbol D S
Using WRITE statement we cannot display? ICON Symbol Check box Radiobutton D C
Macros can be called from external programs 1 0 B S
Event that is triggered when user interacts with GUI items? Start-of- At User- At selection- Get B M
selection command screen output
Automatic checks in screen does not include? Mandatory Check table Data format Primary key D C
field check entry uniqueness
Visible lines of table control is stored in? SY-STEPL SY-LOOPC SY-TFILL <TC>-LINES B M
Which of the following is not an input field? Radiobutton Checkbox Listbox Pushbutton D M
At Exit-command module is processed in? PBO PAI POV POH B M
The command used for validating more than one field Loop at Field Chain …. None of the C M
simultaneously Screen …. fieldname Endchain above
Endloop Check
check_field
Screen field attributes can be modified in the event PBO PAI POV POH A C
Which type of message will execute a ROLLBACK? E A W S B C
Messages are stored in table T001 T100 TSTC BDCMSGCOLL B M
ABAP program screens are System Client Module Program D C

dependent dependent dependent dependent
Tcode for Extended syntax check? SE30 ST05 SE16 SLIN D S
When PBO gets executed? After screen After user has After user Before screen is D M
is displayed pressed a enters some displayed
function code value
Where do you set the GUI status for a screen? In PAI In PBO In POV module None of the B M
module module above
Global data definitions in online(DIALOG) programs are located screen top Include Within Within B S
at Layout CHAIN….ENDCHModule….EndMo
Field automatically generated in screens for receiving and SY-UCOMM SY-STEPL PICK SY-DYNNR A S
transmitting function code
Absolute line number of selected list is stored in SY-STEPL SY-LINNO SY-LILLI SY-LISEL C C
Which of the following is not supported in WRITE statement? Radiobutton Checkbox Input on Hotspot on A M
Command that terminates loop processing SKIP CONTINUE EXIT CHECK C S
<CONDITION>
Field symbol can be assigned to Elementary Work area Internal table All D M
variable
Adding duplicate rows in an internal table is prevented by the Append Collect Delete Insert B C
command adjacent
duplicates
Which of these commands can be used in any loop? On change of At new <field> At first At end of <field> A S
<field>
Command that deallocates memory of internal table? Refresh Describe Free Clear C S
Duplicate entries can be always stored in? Standard Sorted table Hashed table All A S
table
Internal table storage will be in? Database Application Presentation Message server B S
server server server
Internal table contents can be processed in a loop without using 1 0 A S
a workarea
Insert command cannot be used on? Standard Hashed table Sorted table None of the C M
table above
Select-options creates ? Work area Internal table Field group Field symbol B S
A selection screen cannot have? Radiobutton Listbox Chechbox Table control D C
Statement that returns control to calling screen Call screen Leave to Leave to None C C
<no> screen <no> screen 0
Sample questions for TADM51.
1) Which of the following components indicate that R3 is a client / server system?

a. Multiple DB’s
b. Database server
c. 3 separate hardware servers (DB, applcn & presentation server)
d. Db service, app service & presentation service
2) Which of the following is not contained in R/3 DB?

a. The R/3 Repository
b. The R/3 kernel
c. Customer Data
d. Transaction data
e. Customizing Data
f. The ABAP dictionary
3) Which of the following is correct in regard to R/3 clients?9/15/2003

a. The R/3 client has it’s own customer data and programs which are not
accessible to other clients within the same R/3 system.
b. An R/3 client has all R/3 repository objects and client independent
customizing with all other clients in the R/3 system
c. An R/3 client shares customizing and Applcn data with other clients in the
same R/3 system
d. An R/3 client enables you to separate applcn data from customizing data
4) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to SAP Client Concept

a. All customizing settings are client independent
b. A client has unique set of applcn data
c. A client has it’s own repository objects
d. All customizing settings are client dependant
5) Which of the following strategies enables R/3 customers to avoid making

modifications to SAP Std objects?
a. Using Enhancement techs such as Program exits & menu exits
b. Modifying SAP delivered programs
c. Changing SAP std functionality using the IMG
d. Performing customizing to provide the required functionality
6) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to IMG?

a. The IMG consists of series of customizing activities for defining a Companies
Business process
b. The IMG is a online resource providing the necessary info and steps to help
you implementing the R/3 applcn Modules
c. IMG is client independent
d. All of the above
7) Which of the following strategies enables an Enterprise to meet its business needs by
changing or enhancing R/3 functionality
Compiled by Amarnath Jayaraman. 1

Caution: This is just a sample questionnaire, hence the appearance of these in the exam is
not guaranteed. For reference only.
a. Maintaining application data using the Various R3 Business transactions in

the SAP Std
b. Using the ABAP workbench to create the read R/3 repository objects
c. Using customizing to modify R/3 programs after obtaining an access key from
OSS
d. Using customer Exits to enhance the functionality of existing SAP Objects
8) Which of the following statements are correct in regards to modifications

A a modification is a change to an SAP Std object
b. A modification must be registered using the SAP OSS (SSCR)
c. SAP recommends modification only if customer’s business meets cannot be
me by customizing enhancement techs or customer dev
d. All the above
9) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to the customizing

a. Customizing enables R/3 applcn process to be set to reflect a companies
business needs
b. Customizing can be performed only from within IMG
c. Customizing is necessary because R/3 delivered w/o Business process.
d. None of the above
10) Which of the following is correct in regard to R/3 repository

a. Customers can develop new repository objects using tools in the ABAP
workbench.
b. Customer developed repository objects reside in the R/3 repository alongside
std repository objects
c. Customers can create & assign new repository objects to a development class
d. All of the above
11) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to critical client roles as
recommended by SAP?
a. Customizing changes can be made in any client
b. All customizing & dev changes should be made in a single R/3 client
c. Repository object should be created and changed in R/3 Quality assurance
client (QAS)
d. Unit testing should take place in the customizing and dev client
12) Which of the following activities should not be performed within a system landscape
a. Customizing & dev changes are promoted to a QAS client before being
delivered to PRD
b. The R/3 system is upgraded to a new R/3 release
c. Dev changes are mad directly in the PRD client
d. Changes are assigned to a specific role

13) Which of the following benefits does the 3-system landscape recommended by SAP
have?
a. Customizing and dev, testing, and prod activities take place in separate DB
environments and do not affect one another
b. Changes are tested in the QAS system and imported in the PRD system only
after verification
c. Client independent changes can be made in the DEV system w/o immediately
affecting the PRD client
d. All of the above
14) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to multiple R/3 clients?
a. All clients in the same R/3 system share the same R/3 repository and client
independent customizing settings
b. No more than one client in the same R/3 system should allow changes to
client independent customizing changes.
c. If a client allows for changes to client dependent customizing, the client
should also allow for changes to Client independent customizing objects
d. All of the above.
15) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to setup of 3-system landscape
a. There is only R/3 DB for the system landscape
b. One client should allow for the automatic recording of client dependent
customizing and client independent changes.
c. All R/3 systems have the same System ID (SID)
d. All clients must have unique client numbers
16) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to the CUST client
a. It should allow changes to client independent customizing, but not repository
objects
b. It should automatically record all changes to customizing settings
c. It should not allow changes to client dependent and client independent
customizing settings
d. It should allow for all changes, but not require recording of changes to change
request.
17) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to the 2-system landscape
a. It is not optimal because 3 is limited opportunity to test the transport of
changes from the DEV system to the PRD system
b. It allows for changes to Customizing in the PRD system
c. It is recommended by SAP because Customizing and DEV do not impact
QAS testing.
d. All of the above
18) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to Phase implementation.

a. All CUST changes made in PRD support system must also be made in the
DEV system

b. The system landscape requires 5 R/3 systems

c. Changes in the PRD support system do not have to be made in the DEV env
d. The system landscape needs an env that supports a PRD system with any reqd
changes.
19) Which of the following statements is not valid in regard to global system landscape
a. A global template can be used for the roll out of corporate CUST settings and
DEV efforts
b. Management of different repository objects can be managed using name
spaces, and name ranges for the repository objects
c. Merging and CUST settings delivered by the corporate office with local
CUST efforts can easily be done using change requests
d. SAP provides different tools to aid the roll-out of a global template.
20) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to CUST and DEV changes?
a. all changes are recorded to task in CUST change request
b. the changes should be recorded to tasks in change requests for transport to
other clients and systems
c. the changes must be manually performed in every R/3 system
d. the changes can easily be made simultaneously in multiple clients.
21) Which of the following statements in regard to change requests is false?

a. The customizing organizer and the workbench organizer are tools used to view,
create and manager change request
b. A change request is a collection of tasks where developers and people performing
customizing record the changed they make.
c. All changes made as a result of IMG activities are recorded to customizing
change requests.
d. SAP recommends setting your R/3 system so that customizing changes made in
the customizing and development client are automatically recorded to change
requests.
22) For which of the following activities is the TMS (tcode STMS) not designed?
a. Releasing change requests

b. Viewing import queues
c. Viewing log files generated by both the export process and the import process
d. Initiating the import process
23) Which of the following statements is correct after you have successfully imported
change request into the quality assurance system?
a. The change requests must be released again to be exported to the production

system.

b. The data files containing the changed objects are deleted from the transport
directory
c. The change requests need to be manually added to the import queue of the
production system
d. The change requests are automatically added to the import queue of the
production system.
24) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to the change requests in
an import queue?
a. They are sequenced according to their change request number.’

b. They are sequenced in the order in which they were exported from the
development system
c. They are sequenced according to the name of the user who released the requests
d. They are not sequenced by default, but arranged in a variety of ways using the
TMS
25) Which of the following techniques can be used to transfer application data
between two PRD systems?
a. Recording transaction data to change requests
b. Using ALE to transfer application data
c. Using the client copy tool
d. All the above
26) Which of the following types of data transfer are possible within appropriate use
of interface technologies?
a. Transferring legacy data to an R/3 system
b. Transferring data between R/3 clients
c. Transferring data to non-SAP systems
d. Transporting change requests to multiple R/3 systems
27) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to user master data?
a. User master data can be transported in a change request
b. User master data is unique to each R/3 system, but is shared across clients in the
same R/3 system.
c. A specific client copy option enables you to distribute user master data together
with authorization profile data
d. User master data included all user logon information, including the definition of
authorizations and profiles
28) Which of the following clients should u copy to create new clients and ensure that all
data from post installation processing is also copied?
a. a. Client 001
b. b. Client 001
c. c. Client 066

29) Which of the following is not a SAP recommended strategy for setting up a system
landscape
a. a. Using a client copy from the DEV system to set up your QAS and
PRD system when the change request strategy is not an option
b. b. Creating the PRD system as a combination of a client copy from the
QAS system and change request from the DEV system
c. c. Using the same setup strategy to establish both the QAS and PRD
systems
d. d. Setting up the QAS and PRD system by importing Change requests
prompted from the DEV system
30) Which of the following are correct in regard to setup of TMS?

a. a. The TMS should be setup when the DEV system is installed
b. b. The TMS should include all R/3 systems in the system landscape
even if the R/3 systems do not physically exist
c. c. The TMS is critical in establishing the Transport between the DEV &
QAS system
d. d. The TMS should be setup before the Change request is created in the
CUST and DEV client
31) Which of the following is correct in regard to system copy strategy

a. a. SAP recommends the system copy strategy because all CUST &
DEV objects are transferred
b. b. SAP does not recommend the system copy strategy because there is
no easy to eliminate the unwanted APPLCN data
c. c. A system copy is the easiest set of strategy recommended by SAP
d. d. A system copy eliminates the need for change requests for the entire
R/3 implementation
32) Which of the following activities is not necessary for exporting a change request
a. a. Documenting every task in the request
b. b. Releasing every task in the change request
c. c. Verification of the contents of the change request by the system
administrator
d. d. Unit testing the change request.
33) Which of the following is correct in regard to the task used in the change request that
record CUST & DEV changes
a. a. Task belongs to change request
b. b. Task can be used by several R/3 users
c. c. Task are direct responsibility of the Project leader
d. d. Task records only client specific changes
34) Which of the following indicates that the change request has been signed off after
QAS testing.
a. a. The change request has been released after unit testing.

b. b. The change request has been successfully imported into the QAS
system
c. c. The change request is added into the import queue of all other R/3
systems in the system landscape
d. d. The project leader communicates the approval of the change request
35) Which of the following is NOT an SAP recommendation

a. a. Imports into the QAS & PRD system should occur in the same
sequence.
b. b. Even if the import process is automatically scripted a technical
consultant or system admin should revise the result of the import
c. c. The project leader should manually add a change request to import
queue of the QAS system
d. d. Change request are imported in the same sequence that they were
exported from the DEV system
36) Which of the following is SAP’s recommendation on how to rush an emergency

correction into the PRD system
a. a. Make the changes directly in the PRD system
b. b. Transport the changes from the DEV system to QAS system & PRD
system using preliminary import
c. c. Make the change and use a client copy with change request to
distribute the changes into PRD
d. d. Make the change in the QAS system and transport using preliminary
import
37) Which of the following transport activities is not typically the responsibility of the
system admin
a. a. Importing change request into all clients within R/3 system
b. b. Verifying the success of import process
c. c. Releasing the change request
d. d. Assisting in solving either export or import errors
38) Which of the following does SAP provide a customer support?

a. a. R/3 release upgrade to provide new functionality
b. b. Support packs to correct identified problems in a specific R/3 release
c. c. R/3 notes to announce errors & corrections for reported problems
d. d. All of the above
39) The R/3 system ID (SID)

a. a. Must be unique for each system sharing the same transport directory
b. b. Must be unique for each system in the system landscape
c. c. Can start with a number
d. d. Can consist of any 3 char combination
40) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to the TRANS dir

a. a. There can be only one TRANS dir in a system landscape

b. b. All R/3 systems within Transport group share a common TRANS dir
c. c. In a system landscape using heterogeneous platforms it is not
possible to have a common TRANS dir
d. d. Only the PRD system can contain the TRANS dir
41) The Transport control program TP

a. a. Is stored in subdirectory bin of TRANS dir
b. b. Uses program R3TRANS to access the DB when transporting
changes
c. c. Cannot be used directly on the OS level
d. d. Depends on the settings of the transport profile
42) The transport profile

a. Is stored in subdirectory bin of TRANS dir
b. Contains comments and parameter settings that configure the transport control
program TP
c. Is managed from within TMS as of release 4.5, but is modified with OS text
editors in earlier release
d. Contains only settings that are valid for all R/3 systems in the system landscape
43) The initialization procedure of the CTO
a. Is especially required after a system copy

b. Establishes the initial value for change request Ids
c. Is not mandatory for the purpose of enabling transports
d. Is performed automatically during R/3 installation by program R3setup
44) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to the settings governing
changes to repository objects
a. Only the customer name range should be modifiable in production systems.

b. Developments are possible in an R/3 system only if you have applied for a
development namespace from SAP
c. If the global change option is set to not modifiable, it nevertheless possible to
make changes in certain name spaces or clients that has their change option set to
modifiable.
d. The global change option should always be set to not modifiable for the quality
assurance system and the production system.
45) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to the R/3 systems belonging
to a transport domain?
A. They all share the same transport directory

B. They are managed centrally using TMS

C. They belong to the same transport group
D. They must run on the same operating system and database platform
46) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to the domain controller?
A. It must be the production system
B. It occurs once in a transport domain
C. It occurs in each transport group
D. It can only be the R/3 system that was originally designated as the transport
domain controller
E. It should never be the production system due to the high system load that the
domain controller causes
47) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to the TMS?
A. It needs to be initialized only on the transport domain controller
B. It needs to be initialized only on the transport domain controller and the backup
domain controller
C. It must be initialized on every R/3 system
D. It must be set up before you can set up transport routes
48) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to the RFC destinations for
TMS connections?
A. They are generated automatically when a transport route is created
B. They are generated between the domain controller and each R/3 system in the
transport domain
C. They must be established manually before you can use the TMS
D. They are generated during the TMS initialization process
E. They are only needed for importing change requests
49) How is the actual system landscape, including R/3 system roles and relationships,
defined using the TMS?
A. By including all R/3 system in the transport domain
B. By configuring transport routes
C. By assigning a role to each R/3 system during the TMS initialization process
D. By designating real, virtual, and external R/3 systems
50) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to a consolidation route?

A. It is defined by an integration system and a consolidation system, and is
associated with a transport layer
B. It is created in the TMS by defining only an integration system and a
consolidation system
C. It is not necessarily required in a two-system landscape
D. It can be defined only once in a transport group
51) Which of the following statements re correct in regard to client-specific transport

routes?

A. They are possible as of R/3 Release 4.0

B. They are possible only as of R/3 Release 4.5, and only if extended transport
control is activated
C. They are only allowed for target groups
D. They may not be used in conjunction with client-independent transport routes
52) After you create a new client entry in table T000, which of the following activities
enables you to provide the client with data?
A. A remote client copy to populate the client with data from a client in another R/3
system
B. A client transport to import data from a client in another R/3 system
C. A local client copy to import data from a client within the same R/3 system
D. All of the above
53) Which of the following cannot be used to restrict a client from certain activities?
A. The client role
B. The client-dependent change option
C. The client ID-number
D. A client restriction
E. The client-independent change option
54) Which of the following tasks can be performed using the client copy tools?
A. Merging application data from one client into another client
B. Copying only application data from one client to another client
C. Copying only Customizing data from one client to another client
D. All of the above
55) Which of the following tasks can be performed using the client copy profiles?
A. Scheduling a client copy to occur at a time when system use is low
B. Selecting the subset of application data that will be copied when a client copy is
executed
C. Providing required user authorization for the use of client tools
D. Determining the data that will be copied when a client copy is executed
56) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to table logging?

A. Table logging should be used instead of change requests whenever possible
B. Table logging provides an audit history of who made what changes and when
C. Table logging does not negatively impact system resources
D. All of the above
57) Which of the following statements is false in regard to development classes?

A. Development classes facilitate project management by grouping similar
Repository objects
B. All Repository objects are assigned to a development class
C. A development class determines the transport route that a changed Repository
object will follow

D. A local object does not need a development class
58) Which of the following kinds of changes are transported using Workbench change
requests?
A. Client-independent changes
B. Modifications to SAP-delivered objects
C. Changes made using the ABAP Editor and ABAP Dictionary
D. Repairs to R/3 Repository objects that originated in another R/3 System
E. All of the above
59) Which of the following data is not contained in the object list of a task?
A. The actual change made to the objects listed in the task
B. The list of changed objects recorded to the task
C. Whether the objects recorded to the task are locked
D. The complete Object Directory entry for the object
60) Which of the following statements are correct regarding repairs and
modifications?
A. Repairs are changes to SAP-delivered objects; modifications are changes to any
object that originated on an R/3 System other than the current R/3 System
B. A repair flag protects an R/3 Repository object against being overwritten by an
import
C. All repairs are saved to Workbench change requests
D. A modification is a change to an SAP-delivered object
E. All of the above
61) Which of the following requirements must be met before you can change both client-
dependent and client-independent Customizing settings in a client?
A. The client settings must allow for changes to client-independent Customizing
objects
B. The client role must be Production
C. The system change option must be set to Modifiable
D. The client settings must allow for changes to client-dependent Customizing
62) Which of the following statements are correct when project leaders and project team
members receive only the recommended authorizations?
A. Only developers can create change requests
B. Only project leaders can create change requests, and are therefore responsible for
assigning project team members to change requests
C. Project team members can create and release change requests
D. Project leaders can release change requests
63) Which of the following statements are correct with regard to Project IMGs?
A. The Project IMG provides access to the Customizing activities defined for a
particular project
B. Customizing is performed in the project IMG tree structure

C. The Project IMG enables you to display project status information and document
Customizing activities
D. All of the above
64) Which of the following activities are performed using the Customizing Organizer?
A. Viewing all Customizing change requests related to a particular user
B. Viewing all Workbench change requests related to a particular user
C. Viewing all change requests related to a particular user
D. Managing change requests you own or reviewing change requests in which you
have assigned tasks
65) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to Customizing?

A. All Customizing activities in the IMG activities can be transported
B. All changes resulting from IMG activities can be transported
C. All Customizing changes are automatically recorded to a change request if the
client change option is set to Automatic recording of changes
D. A Customizing activity may involve the creation of client-independent objects
and therefore requires Workbench change request
66) Which of the following activities are performed using client comparison tools?
A. Comparing the customizing settings of two R/3 clients in the same R/3 System or
in a different R/3 System
B. Adjusting the Customizing differences between two different R/3 clients
C. Transporting Customizing settings into the production client
D. Comparing the objects listed in the object list of a change request with an R/3
client
67) Which of the following is a prerequisite for copying client-dependent changes to a

unit test client using a client copy according to a transport request (Transaction
SCC1)?
A. The change request has been released
B. The tasks have been released, but the change request has not
C. The tasks have been released after successful unit testing by the owner of the task
D. The change request has not been released
68) Which of the following are the results of releasing a task?

A. A data file is created in the transport directory and contains the objects recorded
in the change request
B. The object list and documentation for the task are copied to the change request
C. All objects recorded in the task are locked
D. You can no longer save changes to that task
69) Which of the following are result of releasing and exporting a change request?
A. A data file is created in the transport directory to contain copies of the objects
recorded in the change request

B. Versions are created in the version database for all R/3 Repository objects in the
object list of the change request
C. All repairs recorded in the change request are confirmed
D. You can no longer save changes to that change request
70) When you release a Customizing change request, you have the option to do which
of the following?
A. Release the change request to another Customizing change request
B. Schedule the release of the change request for a late time
C. Release the change request to a transportable change request
D. Initiate immediate release and export
71) Which of the following is a prerequisite for releasing a transportable change request?
A. There are no syntax errors in the ABAP programs recorded to the change request
B. You must own the tasks in the change request
C. All Repository objects in the change request are locked by the change request
D. The change request has documentation
72) The export process initiates which of the following activities?

A. The creation of files in the transport directory
B. The automatic import of change requests into the target system
—for example, the
quality assurance system
C. The addition of the exported change request to the import buffer of the target
system
D. The deletion of the change request within the R/3 System
73) Which of the following activities result in a version history for all Repository objects?
A. A Repository object is recorded to a change request
B. Change requests are imported into an R/3 System, and the transport parameter
vers_at_imp is activated
C. A task containing a Repository object is released
D. A change request containing a Repository object is released
74) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to import queues?
A. Import queues are the TMS representation of the import buffer on the operating
system level
B. You have to manipulate import queues to transport change requests
C. Import queues should be closed before starting an import using TMS
D. You can import only an entire import queue
75) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to preliminary imports?

A. SAP recommends using preliminary imports rather than imports of entire queues.
B. Preliminary imports should be performed only in exceptional cases
C. Change requests imported as preliminary imports remain in the import queue

D. Change requests are deleted from the import queue after preliminary imports. This
prevents them from being imported gain with the next import of the entire import
queue
76) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to imports into an R/3 System?
A. Imports can be performed only by using the start import functionality in the TMS
B. Imports can be performed only by using tp commands on the operating system
level to prepare the import queue and then using the start import functionality in
the TMS
C. Imports can be performed only by using tp commands at the operating system
level
D. Imports can be performed by using either a tp command on the operating system
level or the TMS import functionality
77) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to transports between different
transport groups?
A. They are not possible
B. They can be performed only by using tp on the operating system level with
special options
C. They can be performed using the TMS with special options provided by the
expert mode
D. They require you to adjust the corresponding import queues
78) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to transports between
different transport domains?
A. They are not possible
B. They require you to create a virtual system and a virtual transport directory
C. They require you to configure identical transport groups within the different
transport domains
D. They require you to create external systems and an external transport directory
E. They require you to adjust the corresponding import queues.
79) Which of the following statements re correct in regard to the transport control
program tp?
A. To perform imports, tp must always be used directly on the operating system level
B. SAP recommends that you use the TMS instead of tp to perform imports
C. tp is responsible for exporting and importing objects from and to R/3 Systems
D. tp does not observe the sequence of change requests in the import queue when
performing imports
80) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to import queues and import
buffers?
A. Import queues are TMS representations in R/3 of the import buffer files on the
operating system level
B. Import queues and import buffers are completely independent of each other

C. Import buffers have to be manipulated before imports can be performed on the

operating system level
D. Manipulating import buffers may cause serious inconsistencies and should be
performed only in exceptional cases.
81) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to the import options
formerly known as unconditional modes?
A. Import options cannot be used when imports are performed on the operating
system level using tp.
B. Import options are used to cause specific rules of the Change and Transport
System (CTS) to be ignored
C. Import options must be used when importing into multiple clients using tp.
D. Import options can be selected in the TMS using the expert mode
82) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to the sequence of processing
steps tp follows when performing imports?
A. tp collectively processes each import step for all change requests in an import
queue before proceeding with the next import step
B. tp processes all import steps for a single request before proceeding to the next
change request
C. The processing sequence followed by tp ensures that when a change request with
a faulty object is followed in the import queue by a change request with the
corrected object, the faulty object will not affect the runtime environment of the
target system
D. tp imports and activates ABAP Dictionary structures prior to the main import
phase to ensure that the current structures are able to receive new data during the
main import phase.
83) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to troubleshooting imports?
A. In R/3, you cannot display log files that do not depend on a specific request. For
example, you cannot display log files related to generic import steps, such as
structure conversion.
B. SAP recommends that you check the SLOG file and the ALOG file before
checking the single step log files.
C. By default, all return codes greater than eight cause tp to abort a running import
D. tp is the only transport tool that uses return codes.
84) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to buffer synchronization?
A. Transport activities do not affect buffer synchronization
B. Imports affect buffer synchronization even in central R/3 systems
C. R3trans can invalidate buffer content
D. Importing data into a production system can significantly impact performance,
because some buffer content may be invalidated and reloaded. This causes high
system load

E. Importing programs and ABAP Dictionary data cannot cause inconsistencies in

the target system, even if the programs or data affect running programs and their
environment
85) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to the interaction between
transport tools?
A. During exports, tp calls R3trans to access the database of the source system and
extract the objects to be transported
B. tp triggers the transport daemon RDDIMPDP in R/3 using the operating system
tool sapevt
C. Using the tables TRBAT and TRJOB, tp communicates with ABAP programs
involved in the transport process
D. tp communicates with only RDDIMPDP
86) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to the R/3 Release strategy?
A. Functional Releases are automatically shipped to all customers
B. Correction Releases provide only corrections and no new functionality with
respect to the previous R/3 Functional Release
C. Functional Releases receive only limited OCS maintenance; that is, only very
urgent corrections are available as Support Packages
D. R/3 Release upgrades are possible only for Correction Releases
87) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to Support Packages?
A. Support Packages change the SAP standard of your R/3 System in advance of the
next R/3 Release upgrade
B. You can apply all types of Support Packages to all R/3 installations, regardless of
the components used in the installation
C. Support Packages are available only to customers who are participants in the First
Customer Shipment (FCS) program
D. Different types of Support Packages may be required for R/3 Installations with
different components
88) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to the SAP Patch Manager?
A. The SAP Patch Manager ensures that Support Packages are applied in the correct
sequence
B. The SAP Patch Manager does not check whether the type of Support Package you
wish to apply is appropriate for your R/3 installation. It is up to you to decide
whether, for example, you require a Conflict Resolution Transport.
C. The SAP Patch Manager does not offer you the chance to protect SAP objects that
you have modified. These objects are automatically overwritten.
D. The SAP Patch Manager automatically prompts you to call the modification
adjustment Transactions SPDD or SPAU if necessary
89) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to R/3 Release upgrades?
A. Objects in the customer namespace are not overwritten

B. A Repository switch is the replacement of your current R/3 Repository by the R/3
Repository in the new R/3 Release
C. All customer modifications to ABAP Dictionary object are lost
D. Customer modifications to SAP objects that you want to preserve must be
transferred to the new Release through the modification adjustment process
90) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to the modification
adjustment process?
A. Transaction SPAU is used for most ABAP Dictionary objects
B. Transaction SPDD is used for most ABAP Dictionary objects
C. Not using Transaction SPDD where applicable may cause data loss
D. During modification adjustment, you must choose to return to the SAP standard
Answers:
1. D
2. B
3. B
4. B
5 A, D
6 D
7. B, D
8. D
9 A
10. D
11. B
12. C
13. D
14. D
15. B
16. B
17. A
18. A, D
19. C
20. B
21 C
22. A
23 D
24 B
25 B
26 A, B, C
27 C
28 B
29 B

30 A, B, C, D
31 B
32 C
33 A
34 D
35 C
36 B
37 C
38 D
39 A, B
40 B
41 B, D
42 A, B, C
43 A, B
44 D
45 B
46 B
47 C, D
48 B, D
49 B
50 A
51 B, D
52 D
53 C
54 C
55 D
56 B
57 D
58 E
59 A, D
60 B, C, D
61 A, C, D
62 B, D
63 D
64 A, B, C, D
65 D
66 A, B, D
67 D
68 B, D
69 A, B, D
70 C, D
71 C
72 A, C
73 B, D
74 A, C
75 B, C

76 D
77 D
78 D, E
79 B, C
80 A, D
81 B, C, D
82 A, C, D
83 A, B, C
84 B, C, D
85 A, B, C
86 B, C
87 A, D
88 A, D
89 A, B, D
90 B, C
ALL THE BEST FOLKS !!!

1. In debugger, which function key executes one statement. If we do this on PERFORM or
a call function, control wont go inside subroutine/function but will be processed
a) F5 b) F6 c) F7 d) F8 e) None
ANS: (b)
*************************************************************************************************************
2. One structure is created and need the same to be added in multiple tables. Which option
will help?
a) Include b) append c) both d) none
ANS: (A)
*************************************************************************************************************
3. What is true about ABAP dictionary? Choose two most appropriate options?
a) It is the core of the R/3 development system

b) It does not allows data management without redundancy
c) It is not actively integrated into all operative components of the R/3 system
d) It contains an extensive amount of information on the SAP system data
ANS: (A D)
*************************************************************************************************************
4. In sales and distribution, division
a) Groups materials and services

b) How you reach the customer
c) Sells products and services
d) Part of a plant
e) Separates different locations
ANS: A ( Nikhil Raj )

*************************************************************************************************************
5. What is the syntax error in the given CDS source code below
@AbapCatalog.sqlViewName: ‘zcds_demo_13’
@AbapCatalog.compiler.compareFilter: true
@AccessControl.authorizationCheck: #CHECK
@EndUserText:label: ‘demo’
Define view zcds_demo_13 as select from flight as sf
{ sf.mandt,
sf.carried,
sf.connid,
sf.fldate,
sf.price
}
a) No syntax error
b) SQL view name ZCDS_DEMO_13 and DDL view name ZCDS_DEMO_13 cannot be
identical
c) Cannot use alias for SFLIGHT
d) Primary key fields are missing
ANS: (B)
*************************************************************************************************************
6. How to pass default values into the selection screen parameter?

(Multiple Options possible)
a) VALUE keyword
b) Using AT SELECTION SCREEN event
c) Using INITIALIZATION event
d) DEFAULT keyword
ANS: (C,D)
*************************************************************************************************************
7. Select option can be converted to parameter with Addition
a) WITHOUT EXTENSION INTERVALS

b) HIDE
c) NO-EXTENSION NO INTERVALS
d) Conversion not possible
ANS: ( C )
*************************************************************************************************************
8. From the following options, which are true about performance tuning of a program
1. Do not use joins on cluster tables like BSEG

2. SELECT * can be used whenever required
3. Internal tables used in FOR AL ENTRIES can be empty
4. Never nest logic within a SELECT statement
a) 1 & 2 b) 2 & 3 c) 1 2 & 4 d) 2 3 & 4
ANS: (C) (Bharani)

*************************************************************************************************************
9. For successful data migration what is commonly performed to improve data quality by
eliminating redundant or obsolete information?
a) Data mapping b) validation c) extraction d) data cleaning
ANS: (D)
*************************************************************************************************************
10. Which method updates SAP db tables directly via SAP Open SQL
a) BDC b) Call transaction c) direct update d) all d) none
ANS: (A)
*************************************************************************************************************
11. Which options can be used to import data using LSMW?
1. Direct input
2. Batch input
3. BAPI
4. Idoc
a) All
b) None
c) 1 2 & 3
d) 2 & 4
e) 3 & 4 ANS: (A)
*************************************************************************************************************
12. What can have multiple implementations and multiple customers can use them
simultaneously
a) User exit
b) Function exit
c) BADI
d) Menu exit
e) Program exit
ANS: (C )
*************************************************************************************************************
13. What is true about customer exits?
1. They are more restrictive and hence changes to any parameters will not lead to
inconsistency
2. FORM(subroutines) executed by SAP standard programs by PERFORM statements
3. Within function (customer exit) you have access only to it’s parameters
(import/export/changing/tables)
4. They are FUNCTIONS performed by CALL FUNCTION (CALL CUSTOMER FUNCTION
to be specific)
5. Within for (user exits) it’s possible to modify any global data of calling program
a) 1 3 & 4
b) 2 3 & 4
c) 1 2 & 5
d) 2 4 & 5
e) 3 4 & 5
ANS: (A) (Bharani)

*************************************************************************************************************
14. Choose the script languages used by Adobe Live Cycle Designer
a) JavaScript only
b) JavaScript and FormCalc
c) Formcalc only
d) None of them
ANS: (B)
*************************************************************************************************************
15. Consider the source code below. What will be the output of the same
DATA : lv_fmname TYPE rs381_fnam.

SELECT SINGLE * FROM flight INTO @DATA(lw_sflight) WHERE carrid = ‘AA’.
CALL FUNCTION ‘SSF_FUNCTION_MODULE_NAME’

EXPORTING
formname = ‘ZDEMO1’
IMPORTING
fm_name = lv_fname.
CALL FUNCTION lv_fmname

EXPORTING
i_sflight = lw_sflight.
Choose the best option:
a) Syntax error
b) b) runtime error
c) it will print the data from SFLIGHT based on the smartform layout design and logic within
it
d) warnings on activation
ANS: ( C ) Nikhil Raj

*************************************************************************************************************
16. Match the following
1) Main window
2) Secondary window
3) Final window
4) Copies window
A) For printing fixed length output

B) To make copies of original pages
C) Contents of this window will be printed only at the end
D) For printing continuous outputs, for example, internal tables
(Single Correct)
Choose the best option:

a) 1 - A
2-B
3-D
4-C
b) 1-D
2-C
3-B
4-A
c) 1-D
2-A
3-C
4-B
d) 1-A
2-D
3-B
4-C
ANS: ( C )
*************************************************************************************************************
17. Topic: Module pool , Sub_Topic: Tab strip
Which statements are true about tab strips?
(Multiple Correct)
a) It allows to navigate between sub screens

b) It allows to navigate between screens
c) Tabstrip screens may change with or without the application server
ANS: (A,C)
*************************************************************************************************************
18. In module program screen, there is an input field INPUT of type Char. In the flow logic,
VALUES statement is used like below.
FIELDS input values (‘AA’, ‘AB’, ‘LH’).
What exactly does this statement do during execution? Choose 3 most appropriate options.
Choose the best option(s) -> (multiple options possible)
a) It will add F4 Help values to INPUT having ‘AA’, ‘AB’ and ‘LH’. But, it will allow any other
values also
b) It will restrict the user to enter only ‘AA’, ‘AB’ or ‘LH’
c) It will give error if the user is not entering ‘AA’, ‘AB’ or ‘LH’
d) It will add F4 Help values to INPUT having only ‘AA’, ’AB’ and ‘LH’
e) It will give warning message if user is not entering ‘AA’, ‘AB’ or ‘LH’
ANS: b,c,d (Amod)
*************************************************************************************************************
19. An event handler method can be defined as method. Choose appropriate ans
a) Static
b) Instance
c) Any
d) Constructor
ANS: C Nikhil Raj
*************************************************************************************************************
20. What are the components of a class?

Choose three most appropriate options
a) Attributes
b) Events
c) Ranges
d) Methods
e) Reference object
ANS: (A,B,D)
*************************************************************************************************************
21. Topic : ABAP , Sub_Topic : Reports
What will be the output by the following code?

DATA : BEGIN OF itab OCCURS 0, value type i, END OF itab. Itab-value = 1.
APPEND itab. Itab-value = 2. APPEND itab. REFRESH itab.
WRITE:/ 1 itab-value.
Choose most appropriate option:
a) 1
b) 2
c) blank
d) 0
ANS: B
*************************************************************************************************************
22. Choose all the true statements about transport requests:
(multiple options possible)
a) A transport request is completed when it is released

b) Once released, the transport request cannot be changed
c) Once released, the objects involved in TR are then stored in the
d) Once released, the transport request can be changed
e) A transport request is not completed when it is released
ANS: A,B,C
*************************************************************************************************************
23. What all changes will you do to the below source code to improve it’s performance?
(Multiple Correct)
DATA : It_sflight TYPE STANDARD TABLE OF sflight,

It_scarr TYPE STANDARD TABLE OF scarr,
lw_scarr TYPE scarr,
lw_sflight TYPE sflight.
SELECT * FROM flight INTO TABLE lt_sflight.

LOOP AT It_sflight INTO lw_sflight.
SELECT * FROM scarr INTO TABLE It_scarr
WHERE carrid = lw_sflight-carrid.
LOOP AT lt_scarr INTO lw_scarr.
WRITE:/ lw_scarr-carrid, lw_scarr-carrname.
ENDLOOP.
ENDLOOP.
a) Avoid using SELECT *

b) Avoid using nested LOOP
c) Avoid WRITE statement within LOOP
d) Avoid using INTO TABLE clause
e) Avoid using SELECT statement within loop
ANS: (A,E)
*************************************************************************************************************
24. What are the features of static attributes?
Choose three most appropriate options.
a) One per instance

b) Only one per class
c) Statement : DATA
d) Statement : CLASS-DATA
e) Also know as class attributes
ANS: (B,D,E)
*************************************************************************************************************
25. Topic: Forms, Sub_Topic: Smartforms
Which node of smartform is used to pass values from print program?
Choose most appropriate option.

a) Global definitions
b) Form attributes
c) Pages and windows
d) Form interface
ANS: (D)
*************************************************************************************************************
26. A DO loop is used to unconditionally execute a block of code multiple times. Which keyword
Helps to terminate from DO loop?
a) EXIT
b) STOP
c) REJECT
d) All of the given options
e) None
ANS: (A)
*************************************************************************************************************
27. How many ways we can define values in DOMAINS? Choose 3 most appropriate options
a) Single fixed values

b) Intervals
c) Value table
d) Data element values
e) Search help values
ANS: (A,B,C)
*************************************************************************************************************
28. Which among the following guarantees the integration between all of the application
modules and also they are platform-independent?
(Single Correct)
a) R/3 BASIS system

b) R/3 Application
c) System platforms
d) ABAP Interpreter
e) ABAP dictionary
ANS- A (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
29. Choose the three nodes which will be there by default when you create smartforms newly.
(Multiple Correct)
a) Form attributes
b) Table control
c) Form Interface
d) Logo window
e) Global definitions
ANS: (A,C,E)
*************************************************************************************************************
30. Which is a logical partition of the database within an instance? Choose the most appropriate
options
a) Client
b) LUW
c) R/3 Basis
d) R/3 Applications
Ans: (A) ( Nikhil Raj )
*************************************************************************************************************
31. What is the first screen you see when executing the transaction of Smart Forms.
a) Form builder
b) Form painter
c) Table painter
d) Style builder
ANS: (A)
*************************************************************************************************************
32. What is also placeholder but comes with default code in enhancement framework?
a) Implicit Enhancements
b) New BADI
c) ENHANCEMENT-POINT
d) ENHANCEMENT-SECTION
Ans: (d) ( Bharani )

*************************************************************************************************************
33. In HANA, which among the following helps in parallel processing of the data and hence
use the underlying hardware to its full capacity
a) Single-Node, Single-Core CPUs

b) Multi-Node, Single-Core CPUs
c) Single-Node, Multi-Core CPUs
d) Multi-Node, Multi-Core CPUs
Ans : ( D) ( Bharani )
*************************************************************************************************************
34. What is the new feature introduced in
OPEN SQL in ABAP language > 7.4 upgrade feature
(Single Correct)
a) RIGHT JOIN
b) LEFT JOIN
c) LEFT OUTER JOIN
d) INNER JOIN
ANS: (D)
*************************************************************************************************************
35. What type is ‘X’ message?
a) Information
b) Exit
c) Error
d) Abend
ANS: (B)
*************************************************************************************************************
36. What all types of processing are available in function module?

(Multiple correct)
a) Normal
b) Remote-Enabled
c) Update
d) Synchronous
e) BAPI
ANS: A,B,C,E (Damayanti)

*************************************************************************************************************
37. In BDC program, while updating BDCDATA work area, it is mentioned like below. What is
(01) indicates?
Lw_bdcdata-fnam = ‘BDS_CURSOR’.
lw_bdcdata -fval = ‘ KNBK-BANK(01)’.
a) Sy-subrc
b) Step loop Line number
c) Loop index
d) Cursor index
Ans: B ( bharani )
*************************************************************************************************************
38. Predict the output of below source code.
lw_data-name = ‘Vimal’.
APPEND lw_data TO lt_data.
CLEAR lw_data.
lw_data-name = ‘Jisha’.
CLEAR lw_data.
lw_data -name = ‘Lekha’.
CLEAR lw_data.
DESCRIBE TABLE lt_data LINES lv_count.

WRITE lv_count.
a) 3
b) Syntax error
c) 4
d) 5
ANS(C) ( AMOD )
*************************************************************************************************************
39. Topic: ABAP Basics, Sub Topic: Module Pool
Instead of coding ‘SET PARAMETER ID’ statement in PAI module, we can set field
Attribute in the screen. Choose most appropriate option
a) SCREEN
b) OK_CODE
c) SPA
d) Special
e) None of the above
ANS(C) ( AMOD )
*************************************************************************************************************
40. Topic: ABAP Basics, Sub_Topic : Interactive Reports
What is the command to read the list at the cursor preposition? Choose most appropriate option
a) GET PARAMETER ID
b) GET CURSOR FIELD
c) GET PARAMETER FIELD
d) GET MEMORY FIELD
ANS(B) ( AMOD )
*************************************************************************************************************
41. Top down approach is appropriate for which HANA feature?
Choose two most appropriate options
(Multiple Correct)
a) CDS views
b) AMDP
c) Database procedure
d) Calculation view
Ans : A,B ( Bharani )

*************************************************************************************************************
42. How can you improve the performance when accessing a database table having large data
volume? Choose the most appropriate option
(Single correct)
a) Apply appropriate data class and size category

b) Switch database table to fully buffered
c) Define appropriate indexes for database table
d) Change the table type in dictionary
Ans(C) ( priti )
*************************************************************************************************************
43. Topic : ABAP Basics, Sub_Topic: Forms
In PC editor, texts can be entered in? Choose 3 most appropriate options
(Multiple correct)
a) Message class
b) Text element
c) Constants
d) Include Text
e) Literals
f) Text modules
ANS(B,D,F) ( AMOD )
*************************************************************************************************************
44. What type of data is G/L Accounts? (Single correct)
a) Pool data
b) Transaction data
c) Master data
d) Cluster data
e) None
ANS: C
*************************************************************************************************************
45. After approval of the requisition, what is created which has details of the items to be
purchased, quantity, price etc along with Vendor and shipping information/ address
(Single Correct)
a) Purchase order
b) Goods Receipt
c) Requisition
d) Invoice verification
Ans : A (Bharani)
*************************************************************************************************************
46. In a module pool program, in the screen there is an input box whose technical name is
CARRID. In the flow logic, there is a piece of code like below.
MODULE user_command_0100 INPUT.

IF carrid = ‘AA’
MESAGE ‘You have entered AA’ TYPE ‘I’.
ENDIF.
ENDMODULE.
But when we activate the main program, the error below is displayed.
Field ‘CARRID’ is unknown.
What can be the reason?
(Single Correct)
a) The variable should be declared ike carrid and not CARRID

b) Carrid is declared with wrong data type
c) The variable CARRID is not declared in top include declaration
d) Carrid is declared in PBO and not in PAI
Ans: C
*************************************************************************************************************
47. I have
Only one returning parameter
Only importing parameters
Exceptions are possible
Who am I?
(Single Correct)
a) Functional method
b) Static method
c) Instance method
d) Constructor
ANS: A ( Damayanti )
*************************************************************************************************************
48. From the following option, which are true about INITIALIZATION event in a program
1. Main purpose of this section is to calculate/populate default values for screen fields
2. The statements under this section are executed when the program is run directly
The statements in this section are executed when the program is t
3. riggered(called or submitted) by another program
4. The statements in this section are not executed when the program is run in
background/batch mode
a) 1 &2
b) 2 &3
c) 3&4
d) 1 2 &4
e) 2 3 &4
ANS (A)
*************************************************************************************************************
49. Which statement in CALL TRANSACTION will help to capture messages?
a) USING
b) MODE
c) UPDATE
d) MESSAGES
ANS (d)
*************************************************************************************************************
50. Which standard program can be used to schedule session processing in background?
a) RSBDCSUP
b) RSBDCSUT
c) RSBDCSUM
d) RSBDCSUB
ANS (D)
*************************************************************************************************************
51. What is true about use of batch input

1. Cannot be scheduled and submitted in the background
2. Can be processed automatically without human intervention
3. Can process large data volumes
4. Uses standard SAP transactions, just as if the data were entered manually
(Single Correct)
a) All are correct

b) 1, 2 & 3
c) 2 & 4
d) 2, 3 & 4
Ans : (D) ( Nikhil S)
*************************************************************************************************************
52. Which requires driver program and is client dependent?
(Single Correct)
a) Smartforms
b) SAPscript
c) Both
d) None
ANS(B) ( AMOD)
*************************************************************************************************************
53. State true or false: 1. A static constructor is always names as CLASS_CONSTRUCTOR
2. It gets executed with every new instance of the class.
Choose most appropriate option
(Single Correct)
a) 1. True 2. False
b) 1. False 2. True
c) 1. True 2. True
d) 1. False 2. False
ANS(A) (Damayanti)
*************************************************************************************************************
54. Topic: Module Pool Sub_topic: Menu painter
For which objects you need to use Function code in Menu painter?
(Multiple might be correct)
a) Menu items
b) Application and standard tool bar buttons
c) Function keys
Ans(A,B,C)
*************************************************************************************************************
55. Choose the right option about plants
(Single Correct)
a) One plant can be assigned to only one sales organization or multiple plants can be
assigned to one Sales org
b) One plant can be assigned to multiple sales organizations or multiple plants can be
assigned to multiple Sales org
c) One plant can be assigned to multiple sales organizations or multiple plants can be
d) Multiple plant can be assigned to multiple sales organizations or multiple plants can be
Ans : (A) ( BharanI )
*************************************************************************************************************
56. In Code-Pushdown technique
(Single Correct)
a) Processing in the database layer leads to better speed than processing in application
layer
b) Processing in the application layer leads to better speed than processing in database
layer
c) Processing in the presentation layer leads to better speed than processing in application
layer
d) Processing in the database layer leads to better speed than processing in presentation
layer
ANS (A) (PRITI)

*************************************************************************************************************
57. Match the following about transport request types
(1) Workbench Requests

(2) Customizing Requests
(3) Transport of Copies
(4) Relocation
(A) Used for copying between any two systems in a group. Objects do not change their
system owner, so the original system remains the same
(B) Used if development system of a complete package needs to be changed on a
permanent basis
(C) Any changes in Custom developed ( or workbench) objects are saved under this request
(D) Any changes in system configuration are saved under this
(Single Correct)
a) 1 - A
2-B
3-C
4-D
b) 1 - D
2-B
3-C
4-A
c) 1 - C
2-B
3-A
4-D
d) 1 - A
2-C
3-B
4-D
Ans(C) ( priti )
*************************************************************************************************************
58. Topic: ABAP Basics Sub_topic: Transport Management
Identify the statements that are false.
(Multiple Correct)
a) Requests must be released from the lowest hierarchy of the requests to the highest
b) Once the request is released the status of the request number is changed to released
c) Once released, the same transport number can again be used for modification
d) There are 5 different types of transport requests
e) When you want to change development system of a complete package on a permanent
basis use transport of copies
Ans(C,D,E) (PRITI )
*************************************************************************************************************
59. Topic: ABAP Sub_topic: Reports
In which of the following are the input values for the selection screen can be stored?
Choose the most appropriate option
(Single Value)
a) Text symbol
b) Variant
c) Attribute
d) Text Element
ANS: B (Queency)
*************************************************************************************************************
60. While creating smartforms, how many columns can be created in LINEtype? Choose the
most appropriate option
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 99
e) Any
ANS(E) (Damayanti)
*************************************************************************************************************
61. What is true about data element? Choose two most appropriate options
(Multiple Correct)
a) A data element describes the function of a domain in a particular context

b) We cannot create data element without a domain
c) A data element can be a key word in a screen, a column header in a table or a
documentation help
d) We can give value ranges in data element
ANS(A,C)
*************************************************************************************************************
62. What is a combination of fields from one or more related tables, but does not contain any
data
a) Pool table
b) View
c) Cluster table
d) Transparent table
ANS B (Bharani)
*************************************************************************************************************
63. A report program can be executed 1. Directly in SE38 or 2. Via a t-code
a) Only option 1 is correct

b) Only option 2 is correct
c) Both correct
d) None correct
Ans : C (Bharani)
*************************************************************************************************************
64. How to provide default values for screen fields?
a) Using PBO module and parameter ids

b) Using only PBO module
c) Using only Paramter ids
d) Using only PAI module
e) Using PAI module and parameter ids
ANS(A) not sure- PRITI (Had a check, its correct) - Nikhil Raj
*************************************************************************************************************
65. Choose the three methods to perform user-defined field checks. Choose 3 most appropriate
options
(Multiple Correct)
a) Issue error or warning message in PBO module

b) Issue error or warning message in PAI module
c) Issue error or warning message based on the outcome of SELECT statement in flow
logic
d) Use VALUES statement in flow logic to define the valid values
e) Use VALUES statement in the main program to define the valid values
ANS (B C D )
*************************************************************************************************************
66. What is true about CDS views creation
(Single Correct)
a) Only ABAP Development tools are required, thus no HANA database user
b) HANA database user is required
c) ABAP development tools are not enough
d) Both ABAP development tools and HANA database access is required
Ans : D ( Bharani )
*************************************************************************************************************
67. What all changes will you do to the below source code to improve it’s performance?
DATA : lt_sflight TYPE STANDARD TABLE OF sflight,

lw_sflight TYPE sflight.
SELECT * FROM sflight INTO TABLE lt_sflight.
LOOP AT lt_sflight INTO lw_sflight.

IF lw_sflight-carrid = ‘AA’.
WRITE : /lw_sflight-fldate, lw_sflight-seatsmax, lw_sflight-seatsocc.
ENDIF.
ENDLOOP.
(Multiple Correct)

b) Use WHERE clause in SELECT statement
c) Avoid using WRITE statement within LOOP statement
d) Avoid using INTO TABLE clause
e) Use TYPE SORTED or HASHED internal table
ANS(A B E) Not sure- (it is correct, had it checked)Damayanti
*************************************************************************************************************
68. Which exception class ensures maximum syntax check and program stability
(Single Correct)
a) CX_STATIC_CHECK
b) CX_NO_CHECK
c) CX_DYNAMIC_CHECK
d) CX_ROOT
Ans - (A) ( Bharani )

*************************************************************************************************************
69. What all changes will you do the below source code to improve it’s performance
SELECT * FROM flight INTO TABLE lt_sflight.
SELECT * FROM scarr INTO TABLE lt_scarr

FOR ALL ENTRIES IN lt_sflight
WHERE carrid = lt_sflight-carrid.
LOOP AT lt_scarr INTO lw_scarr.

WRITE:/ lw_scarr-carrid, lw_scarr-carrname.
ENDLOOP.
(Multiple may be correct)

b) Delete duplicates from LT_SFLIGHT before using in FOR ALL ENTRIES
c) Avoid WRITE statement within LOOP
d)
e) Avoid using INTO TABLE clause
f) Check LT_SFLIGHT is empty or not before using in FOR ALL ENTRIES
ANS- A,B,E (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
70. Which function module helps to output header information in ALV report
(Single Correct)
a) REUSE_ALV_HEADER_WRITE
b) REUSE_ALV_TITLE_WRITE
c) REUSE_ALV_COMMENTARY_WRITE
d) REUSE_ALV_HEADING_WRITE
ANS(C) (AMOD)
*************************************************************************************************************
71. Which processing mode in the session method display termination message?
(Multiple might be correct)
a) Display errors only

b) Foreground
c) Background
d) All
e) None
ANS- A,B (QUEENCY)

*************************************************************************************************************
72. What is true about table maintenance generator?
( 2 options correct)
a) It creates a program to maintain entries in table

b) Open the table in SE11 in change mode and navigate to Utilities -> Table maintenance
generator to generate the same
c) It creates a t-code to maintain entries in table
d) Table contents cannot be deleted using this
ANS- A,B (QUEENCY)

*************************************************************************************************************
73. When a table is read frequently and the data seldom changes. It is better to
(Single correct)
a) not to read the table

b) to buffer the table
c) to read once
d) to use internal table
e) to use work area
ANS- (B) (QUEENCY)

*************************************************************************************************************
74. Predict the output of the below source code.
Data: lv_string type string value ‘Advanced Business Application Programming’.
START-OF-SELECTION.
WRITE: lv_string+10(20)
a) usiness Application
b) Syntax error
c) Business Application
d) Business Applicatio
ANS: (A) ( amod )

*************************************************************************************************************
75. The below statement is not capturing any messages during transaction execution. How
to modify the statement to do the same?
CALL TRANSACTION ‘FD01’
USING it_bdcdata
MODE ‘N’
UPDATE ‘S’
a) Add the statement after CALL TRANSACTION MESSAGE ID sy-msgid TYPE
sy-msgfy NUMBER sy-msgno WITH sy-msgv1 sy-msgv2 sy-msgv3 sy-msgv4
b) Add messages within call transaction statement
c) Add the statement before call transaction message id sy-msgid type
sy-msgfy number sy-msgno with sy-msgv1 sy-msgv2 sy-msgv3 sy-msgv4
d) Add messages after call transaction statement( Multiple ticks)
ANS- B (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
76. Function module is used to read the input field for the BADI_SORTER
a) BADI_SORTER_LAYER_GET
b) BADI_SORTER_GET_LAYER
c) GET_BADI_SORTER_LAYER
d) BADI_SORTER_LAYER
e) NONE OF THE ABOVE
Ans - A) (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
77. What happens when LEAVE SCREEN is encountered. Choose most appropriate option
(Single Correct)
a) The system immediately terminates the current screen’s PAI event and goes to the
PBO event of the screen specified in NEXT SCREEN attribute.
b) The system immediately terminates the current screen’s PBO event and goes to the
PAI event of the screen specified in NEXT SCREEN attribute.
c) The system immediately terminates the current screen’s PBO event and goes to the
main calling screen.
d) Terminates the transaction.
e) None of the above.
ANS- A (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
78. Predict the output.
CLASS find_time DEFINITION.
PUBLIC SECTION.
METHODS: constructor IMPORTING im_time type syuzeit,time.
DATA: v_time TYPE syuzeit.
ENDCLASS.
CLASS find_time IMPLEMENTATION.
METHOD constructor.
V_time = im_time.
ENDMETHOD.
METHOD time.
WRITE v_time.
ENDMETHOD.
ENDCLASS.
START-OF-SELECTION.
DATA: lo_ref TYPE REF TO find_time.
CREATE OBJECT lo_ref.
lo-ref->constructor().
lo-ref->time().
a) Syntax error
b) It will print current system time
c) Runtime error
d) No output
ANS: A ( QUEENCY )
*************************************************************************************************************
79. From following options, which are true about performance tuning of a program.
1. WHERE clause should be limited with positive conditions.

2. Keep minimum usage of SELECT SINGLE.
3. If all primary key fields are not available to use in WHERE, use fields such that at
least one INDEX on DB will be used.
4. Make sure internal table used in FOR ALL ENTRIES is not empty.
a) 1 and 2
b) 2 and 3
c) 3 and 4
d) 1 2 and 4
e) 2 3 and 4
ANS: C ( Bharani )
*************************************************************************************************************
80. What are the check tables and value tables?
(Multiple Correct)
a) Check table will be at field level checking.

b) Value table will be at domain level checking
c) Value table will be at field level checking
d) Check table will be at domain level checking.
ANS: (a, b)
*************************************************************************************************************
81. What are presentation and application servers in SAP?
(Multiple Correct)
a) Application server is actually a program named Sapgui.exe. It is usually installed On a user’s

workstation.
b) Application server is a set of executables that collectively interpret the ABAP/4 Programs and
c) Presentation server is actually a program named Sapgui.exe. It is usually installed On a

user’s workstation.
d) Presentation server is a set of executables that collectively interpret the ABAP/4 Programs
and manage the input & output for them.
ANS : (b, c)
*************************************************************************************************************
82. .What is the difference between Synchronous and Asynchronous updates?
(Multiple Correct)
a) In synchronous processing, the program waits: control returns to the program only when the
task has been completed.
b) In asynchronous processing, the program does not wait: the system returns control after
merely logging the request for execution.
c) In asynchronous processing, the program waits: control returns to the program only when the
d) In synchronous processing, the program does not wait: the system returns control after
merely logging the request for execution.
ANS : (a , b)
*************************************************************************************************************
83. What are the main events an interactive report has?
(Multiple Correct)
a) Top-of-page during line selection.

b) At line-selection.
c) At user-command.
d) AT New
ANS : (a , b, c)
*************************************************************************************************************
Transaction?
a) Type groups
b) Search help
c) Lock objects
d) Function groups
ANS : D
*************************************************************************************************************
85. Consider the source code below. Here after the function module call, sy-subrc values is
showing 4.
What might be the reason?
DATA : lv_result TYPE i.

CALL FUNCTION ‘ZCALCULATOR10’
EXPORTING
i_number1 = 20
i_number2 = 50
IMPORTING
i_result = lv_result
EXCEPTIONS
division_by_zero = 1
invalid_number = 2
over_flow =3
OTHERS =4.
IF sy-subrc <> 0
MESSAGE ‘Exception occurred’ TYPE ‘E’.
ELSE.
WRITE lv_result.
ENDIF.
(Single Correct)
a) Invalid Number Exception

b) Division by zero exception
c) Unknown exception occurred
d) Over flow exception
e) Sy-subrc can’t hold value 4, hence the statement is incorrect
ANS : (C)
*************************************************************************************************************
86. Predict the output of the given source code.
CLASS calculator DEFINITION ABSTRACT.

PUBLIC SECTION.
METHODS : add ABSTRACT ,
prod .
DATA: result TYPE i.
ENDCLASS.
CLASS calculator IMPLEMENTATION.

METHOD prod.
result = 5*5.
WRITE 25.
ENDMETHOD.
ENDCLASS.
START-OF-SELECTION.
DATA : lo_ref TYPE REF TO calculator.
CREATE OBJECT lo_ref.
lo_ref > prod().
(Single Correct)
a) 25
b) Runtime error
c) Syntax error - Instances of the abstract class cannot be generated
d) Syntax error - Abstract method ADD is not implemented
e) Syntax error - Subclass is not implemented
ANS: C (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
87. In the flow logic of the screen, there is a statement like below. What will this do?
PROCESS AFTER INPUT.

FIELD carrid MODULE validate ON REQUEST.
a) Module “validate” is executed only when the value in field carrid is not initial value
applicable for its type
b) Module “validate” will be executed only if value for XYZ field changes to another value
c) Syntax error
d) Module “Validate” will not be executed
ANS : B
*************************************************************************************************************
88. How to address static attributes of class within calling program?
a) <classname>=><class_attribute>
b) <instance>-><instance_attribute>
c) <instance>-<instance_attribute>
d) <instance>?<instance_attribute>
ANS: A (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
89. Which is the option provided explicitly by SAP to replace a block of SAP code with customer
code
(Single Correct)
a) BADI
b) Enhancement Point
c) Enhancement Section
d) Exits
ANS: C ( Bharani )
*************************************************************************************************************
90. Which statement is true about function module calls of BDC session method?
1. When BDC_OPEN_GROUP is used, it is mandatory to close session using

BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
2. Even if BDC_CLOSE_GROUP is not used, we can process the session in SM35
3. BDC_OPEN_GROUP is not mandatory, only BDC_INSERT is required
4. BDC_INSERT requires data in BDCDATA format
5. BDC_INSERT will capture messages occurred during dialog processing
a) All
b) None
c) 1 & 4
d) 2 4 & 5
e) 3 & 4
ANS: C-
*************************************************************************************************************
91. Which is the new functionality supported on OPEN SQL in JOIN options in ABAP
perspective?
Choose the most appropriate option
(Single Correct)
a) LEFT OUTER JOIN

b) INNER JOIN
c) RIGHT OUTER JOIN
d) ALL
ANS: (B) (Damayanti)

*************************************************************************************************************
92. The below statement is not capturing any messages during transaction execution. How to
Modify the statement to do the same?
CALL TRANSACTION ‘FD01’

USING lt_bdcdata
MODE ‘N’
UPDATE ‘S’
(Single Option)
a) Add the statement after CALL TRANSACTION, MESSAGE ID sy-msgid TYPE

sy-msgty NUMBER sy-msgno WITH sy-msgv1 sy-msgv 2 sy-msgv3 sy-msgv4
b) Add MESSAGES within CALL TRANSACTION statement
c) Add the statement before CALL TRANSACTION, MESSAGE ID sy-msgid TYPE
sy-msgty NUMBER sy-msgno WITH sy-msgv1 sy-msgv2 sy-msgv3 sy-msgv4
d) Add MESSAGES after CALL TRANSACTION statement
ANS: B
*************************************************************************************************************
94. Which keyword helps as marker for AMDP method
a) FOR HDB
b) LANGUAGE
c) READ-ONLY
d) BY DATABASE PROCEDURE
ANS: D (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
95. From following options, which are true about how to find a BADI
1. Search in program by keyword CL_EXITHANDLER

2. Debugging using class CL_EXITHANDLER
3. Search CALL CUSTOMER-FUNCTION
4. Using global search transactions and search in SPRO
5. Using t-code SMOD
(Single Correct)
a) All are correct

b) None
c) 1, 2 & 3
d) 1, 2 & 4
e) 2, 3 & 4
ANS: D (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
96. Predict the output of the below source code
TYPES : BEGIN OF ty_data.

name TYPE char10,
age TYPE char2,
END OF ty_data.
TYPES : tt_data TYPE STANDARD TABLE OF ty_data WITH DEFAULT KEY.
START-OF-SELECTION.
data(lt) = new tt_data( ( name = ‘Neena’ age = ‘30’ )
( name = ‘Sarath’ age = ‘29’ )
( name = ‘Rani’ age = ‘31’ ) ).
cl_demo_output=>display_data( lt->*).
a) LT->*
NAME AGE
Neena 30
b) LT->*
NAME AGE
Neena 30
Sarath 29
Rani 31
c) Syntax error
d) Runtime error
ANS: B
*************************************************************************************************************
97. When you create a lock object system automatically
(Single Correct)
a) Locks objects
b) Lock table fields
c) Create two function module
d) Create two lock method
ANS: C (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
98. Match the following on task type in transport request
1) Development/Correction
2) Repair
3) Unclassified
A. All custom objects or workbench objects are saved under development/correction task
B. Changes in SAP standard objects using SNOTES are always saved under correction
tasks
C. When a new task is created, it always gets created with type unclassified
a) 1 - A
2-C
3-B
b) 1 - C
2-B
3-A
c) 1 - A
2-B
3-C
d) 1 - C
2-A
3-B
ANS: C (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
99. Topic : ABAP Reports , Sub_topic: Background Jobs
If a job has been created but has not been released yet. What is the state of this job now?
(Single Correct)
a) Ready
b) Active
c) Cancelled
d) Scheduled
ANS: D (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
100. Predict the output:
CLASS find_time DEFINITION

PUBLIC SECTION.
METHODS: time.
ENDCLASS.
CLASS find_time IMPLEMENTATION.
METHOD time.
WRITE : ‘This is parent class:’, sy-uzeit.
SKIP.
ENDMETHOD.
ENDCLASS.
CLASS sub_cal DEFINTION INHERITING FROM find_time.

PUBLIC SECTION.
METHODS : time REDEFINITION..
ENDCLASS.
CLASS sub_cal IMPLEMENTATION.
METHOD time.
super->time( ).
WRITE : ‘This is sub class:’, sy-uzeit.
ENDMETHOD.
ENDCLASS.
START-OF-SELECTION.
DATA : lo_ref TYPE REF TO sub_cal.
CREATE OBJECTS lo_ref.
lo_ref->time( ).
(Single Correct)
a) This is parent class: 10 44 10

b) This is parent class: 10 44 10
This is sub class: 10 44 10

c) This is sub class: 10 44 10
d) No output
e) Syntax error
ANS: E
*************************************************************************************************************
101. How to create static attributes of a class?
(Single Correct)
a) DATA
b) CLASS-DATA
c) STATIC
d) TYPES
ANS: (B) (Damayanti)
*************************************************************************************************************
102. Which event will be executed before the screen is displayed to the user
(Single Correct)
a) PAI
b) POV
c) PBO
d) POH
ANS: (C) (Damayanti)

*************************************************************************************************************
103. What is DYNPRO in BDCDATA structure?
a) Screen number
b) Program name
c) Field name
d) Field value
ANS: (A) (Damayanti)

*************************************************************************************************************
104. A report can be executed 1. Directly in SE38 or 2. Vai a t-code
a) Only 1 is true
b) Only 2 is true
c) Both true
d) Bothe false
ANS: C
*************************************************************************************************************
105. Statement ‘Call screen 200’ does
a) Start the PAI processing of screen 200

b) Jump to screen 200 without coming back
c) Temporarily branch to screen 200
d) Exit screen 200
ANS: C
*************************************************************************************************************
106. Which of the following is True for BDC program
a) Internal table of students BDCTAB needs to be filled

b) Internal table of structure BDCTABLE needs to be used
c) Internal table of structure BDCDATA needs to be filled
d) None of the options are correct
ANS: C
*************************************************************************************************************
107. The principle of hiding information in object oriented ABAP is called
a) Encapsulation
b) Abstraction
c) Inheritance
d) Polymorphism
ANS: A (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
108. Which of the following is not a mandatory attribute in a screen
a) Description
b) Next screen
c) Screen type
ANS: B (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
109. What is invalid attribute of a domain
a) Type
b) Fixed values
c) Length
d) Header
ANS: D (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
110. Program line “Class-data: method1 type I’ declares
(Single Correct)
a) Instance Method
b) Static method
c) Instance attribute
d) Static attribute
ANS: D (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
111. Which is not a type of transport
(Single Correct)
a) Development
b) Workbench
c) Customizing
d) Relocation
ANS: A (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
112. BADI can be implemented in
(Single Correct)
a) SE16
b) SE18
c) SE19
d) SE21
ANS: C (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
113. Which data type cannot be used to define parameters?
a) N
b) C
c) F
d) P
ANS: C (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
114. What would be the output of the following code
DO.
Write:/1 ‘E equals MC squared.’.
ENDDO.
a) Output of ‘E equals MC squared.’ on a new line one time

b) An endless loop that results in an abend error
c) Output of ‘E equals MC squared.’ on a new line many times
d) A loop that will end when the user presses ESC
ANS: B (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
a) TOP-OF-PAGE
b) END-OF-SELECTION
c) NEW-PAGE
d) END-OF-PAGE
ANS: D (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
116. A DO loop increments the system field
a) SY-LOOPI
b) SY-TABIX
c) SY-LSIND
d) SY-INDEX
ANS: D
*************************************************************************************************************
117. SAP tool used for checking ABAP code is called
a) Code checker
b) ABAP interpreter
c) Code inspector
d) Quality checker
Ans - C
*************************************************************************************************************
118. Page headers for a secondary/details list can be coded in the event
a) GET
b) INITIALIZATION
c) TOP-OF-PAGE DURING LINE-SELECTION
d) NEW-PAGE
ANS: C (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
119. How many lists can exist in parallel in an interactive reporting?
a) 20
b) 18
c) 19
d) 21
Ans - D)
*************************************************************************************************************
122. To select one record for a matching primary key, use
a) SINGLE
b) SELECT INTO
c) SELECT SINGLE
d) SELECT ENTRY
Ans - C (QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
a) SELECT-OPTIONS
b) PARAMETERS
c) RANGES
d) DATA
Ans - B
*************************************************************************************************************
124. Table painter can be used to display text and data in table format. Which option can be
using table painter for the same.choose most appropriate option.
a) TEXT
b) TEMPLATE
c) BOTH OPTION A AND B
d) NONE
ANS: B
*************************************************************************************************************
125. Which global classes needed to be instantiated in order to achieve alv oops.
(CHOOSE TWO MOST APPROPRIATE OPTIONS)
a) CL_GUI_CUSTOM_GRID
b) CL_GUI_CUSTOM_Container
c) SET_TABLE_FOR_FIRST_DISPLAY
d) CL_GUI_ALV_GRID
e) CL_GUI_ALV_Container
ANS: B , D
*************************************************************************************************************
126. Identify the module name in which these tables are used? VBAK,VBAP,LIPS,VBFA
a) MM
b) FI
c) SD
d) WM
ANS: C
*************************************************************************************************************
127. WHAT ARE THE TWO DIFFERENT WAYS TO ADD FIELDS TO SAP STANDARD
TABLES.
CHOOSE TWO MOST appropriate
a) CUSTOMIZING MODE
b) CHANGE MODE IN SE11
c) TABLE MAINTANENCE OVERVIEW
d) APPEND STRUCTURE
ANS- A AND D
*************************************************************************************************************
128. IN CALL TRANSACTION METHOD WHICH OPTION SHOULD BE USED IN MODE TO
DISPLAY ALL?
a) A
b) E
c) S
d) N
ANS: A
******************************************************************************************************** *****
129. MESSAGE SERVER IS A PART OF WHICH LAYER IN SAP.
a) DATABASE LAYER
b) APPLICATION LAYER
c) PRESENTATION LAYER
d) NONE
ANS: B (Damayanti)
*************************************************************************************************************
130. WHAT ARE THE TRANSACTION CODE ASSOCIATED WITH CUSTOMER EXISTS?
CHOOSE 2 MOST
a) SE18
b) SE19
c) SMOD
d) CMOD
ANS : C,D ( Bharani )

*************************************************************************************************************
131. Topic : Module Pool, Sub Topic: Screen Painting
WHAT HAPPENS WHEN YOU USE THE COMMAND LEAVE TO LIST PROCESSING AND
RETURN TO SCREEN 0.
a) END THE CURRENT SCREEN SEQUENCE AND RETURN TO THE POINT WHERE IT
WAS ORIGINALLY CALLED
b) END THE SCREEN SEQUENCE AND END THE TRANSACTION
c) END THE CURRENT SCREEN AND GO TO NEXT SCREEN
d) END THE CURRENT SCREEN AND GO TO NEXT SCREEN CONTROL IN NEXT
SCREEN
Ans: (A)
*************************************************************************************************************
132. USER MESSAGES CREATED WITH "MESSAGES" STATEMENT ARE STORED IN

WHICH TABLE?
CHOOSE MOST APPROPRIATE OPTIONS?
a) T100D
b) T001
c) T100
d) T001D
ANS: (C)
*************************************************************************************************************
133. HOW DO YOU ENTER SUBSCREEN IN MAIN SCREEN?
a) USE SET SUBSCREEN IN THE FLOW LOGIC OF THE MAIN SCREEN

b) USE CALL SUBSCREEN IN THE FLOW LOGIC OF THE MAIN SCREEN
c) USE CALL SCREEN IN THE FLOW LOGIC OF THE MAIN SCREEN
d) USE CALL SUBSCREEN IN THE FLOW LOGIC OF THE SUBSCREEN
ANS: (B)
*************************************************************************************************************
134. WITH WHICH APPROACH CDS VIEWS ARE DESIGNED?

CHOOSE MOST APPROPRIATE OPTIONS
a) BOTTOM UP APPROACH
b) TOP DOWN APPROACH
c) BOTH
d) NONE
ANS: (B)
*************************************************************************************************************
135. CAN YOU HAVE MULTI LEVEL INHERITANCE IN OOP ABAP
a) YES
b) NO
ANS (A)
*************************************************************************************************************
136. IS THE SPECIAL METHOD THAT IS CALLED BY THE RUNTIME SYSTEM AS

SOON AS THE OBJECT HAS BEEN GENERATED IN MEMORY
a) FUNCTIONAL METHOD
b) CONSTRUCTOR METHOD
c) ABSTRACT METHOD
d) STATIC METHOD
e) INSTANCE METHOD
ANS (B)
*************************************************************************************************************
137. WHAT ARE THE CHARACTERISTICS OF ABSTRACT CLASS?
CHOOSE 2
a) ABSTRACT METHODS CANNOT BE IMPLEMENTED IN SAME CLASS

b) ABSTRACT CLASS CONTAINS ONLY ABSTRACT METHODS
c) BOTH INSTANCE AND STATIC METHODS CAN BE DEFINED AS ABSTRACT
METHODS
d) ABSTRACT CLASS CONTAIN BOTH DEFINITION AND IMPLEMENTATION
ANS- A,D (DAMAYANTI, , QUEENCY)
*************************************************************************************************************
138. WHAT HAPPENS WHEN I DOUBLE CLICK ON 20TH LIST(SY-LSIND = 20) IN
INTERACTIVE PROGRAMMING ?
a) RUN TIME ERROR

b) 20 SECONDARY LIST NOT POSSIBLE
c) MESSAGE TYPE E TOO MANY NESTED SUBSCREEN LISTS
d) NEXT LIST OPPENS
ANS (A)
*************************************************************************************************************
139. WHEN WILL TOP OF PAGE EVENT BE EXECUTED?
a) AFTER AT SELECTION SCREEN EVENT

b) AFTER THE FIRST WRITE STATEMENT
c) AFTER FIRST SELECT STATMENT
d) AFTER END OF SELECTION EVENT
ANS (A)
*************************************************************************************************************
140. WHILE CALLING BDC_INSERT FUNCTION MODULE WHAT ARE THE MANDATORY
PARAMETERS THAT SHOULD BE PASSED
a) ONLY T-CODE
b) ONLY BDC TABLE NAME
c) T-CODE AND BDC TABLE NAME
d) T-CODE,BDC TABLE NAME AND FIELD NAME
ANS (C) (Damayanti)

*************************************************************************************************************
141. WHEN CREATING A TABLE IN SE11,WHAT ARE TYPES OF DELIVERY CLASSES
ARE AVAILABLE
a) MASTER DATA,TRANSACTION DATA ,SYSTEM DATA ,LOGISTICS DATA

b) MASTER DATA,TRANSACTION DATA ,USER DATA LOGISTICS DATA
c) MASTER DATA,TRANSACTION DATA, SYSTEM DATA ,CONTROL DATA
d) MASTER DATA,TRANSACTION DATA, SYSTEM DATA,CONFIGURATION DATA
ANS (D) (Damayanti)
*************************************************************************************************************
142. What is true about append structure?
a) It will add fields in the table at the end

b) It is assigned to just one table
c) It is used to add custom fields in SAP tables and Custom tables
d) It can be assigned to multiple tables
e) It is used to add custom fields only in custom tables
ANS (A B C)
*************************************************************************************************************
143. Topic: ABAP Basics Sub_topic: Enhancements
Which among the following can have multiple implementations?
Choose the most appropriate options.
(Multiple Correct)
a) User Exits
b) Customer Exits
c) BADI
d) Enhancements
ANS (C)
*************************************************************************************************************
144. Topic: ABAP, Sub_topic: Performance Analysis
Results of run time analysis (SE30) is used to identify.
Choose the most appropriate option.
(Single Correct)
a) Loading activities
b) Database access
c) (rest options not clear)
-> Database access (probably)

( ABAP Runtime Analysis only to look for performance bottlenecks and don’t know that
ABAP Trace is the only tool with which you can trace the execution flow of an ABAP program
at the statement level. )
*************************************************************************************************************
145. Which event gets triggered when user press ‘Enter’ in the selection screen
a) INITIALIZATION
b) START-OF-SELECTION
c) AT SELECTION-SCREEN
d) ON SELECTION-SCREEN
Ans: ( B )
*************************************************************************************************************
146. What is the output of the below source code if the internal table LT_DATA have following
values in the same order given
========================
|Jisha |30 |
|Diya |30 |
|Geenu |29 |
*---SY-INDEX have value 0 currently

* -----Source code snippet
READ TABLE lt_data INTO lw_data WITH KEY name = ‘Diya’.

IF sy-subrc = 0.
WRITE sy-index.
ENDIF.
(Single Correct)
a) 2
b) 1
c) 0
d) 30
e) Syntax error
ANS: ( C )
*************************************************************************************************************
147. Table is buffered means, data is available in
Ans: Application Server

*************************************************************************************************************
148. Value range is specified in
Ans: Domain
*************************************************************************************************************
149. What option in SE11 should be selected to create ‘Structure’
Ans: Data Type

*************************************************************************************************************
150. What is true about table maintenance generator? Choose two most appropriate option
Ans: a) It creates a program to maintain entries in a table

b) Open the table in SE11 in change mode and navigate to utilities> table
maintainence generator to generate the same
*************************************************************************************************************
151. What is the the Top of hierarchy to divide financial accounts
Ans: Company Code

*************************************************************************************************************
152. Within ABAP what is used to access application data in a database,independent of the
corresponding RDBMS
Ans: Open SQL

*************************************************************************************************************
153. What type of data is purchase order
Ans: Transaction data

*************************************************************************************************************
154. What is true about AMDP method
Ans: No returning parameter

*************************************************************************************************************
155. CDS view can be created on top of which Database?
Ans: Oracle, HANA, Siebel, IBM

*************************************************************************************************************
156. Which server does text analysis in HANA?Choose most appropriate
Ans: Preprocessor server

*************************************************************************************************************
157. An architect has to estimate the size of HANA which is called HANA sizing.
Ans: ABAP REPORT, DBScripts, Quickie

*************************************************************************************************************
158. How to print year from SY-DATUM in the output?
Ans: WRITE:sy-datum(4)
*************************************************************************************************************
159. What might be the reason?
DATA:lv_result TYPE i
Ans: Unknown exception occured

********************************************************************************************************* ****
160. Which among the following is not a session status in SM35
Ans: Error
*************************************************************************************************************
161. Enhancement section and points are part of
Ans: Explicit Enhancement (Damayanti)

*************************************************************************************************************
162. Customer Exits are Forms and are called by SAP standard program using PERFORM
Ans: False
*************************************************************************************************************
163. What permits you to control the implementation and make it reliable on specific criteria .
Ans: Exit
*************************************************************************************************************
164. What is true about user exits
Ans: a) Are basically designed for SD module

b) Doesn’t have any clarification
c) Considered modification because we are modifying technical objects
*************************************************************************************************************
165. What are true about smartforms
Ans: a) Client independent

c) graphics can be included as background form elements
*************************************************************************************************************
166. 1.Text Elements A.For reusing texts

2. Text Modules B.for using SAPscript texts
3. Include texts C.Locally in form
Ans: 1C 2A 3B
*************************************************************************************************************
167. What will happen when error is generated from module select_listing?
PROCESS AFTER INPUT

CHAIN
FIELD:YMOVIE-AAYEAR
YMOVIE-CATEGORY
MODULE SELECT_LISTING.
ENDCHAIN.
Ans: The Field statements will leave both the YMOVIE-AYEAR and YMOVIE-
CATEGORY fields editable
*************************************************************************************************************
168. How to instantiate object in program
Ans: CREATE Object

*************************************************************************************************************
169. How many main windows can we create in a smartform
Ans: One
*************************************************************************************************************
170. We can change the data in Adobe form.True or false
Ans: True
*************************************************************************************************************
171. WHAT IS THE COMMAND TO READ THE LINE AT CURSOR POSITION

a) GET PARAMETER ID
b) GET CURSOR FIELD
c) GET PARAMETER FIELD
d) GET MEMORY FIELD
Ans: ( B )
*************************************************************************************************************
172. The smallest unit of work in SAP system is called as
Ans: Dialog Step

*************************************************************************************************************
173. What does MM stand for in SAP?
Ans: Material Management

*************************************************************************************************************
174. Batch input scheduling can be done using a standard SAP program
Ans : RSBDCSUB ( Nikhil Raj )

*************************************************************************************************************
175. Which among the following modules doesn’t belong to BDC session method?
Ans: BDC_OPEN_GROUP
BDC_INSERT
BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
** These three function modules are USED, apart from these three if any other option is
there then that will be the answer
*************************************************************************************************************
176. How to assign specific search help to fields in selection screen
Ans: MatchCode
*************************************************************************************************************
Data : lv_int
Choose the appropriate option
a) N
b) C
c) I
d) P
Ans: (B)
*************************************************************************************************************
178. Which are the events in flow logic?
a) PAI
b) PBO
c) POH
d) POV
Ans: (A, B,c,d)

*************************************************************************************************************
179. Which SAP tool(s) is/are are used for interfacing between SAP to SAP/Non-SAP Systems?
a) IDOC
b) Rfc
c) ABAP Proxy
d) All of the above
Ans: (d)
*************************************************************************************************************
180. What is/are the t-code(s) related to BADI
a) SE17
b) SE16
c) SE19
d) SE18
Ans: ( C, D )
*************************************************************************************************************
181. Which perspectives can you see after installing ADT on top of HANA studio?
a) Debug perspective
b) HANA Perspective
c) BW Modeling
d) ABAP Perspective
Ans: (A, B,C, D)

*************************************************************************************************************
182. Which are types of “logical unit of work” in SAP?
a) SAP LUW
b) Client LUW
c) ABAP LUW
d) Database LUW
Ans: (A, D)
*************************************************************************************************************
183. In module program,when the data in a screen input is entered there is a error:
"Entry does not exist"
What is the type of automatic check is applied
1.Field format check
2.Required field check
3.valid value check
4.foreighn key check
Ans: (C)
184.How to implement a local class?
a.CLASS cl_main DEFINATION

ENDCLASS.
CLASS cl_main IMPLEMENTATION
ENDCLASS.
b.CLASS cl_main DEFINATION

ENDCLASS.
c.CLASS cl_main IMPLEMENTATION.

ENDCLASS.
d. CLASS cl_main IMPLEMENTATION.

ENDCLASS.
CLASS cl_main DEFINATION
ENDCLASS.
e.CLASS cl_main.
ENDCLASS.
CLASS cl_main IMPLEMENTATION.
ENDCLASS.
Ans: (C)
185.Which of the following is not a view?

a.Database View
b.Projection view
c.Maintainence View
d.Internal table view
e.Help View
Ans: (D)
*************************************************************************************************************
186.What message is displayed at the bottom of the current screen where the user must make
changes to the values on the current screen.
After pressing the ‘’Enter” key on the current key on the current screen,the user will be taken to the
next screen if appropriate correction were made.
a.Absent
b.Warning
c.Success
d.Error
e.Exit
Ans: (B)
187.The below source code is not giving any output.There are no syntax errors as well.
Choose the correct way of writing it to the output.
DATA:lv_fmname TYPE rs38l_fname,

Lw_mara type mara.
SELECT SINGLE * FROM Mara INTO lw_mara WHERE matnr=”0000000000000000058”.
CALL FUNCTION lv_fmname

EXPORTING
i_mara=lw_mara.

EXPORTING
Formname=”ZDEMO1”
INPORTING
fm_name=lv_fmname
ANS: a.DATA:lv_fmname TYPE rs38I_fmname,

lw_mara TYPE mara.
SELECT SINGLE * FROM mara INTO lw_mara WHERE
matnr=”000000000000000058”.
EXPORTING
Formname=”ZDEMO1”
IMPORTING
fm_name=lv_fmname.
CALL FUNCTION “lv_fmname”
EXPORTING
i_mara=lw_mara.
MCQ-SAP ABAP
1.True about Table maintenance generator.
 It creates a program to maintain entries in table

 Open the table in se11 in changes mode and navigate to utilities->table maintenance generator
to generate the same.
2.within ABAP, what is used to access application data in the database, independent of the
corresponding RDBMS?
 Open SQL
3.AMDP is created in which layer?
 ABAP layer
4.Which function modules can be used to generate jobs?
 Job_open, job_close, job_submit
5.how to find BADI?
 Search in program by keyword CL_EXITHANDLER

 Debugging using class CL_EXITHANDLER
 Using global search transactions and search in SPRO
 Search call customer-function
 Using t-code SMOD
6.What message is displayed at the bottom of the next screen, therefore, the user cannot make any
changes to the values on the current screen.
 Abend
7.What message is displayed at the bottom of the current screen where the user must make changes to
the values on the current program. After accessing the ‘ENTER’ key on the current screen, the user will
be taken to next screen only if appropriate corrections made?
 Warning
8.A static constructor is always named as CLASS_CONSTRUCTOR .
It gets executed with every new instance of the class.
 1st is true 2nd is false
9.HOW TO IMPROVE THE PERFORMANCE WHEN ACCESSING A DATABASE TABLE HAVING LARGE DATA VOLUME ?
11. output Q……
 LT->*
Name Age
Neena 30
Sarath 29
Nani 31
12.which server does text analysis in HANA?
 Pre-processor Server
13.when a table is read frequently and the data seldom changes. It is better to
 To buffer the table
14.In hana which among the following helps in parallel processing of the data and hence use the
underlying hardware to its full capacity?
 Multi-nodes, multi-core CPUs
15.cds output Q
 SQL view name ZCDS_DEMO_13 and DDL view name ZCDS_DEMO_13 cannot be identical
16.DYNPRO in bdcdata?
 Screen Number
17.Which processing mode in session message display termination message?
 Display errors only
18.A Pseudocode , sy-subrc values is showing 4?
 Unknown exception occurred
19.Options can be utilized to import data using LSMW?
 Direct input
 Batch input
 BAPI
 Idoc
20.An architect has to eliminate the size of HANA which is called as HANA sizing. HANA sizing done using
tools?
 ABAP reports
 DB scripts
 Quickie Tool
21.True about Use of batch input.
 Can be processed automatically without human intervention

 Can process large amount of data
 Uses std SAP transactions, just as if the data were entered manually.
22.CDS views created on top of which database?
 All databases- oracle, HANA, Seibel, IBM
23.True about performance tuning.
 If primary key fields are not available to use in where, use fields such that atleast one index on
DB will be used.
 Make sure internal table used in FOR ALL ENTRIES is not empty.
24.Topic-ABAP subtopic-Enhancements
Customer EXITS and FORMS are called by SAP std program using PERFORM?
 False (only forms is called by performs)
25.True about user exits.
 Are basically designed for module SD

 Doesn’t have any classification
 Considered modification, because we are modifying technical objects in SAP namespace
26.What requires driver program and is client dependent?
 SAPscript
27.WHAT PERMITS YOU TO CONTROL THE IMPLEMENTATION AND MAKE IT RELIABLE ON SPECIFIC CRITERIA ( E.G.-
ON A SPECIFIC C OUNTRY VALUE .)
 BADI
28.Topic: ABAP Sub-Topic: Forms
While creating table in smart forms, how many columns can be created in LINEtype?
 Any
29.True about Smartforms?
 You can write our own ABAP statements in the Smartforms as well.
 Graphics can be included as background or as form elements.
 Client independent
30.Choose the three nodes which will be there by default when you create smartforms newly?
 Form attributes
 Form interface
 Global definition
31.Topic : ABAP basics Sub-topic: Module Pool
What happens when LEAVE SCREEN is encountered? Choose most appropriate option.
 The system immediately terminates the current screens PAI event and goes to the PBO event of
the screen specified in NEXT SCREEN attributes.
32.Match the following about text node in smartform.
 Text elements- locally in form

 Text modules- for reusing text
 Include texts- for including SAPscript texts
33. PROCESS AFTER INPUT
CHAIN
FIELD: YMOVIE-AAYEAR,
YMOVIE-CATEGORY,
MODULE SELECT_LISTING.
ENDCHAIN.
What will happen when error is generated from module select_listing?
 The FIELD statements will leave both the YMOVIE-AAYEAR and YMOVIE-CATEGORY fields
editable
34.WHICH EVENT WILL BE EXECUTED BEFORE THE SCREEN IS DISPLAYED TO THE USER?
 PBO
35.I have, Only one returning parameter, only importing parameter, Exceptions are possible. Who am i?
 Functional method
36.Which global classes needs to be instantiated in order to achieve ALV OOPs?

 CL_GUI_CUSTOM_CONTAINER
 CL_GUI_ALV_GRID
37.In module program screen, there is an input field INPUT of type Char. In the flow logic, VALUES
statement is used like below.
FIELD input vaues (‘AA’, ‘AB’, ‘LH’)
What exactly does this statement do during execution?
 It will restrict the user to enter only ‘AA’, ‘AB’, or ‘LH’.
 It will add F4 help values to input having only ‘AA’ , ’AB’ and ‘LH’.
 It will give error message if user is not entering ‘AA’,’AB’ or ‘LH’
38.How to create static attributes in a class?
 Class-data
39.what changes will you do to the below source code to improve?
Select*from sflight into table lt_sflight.
Select*from scar into table lt_scarr
For all entries in lt_sflight
Where carrid = it_sflight-carrid.
Loop at lt_scarr into lw_scarr.
Write: / lw_scarr-carrid, lw_scarr-carrname.
Endloop.
 Avoid using select *
 Delete duplicates from lt_sflight before using in for all entries
 Check lt_sflight is empty or not before using in for all entries
40. ABAP: Basics Sub-topic: Background jobs

If a job has been created but has not been released yet. What is the state of this job now?
 Scheduled
41.Match the following.
 Developemet correction- All custom objects or workbench objects are saved under
development / correction task.
 Repair- changes in sap standard objects using SNOTES are always saved under correction tasks
 Unclassified-When a new task is created, it always gets created with type unclassified.
42.match the following.

 Main window- printing continuous o/p
 Secondary window- printing fixed length o/p
 Final window- contents printed at last
 Copies- to make copies of original pages
43.How to provide default values to screen fields?

 Using PBO module and Parameter ids
44.How to instantiate object in program
 CREATE Object <object_name>
45.predict the output of oops one(a long code, only answer)

 Syntax erroe- Instances of the abstract class cannot be generated
46.Topic: ABAP Sub-topic: Reports

Data:begin of itab occurs 0,
Value type I,
End of itab.
Itab-value = 1.
Append itab.
Itab-value = 2.
Append itab.
Refresh itab.
Write:/1 itab-vale .
 2
47.Value range is specified in

 Domain
48.When you create a lock object system automatically?
 Create 2 function module-Enqueue and Dequeue
49.What is a combination of fields from one or more related tables, but doesnot contain any data?
 View
50.In sales and distribution, division
 Groups material and services
51.What type of data is purchase order?

 Transaction data
52.What type of data is G/L Accounts?
 Master data
53. What option in SE11 should be selected to create ‘Structure’
 Data Type
54.Which among the following guarantees the integration between all of the application modules and
are platform independent?
 R/3 BASIS system
55.What is the the Top of hierarchy to divide financial accounts
 Company Code
56.how to print year in sy-datum?
 Write sy-datum(4)
57.Performance tuning
 Donot use joins on cluster tables like BSEG
 Never nest logic within a Select statement.
58.How many main windows can we create in a smartform
 One
59.All types of processing available in Function modules?
 Normal
 Remote-Enabled
 Update
60.A structure is created and need the same to be added in multiple tables.
 Include, append
61.Enhancement section and points are part of
 Explicit Enhancements
62.what can have multiple implementation and multiple customers can use them simultaneously.
 BADI
63.New functionality supported on OPEN SQL in JOIN options in ABAP perspective?
 Right outer join
64.Topic: Module pool Sub_topic: Tabstrips
 It allows user to navigate between sub screen
 Tabstrips screen may change with or without the application server
 Subscreen allows to create more dynamic user interfaces
65.Topic:ABAP Basics sub_topic: Module pool
Instead of coding ‘SET PARAMETER ID’ statement in PAI module, we can set what field attribute in
screen?
 SPA
66.What is type ‘X’ message?
 Exit
67.Which method updates SAP db tables directly via SAP open SQL?
 ALL- BDC, CALL TRANSACTION , DIRECT INPUT
68.In flow logic of screen, there is a statement like below. What will this do?
PROCESS AFTER INPUT.
FIELD carrird MODULE validate ON REQUEST.
 Module ‘validate’ will be executed only if value for XYZ fied changes to another value.
69.Debugger, which function key executes one statement. If we do this on PERFORM or a call , Control
wont go inside subroutine/function but will be processed?
 F6
70.An event handler method can be defined as ________method?
 Any method
71.Which standard program can be used to schedule session processing in background?
 RSBDCSUB (d)
72.Match the following.

 Workbench Requests- (c) Any changes in custom developed( or workbench) bojects are saved
under this request.
 Customizing Requests – (d) Any changes in system configuration are saved under this.
 Transport of Copies- (a) used for copying between anu 2 systems in a group . Objects donot
change their system owner, so the original system remains the same.
 Relocation – (b) used if development system of a compete pkg needs to be chngd on permanent
basis.
73.CALL TRANSACTION will help to capture messages?

 MESSAGES
74.In BDC program, while updating BDCDATA work area, it is mentioned like below. What is (01)
indicates?
Lw_bdcdata-fnam = ‘BDC_CURSOR’.
Lw_bdcdata-fval = ‘KNBK-BANKN(01).
 Step loop line number
75.Which node of smartforms is used to pass values from print prog.?

 Form interface
76.What is also placeholder but comes with default code in enhancement framework?
 ENHANCEMENT-SECTION
77.How to terminate Do loop?

 EXIT
78.Which is the logical partition of the DB within an instance?

 Client
79._________ function module is used to read the input field for the BADI_SORTOR?
 BADI_SORTER_LAYER_GET
80.Which is the option provided explicitily by SAP to replace a block of SAP code with customer?
 Enhancement Section
81.FOR WHICH OBJECTS YOU NEED TO USE FUNCTION CODE IN MENU PAINTER?
 MENU ITEMS
 APPLICATIONS AND STANDARD TOOL BAR BUTTONS
 FUNCTION KEYS
82.How to address static attributes of class within calling program?

 <classname>=><class_attribute>
83.New feature introduced in OPEN sql in abap 7.4 upgrade?

 RIGHT JOIN
84.What is the first screen you see when executing the transaction of Smart Forms?
 Form builder
85.For successful data migration what is commonly performed to improve data quality by eliminating
redundant or obsolete information.
 Data cleaning
86.Which among the following is not a session status in SM35?

 Errors
87.How to implement a local class?

 Class cl_main IMPLEMENTATION.
ENDCLASS.
88.In pc editor, texts can be entered in?

 Text elements
 Include texts
 Text modules
89.How to find a BADI?
 Search in prog by keyword cl_exithandler
 Debug using cl_exithandler
 Using global search transaction and search in SPRO
90.if you search for call customer-function in program you will find
 User exits
91.in a module pool program, in the screen there is an input box whose technical name is CARRID.
In the flowlogic, there is a piece of code like below.
Module user_commanding_0100 INPUT.

If carrid = ‘AA’.
Message ‘you hv entered AA type ‘T’.
Endif.
Endmodule.
When we activate the main program , the error below is displayed.
Field ‘CARRID’ is unknown. Why?
 The variable CARRID is not declared in top include declaration.
92.Consider the source code below. Whichmodule will be executed before the screen is displayed?
PBO.
MODULE read_data.
PAI.
MODULE calculate.
 Read_data
93.SAP_ABAP which is not a type of transport.

 Development
94.SAP_ABAP statement “call screen 200” does ?
 Temporarily branching to screen 300.
95.SAP_ABAP a do loop increments the system field _______?

 Sy-index
96.We can change the data in Adobe form. True or false

 True
97.Predict the o/p
CLASS find_time definition
Public section.
Methods :
Endclass
………….. lo_ref->time().
 Sysntax error
98.Topic:ABAP Basics Sub_topic: Interactive Reports.
What is the command to read the list at the cursor position?
 Get cursor field
99.Predict the o/p of below source code.
Lw_data-name = ‘vimal’.
Append lw_data to lt_data.
Clear lw_data.
Lw_data-name = ‘jisha’.
Clear lw_data.
Lw_data-name = ‘lekha’.
Clear lw_data.
 4
100.which statement is true about function module calls on BDC session method? (1 4)
 When BDC_OPEN_GROUP is used, it is mandatory to close session using BDC_CLOSE_GROUP
 BDC_INSERT requires data in BDCDATA format
101.Choose all the statements true about transport requests.(a c d)

 A transport request is completed when it is released
 Once released, the objects involved in TR are then stored in the …
 Once released, the transport request can be changed.
102.What is true about data element?

 A data element describes the function of a domain in a particular context.
 We cannot create data element without a domain.
103.Which is also known as cube?
 Analytical view
104.What is true about CDS views?
 Can be viewed in se11 but modification of the views are done only in eclipse or HANA studio
105.True about INITIALIZATION event in program. (1,2,4)

 Main purpose of this section is to calculate/populate default values for screen fields.
 The statements under this section are executed when the program is run directly
 The statements in this section are not exceeded when the program is run in background/batch
mode.
106.Three methods to perform user-efined field checks.

 Issue error or warning message in PAI Module
 Issue error or warning message based on the outcome of SELECT statement in flow logic
 Use VALUES statement in flow logic to define the valid values
107.In code-Pushown technique

 Processing in the database layer leads to better speed than processing in application layer
108. oops code

 This is parent class: 10 44 10
This is sub class: 10 44 10
Some random Questions for which I don’t have the question .

So answers are:-
1.Using MATCHCODE OBJECT
2.FOR HDB
Q1.Table is buffered means, data is available in

Ans. Application Server
Q9.What is true about AMDP method

Ans.No returning parameter
ABAP Questions
1. If a table does not have MANDT as part of the primary key, it is ____.
A: A structure B: Invalid C: Client-independent D: Not mandatory

A: CALL FUNCTION B: CALL SCREEN C: CALL TRANSACTION D: CALL PROGRAM
A: Pooled B: Cluster C: Transparent D: View

A: Program execution. B: END-OF-EVENT. C: Another event keyword.
D: END-EVENT.
5. What is the system field for the current date?

A: SY-DATUM B: SY-DATE C: SY-DATID D: SY-SDATE


7. You may change the following data object as shown below so that it equals 3.14.
CONSTANTS: PI type P decimals 2 value '3.1'.
PI = '3.14'.
A: True B: False
A: Update B: Dialog C: Enqueue/Dequeue D: Spool
A: This event is processed before the second time the GET VBAK event is processed.
B: This event is processed after all occurrences of the GET VBAK event are completed.
10. Which of the following is not a true statement in regard to a hashed internal table type?
A: Its key must always be UNIQUE.
B: May only be accessed by its key.
C: Response time for accessing a row depends on the number of entries in the table.
D: Declared using internal table type HASHED TABLE.
11. TO include database-specific SQL statements within an ABAP program, code them between:
A: NATIVE SQL_ENDNATIVE. B: DB SQL_ENDDB.
C: SELECT_ENDSELECT. D: EXEC SQL_ENDEXEC.
12. To measure how long a block of code runs, use the ABAP statement:
A: GET TIME. B: SET TIME FIELD. C: GET RUN TIME FIELD.
D: SET CURSOR FIELD.
13. When a secondary list is being processed, the data of the basic list is available by default.
A: True B: False
14. Given:
qty type I,
END OF itab.
DO 25 TIMES. itab-qty = sy-index. APPEND itab. ENDDO.
LOOP AT itab WHERE qty > 10.

WRITE: /1 itab-qty.
ENDLOOP.
This will result in:

A: Output of only those itab rows with a qty field less than 10
B: Output of the first 10 itab rows with a qty field greater than 10
C: A syntax error

A: True B: False
17. After adding rows to an internal table with COLLECT, you should avoid adding more rows with APPEND.
A: True B: False
18. Which of the following is not a component of control break processing when looping at an internal table?
A: AT START OF B: AT FIRST C: AT LAST D: AT NEW
19. A dictionary table is made available for use within an ABAP program via the TABLES statement.
A: True B: False
20. Which of the following would be best for hiding further selection criteria until a function is chosen?
21. What must you code in the flow logic to prevent a module from being called unless a field contains a non-initial
value (as determined by its data type)?
A: ON INPUT B: CHAIN C: FIELD D: ON REQUEST
22. The AT USER-COMMAND event is triggered by functions defined in the ____.

A: screen painter B: ABAP report C: menu painter status
D: ABAP Dictionary
24. In regard to SET PF-STATUS, you can deactivate unwanted function codes by using ____.
A: EXCLUDING B: IMMEDIATELY C: WITHOUT D: HIDE
25. In regard to data transported in PAI when the FIELD statement is used, which of the following is NOT a true
statement?
D: Fields that are defined in FIELD statements are transported when their corresponding module is called.
26. The order in which an event appears in the ABAP code determines when the event is processed.
A: True B: False
27. A field declared as type T has the following internal representation:

A: SSMMHH B: HHMMSS C: MMHHSS D: HHSSMM
28. Which of the following is NOT a component of the default standard ABAP report header?
A: Date and Time B: List title C: Page number D: Underline
29. Assuming a pushbutton with function code 'FUNC' is available in the toolbar of a list report, what event is
processed when the button is clicked?
A: AT USER-COMMAND. B: AT PFn. C: AT SELECTION-SCREEN.
30. In regard to field selection, what option of the SELECT statement is required?
A: FOR ALL ENTRIES B: WHERE C: INTO D: MOVE-CORRESPONDING
31. The following program outputs what?

report zjgtest1
write: /1 'Ready_'.
PARAMETER: test.
INITIALIZATION.
write: /1 'Set_'.
START-OF-SELECTION.
write: /1 'GO!!'.
A: Set_ GO!! (each on its own line)

B: Set_ Ready_ GO!! (all on their own lines)
C: Ready_ GO!! (each on its own line)
D: Ready_ Set_ GO!! (all on their own lines)
32. To declare a selection criterion that does not appear on the selection screen, use:
A: NO-DISPLAY B: INVISIBLE C: MODIF ID D: OBLIGATORY
33. An internal table that is nested within another internal table should not contain a header line.
A: True B: False
DATA: BEGIN OF itab OCCURS 0, letter type c, END OF itab.
itab-letter = 'A'. APPEND itab. itab-letter = 'B'. APPEND itab.

itab-letter = 'C'. APPEND itab. itab-letter = 'D'. APPEND itab.
LOOP AT itab.
SY-TABIX = 2.
WRITE itab-letter.
EXIT.
ENDLOOP.
A: A
B: A B C D
C: B
D: B C D
D: SELECT_itab_
A: 0 B: 4 C: 8 D: Null
A: REQUIRED-ENTRY
B: OBLIGATORY
C: DEFAULT
WITH HEADER LINE.

SORT itab.
LOOP AT itab.
ENDLOOP.


ENDSELECT.

40. When modifying an internal table within LOOP AT itab. _ ENDLOOP. you must include an index number.
A: True B: False
A: OPEN LINE.
D: FORMAT INPUT ON.

A: Linked B: Authorized C: Released D: Active
43. To include a field on your screen that is not in the ABAP Dictionary, which include program should contain the
data declaration for the field?
44. If a table contains many duplicate values for a field, minimize the number of records returned by using this
SELECT statement addition.
A: MIN B: ORDER BY C: DISTINCT D: DELETE
45. The system internal table used for dynamic screen modification is named:
A: ITAB B: SCREEN C: MODTAB D: SMOD
A: EXCEPTION B: RAISE C: STOP D: ABEND

A: SY-CUCOL B: SY-LILLI C: SY-CUROW D: SY-LISEL
A: Text literal B: Text variable C: In-code comment D: Text integer
49. For the code below, second_field is of what data type?
DATA: first_field type P, second_field like first_field.
A: P
B: C
C: N
D: D
A: DDMMYYYY
B: YYYYDDMM
C: MMDDYYYY
D: YYYYMMDD


A: SE11
B: SE38
C: SE36
D: SE16

A: True
B: False
A: Domain
B: Field name
C: Data type
D: Data element
57. In regard to LEAVE, which of the following is NOT a true statement?
A: May be used to return immediately to a calling program.

B: May be used to stop the current loop pass and get the next.
C: May be used to start a new transaction.
D: May be used to go to the next screen.
SELECT fld6 fld3 fld2 fld1 FROM tab1 INTO CORRESPONDING FIELDS OF TABLE itab
WHERE fld3 = pfld3.
A: The order of the fields in itab does not matter.

B: Fill the header line of itab, but not the body.
C: Table itab can only contain fields also in table tab1.
59. The ABAP statement below indicates that the program should continue with the next line of code if the internal
table itab:
CHECK NOT itab[] IS INITIAL.
A: Contains no rows
B: Contains at least one row
C: Has a header line
D: Has an empty header line

FREE itab.
A: 2
B: 0
C: blank
D: 1
61. To allow the user to enter a range of values on a selection screen, use the ABAP keyword:
A: DATA.
B: RANGES.
C: PARAMETERS.
D: SELECT-OPTIONS.
62. If an internal table is declared without a header line, what else must you declare to work with the table's rows?

D: A PARAMETER.
63. Assuming an internal table contains 2000 entries, how many entries will it have after the following line of code is
executed?
DELETE itab FROM 1500 TO 1700.
A: This is a syntax error.

B: 1801
C: 1800
D: 1799
A: UPDATE
B: MODIFY
C: ERASE
D: DELETE

66. When is it optional to pass an actual parameter to a required formal parameter of a function module?
A: The actual parameter is type C.

B: The formal parameter contains a default value.
C: The formal parameter's \"Reference\" attribute is turned on.
D: It is never optional.
67. Coding two INITIALIZATION events will cause a syntax error.
A: True
B: False
68. Adding a COMMIT WORK statement between SELECT_ENDSELECT is a good method for improving
performance.
A: True
B: False
69. To save information on a list line for use after the line is selected, use this keyword.
A: APPEND
B: EXPORT
C: WRITE
D: HIDE
A: AT EXIT-COMMAND
B: ON INPUT
C: ON REQUEST
D: LEAVE TO SCREEN 0.
71. Within a function module's source code, if the MESSAGE_RAISING statement is executed, all of the following
system fields are filled automatically except:
A: SY-MSGTY
B: SY-MSGNO
C: SY-MSGV1
D: SY-MSGWA
REPORT ZLISTTST.
START-OF-SELECTION.
WRITE: text-001.
FORMAT HOTSPOT ON.
WRITE: text-002.
FORMAT HOTSPOT OFF.
AT LINE-SELECTION.
WRITE / text-003.

73. The ____ type of ABAP Dictionary view consists of one or more transparent tables and may be accessed by an
ABAP program using Open SQL.
A: Database view
B: Projection view
C: Help view
D: Entity view
A: MOVE
B: WRITE
C: ASSIGN
D: VALUE
75. The output for the following code will be:
report zabaprg.
DATA: char_field type C.
char_field = 'ABAP data'.
WRITE char_field.
A: ABAP data
B: A
C: Nothing, there is a syntax error
A: TOP-OF-PAGE.
C: NEW-PAGE.
D: END-OF-PAGE.
77. The event AT SELECTION-SCREEN OUTPUT. occurs before the selection screen is displayed and is the best
event for assigning default values to selection criteria.
A: True
B: False
A: True
B: False
WHERE fld7 = pfld7.
ENDSELECT.

D: Take the WRITE statement out of the SELECT_ENDSELECT.
A: Application
B: Title
C: Status
D: Type
81. When creating a transparent table in the ABAP Dictionary, which step automatically creates the table in the
underlying database?

C: Saving the table
82. Within the ABAP program attributes, Type = 1 represents:
A: INCLUDE program
B: Online program
C: Module pool
D: Function group
E: Subroutine pool

C: Add GROUP BY f1.
84. Which keyword adds rows to an internal table while accumulating numeric values?
A: INSERT
B: APPEND
C: COLLECT
D: GROUP


D: Nothing.


87. Which statement will sort the data of an internal table with fields FRUIT, QTY, and PRICE so that it appears as
follows?
FRUIT QTY PRICE
Apples 12 22.50
Apples 9 18.25
Oranges 15 17.35
Bananas 20 10.20
Bananas 15 6.89
Bananas 5 2.75
A: SORT itab DESCENDING BY QTY PRICE.

B: SORT itab BY PRICE FRUIT.
C: SORT itab.
D: SORT itab BY PRICE DESCENDING.
A: APPEND
B: MODIFY
C: ADD
D: INSERT
89. To read a single line of an internal table, use the following:
A: LOOP AT itab. _ ENDLOOP.

B: READ itab.
C: SELECT SINGLE * FROM itab.
D: READ TABLE itab.
A: UPDATE
B: MODIFY
C: DELETE
D: INSERT
91. To include a field on your screen that is not in the ABAP Dictionary, which include program should contain the
data declaration for the field?

92. This flow logic statement is used to make multiple fields open for input after an error or warning message.
A: GROUP
B: FIELD-GROUP
C: CHAIN
D: LOOP AT SCREEN
93. Given:
A: Formal
B: Actual
C: Static
D: Value
94. Full Buffering would be appropriate for

A. Transaction Tables
B. Small Static tables
C. Internal Tables
D. Tables with generic Keys
95 What is the basic object of data Dictionary

A. Domains
B. Documentation
C. Data Models
D. Dynpro
96 Search help cannot be attach to:

A. Domain
B. field of a table
C. check table
D. Type
97 Sub query usually are more efficient because:

A. data is filtered in the database
B. data is filtered on the network
C. data is filtered in the sapgui
D. data is filtered at the application server
98. It is better to buffer a table when

A. When a table is read infrequently
B. When a table is linked to check tables
C. When a table is read frequently and the data seldom changes
D. When a single record is to be picked up
99. In Inner and outter join

A. buffers are always used
B. Choice of buffer can be made to use
C. buffers are always bypassed
D. None of above
100. What is invalid attribute of a domain
A. Type
B. Fixed values
C. Length
D. Header
101. Data element is an example of

A. Physical Definition
B. Business Object
C. Semantic Domain
D. Technical Domain
102. What is true

A. A view contains data
B. Views can be buffered
C. Views can not be buffered
D. None of above
103. Command flushes the database buffers

A. $TAB
B. $RESET
C. $INIT
D. $FREE
104. How many lists can exist in parallel in an interactive reporting?

A. An Interactive report can have 1 basic list and up to 20 Secondary lists.
B. An Interactive report can have 1 basic list and up to 19 Secondary lists.
C. An Interactive report can have 1 basic list and up to 19 Secondary lists.
D. An Interactive report can have 1 basic list and up to 21 Secondary lists.
105. What are the check tables and value tables? (Multiple Answer)
A. Check table will be at field level checking.
B. Value table will be at domain level checking
C Value table will be at field level checking
D. Check table will be at domain level checking.
106.What are presentation and application servers in SAP? (Multiple Answer)

A. Application server is actually a program named Sapgui.exe. It is usually installed On a user’s
workstation.
B. Application server is a set of executables that collectively interpret the ABAP/4 Programs and
C. Presentation server is actually a program named Sapgui.exe. It is usually installed On a user’s
workstation.
D. Presentation server is a set of executables that collectively interpret the ABAP/4 Programs and
107.What is the difference between Synchronous and Asynchronous updates? (Multiple Answer)
A. In synchronous processing, the program waits: control returns to the program only when the
B. In asynchronous processing, the program does not wait: the system returns control after merely
C. In asynchronous processing, the program waits: control returns to the program only when the task has
been completed.
D. In synchronous processing, the program does not wait: the system returns control after merely
108.What are the main events an interactive report have? (Multiple Answer)
A. Top-of-page during line selection.
B. At line-selection.
C. At user-command.
D. AT New
109.How many types of tables exist in data dictionary? (Multiple Answer)

A. Transparent tables
B. Internal Table
C. Pool tables
D. Hash Table
E. Cluster tables
F. Master Data Table
110. What is the difference between UPLOAD and WS_UPLOAD? (Multiple Answer)
A. WS_UPLOAD - File transfer with dialog from presentation server file to internal table. Data which is
available in a file on the presentation server is transferred in an internal table. ASCII & Binary files can
be transferred.
B. UPLOAD - To read data from the presentation server into an internal table without a user dialog, use
the function module WS_UPLOAD. The most important parameters are listed below.
C. UPLOAD - File transfer with dialog from presentation server file to internal table. Data which
is available in a file on the presentation server is transferred in an internal table. ASCII & Binary
files can be transferred.
D.WS_UPLOAD - To read data from the presentation server into an internal table without a user
dialog, use the function module WS_UPLOAD. The most important parameters are listed below.
111.Is Session Method, Asynchronous or Synchronous?

A. Asynchronous
B. Synchronous
C. Synchronous and Asynchronous
D. None of above
112. What are the differences between SAP memory and ABAP memory? (Multiple Answer)
A. SAP Memory is a memory area in the internal session (roll area) of an ABAP program. Data within
this area is retained within a sequence of program calls, allowing you to pass data between programs that
call one another. It is also possible to pass data between sessions using SAP Memory.
B. ABAP Memory is a memory area to which all sessions within a SAPgui have access. You can use
SAP memory either to pass data from one program to another within a session (as with ABAP memory)
or to pass data from one session to another.
C.ABAP Memory is a memory area in the internal session (roll area) of an ABAP program. Data
within this area is retained within a sequence of program calls, allowing you to pass data between
programs that call one another. It is also possible to pass data between sessions using SAP
Memory.
D.SAP Memory is a memory area to which all sessions within a SAPgui have access. You can use
SAP memory either to pass data from one program to another within a session (as with ABAP
memory) or to pass data from one session to another.
113. Which data type cannot be used to define parameters.

A. Type N
B. Type C
C. Type F
D. Type P
114. What are the 2 boxes in your system for coding for Abap and their logins?
Development System & IDES/Sandbox
115. If I get a problem on a report in Production server how can I modify the report.
If the problem in production server we have to alter the program in Developemnt Client and transport it
to QA client Test it throughly and then Transport it to Production.
116. Tell me about Tokens.
Tokens are Issues sent by the Client to us.
117. How to Fix the bugs and where you will do those things.
It Actuall Depends what kind of bugs they asked about:

If it is a problem in Program, then we alter them in the SE38 (Develpment) and transport it after testing
to Prd Server.
118. What is a sandboxes.
SAND BOX is nothing but a test client other than Develpment Client or QA.
119. How to conncet the from ur office to clinet in US.
It will be configured by the BASIS guys..

In the sap logon pad they will enter the application server id and Routing String and the SERver type in
the Sytem Number....
with that we will connect
120. Tell me about VPN and the connections.
Its a another way to connect to other PC. its a 3rd party utility....
121. How to login ur system.
Thru SAP Logon enter the client number ,user id & password.
122. What is the purpose of SE14.
Database Utility to perform table maintenance such as deleting the table or adjusting the table when
there is a structure change.
123. What is the purpose of SM30.
SM30 is a table Maintanance for the Ztable Created by us.
124. In Data dictionary in the table creation,What is the purpose of Technical settings.
To identify the Size of the Table Created and to Set whether buffering needs to be done for the table or
not.
125. What is the purpose of buffering in technical settings and for what type of tables are using
buffering.
It will reduce the Network tarffic but disadvantage is it will not update the Server back immediately.
126. In reporting tell me all the events in a sequentail order.
- Initialization.
- At Selection-Screen
- Start-of-Selection.
- Top-of-Page.
- At Pfn.
- End-of-Page.
- End-of-Selection.
127. One of my users has access to SE38 transaction, and so he can run the program developed by
you. You have attached this report/transactional program to a particular Z* transaction. To
restrict the users to Execute this program, what you do it from programming side?
Check for Authorization object S_TCODE with value "Z----" in initialization event.
(Code:
Authority-check object 'S_TCODE'
id 'TCD' field 'ZBC_REQ'.)
128. When we create a customer the information is updated in structure RF02D and Some tables
like KNA1 are updated. How can we find the tables for master data transactions?
Go to ABAP Workbench -> Overview -> application hierarchy - SAP -> (or SE81 transaction code)
follow the customizing based tree for your application. Double click on a lowest level to get for the
correct marked development class. Then, here you can find all the tables, views, logical databases etc..,
129. Within the TOP-OF-PAGE event the following code represents:
write: /1 text-001.
A: A selection text.
B: A basic list row.
C: A page footer
D: A page header
130. Given the two ABAP Dictioary tables below, the Customer number field in table one must
contain
a value from table two. The Customer number field is known as a ____.
Table one:
Customer number (Primary key)
Company code (Primary key)
Other data
Table two:
Customer number (Primary key)
Customer name
Other data
A: Secondary index
B: Matchcode object
C: Validation field
D: Foreign key
131. The structure of a table has been changed in the ABAP/4 Dictionary.
Which of the following adjustments in the relevant database table is correct, if you want to retain
the previous data?
A. Delete and recreate the database table.
B. Change the database directory (ALTER TABLE) where the structure change with ALTER
TABLE is supported by the database.
C. Convert the table.
132. Must Exits be predefined by SAP programmers?
A. No
B. Yes
133. What is the difference between external & internal subroutine?
1. Internal subroutines in the sense ..subroutines which are defined and used in a same
program...external in the sense if you create a sub routine in one program and you're calling this
subroutine in another program ..then this is external subroutine.
2. The name itself implies the internal subroutines defined by form /perform.. can be called within the
same prog in which they were declared.....external subroutines can be called outside the program.......
134. Why do we use ALV?
1. ALV gives many advantages than a list like sorting summing getting graphics like that stuff.
2. SAP LIST VIEWER is ALV . its main advantage is by using ALV technique we can find totals
,subtotals ,sort in any order etc there itself in the list output of course we need to write all those
functionalities while using ALV...also many functional modules are defined under ALV concept...
135. Why do we use GET CURSOR and what is it?
1. While generating a interactive report we will use get cursor..use is to get the value of the fiel under
the cursor..
2. GETCURSOR is used to trace the position of the cursor in the list ..

suppose we want to double click on any filled in the list and want to trace data using that field we use
getcursor .....
136.Both the events AT SELECTION-SCREEN and AT USER-COMMAND are processed after

user input. Then what is the difference between these and when we should use what?
1. At selection screen is used to validate the fields in a selection screen...and at user command is used to
modify the screen in a selection screen and in genarating secondary lists..
2. AT SELECTION-SCREEN is used where you have a seperate selection screen using select-options
or parameters where as AT USER-COMMAND is used where no selection screen exists....at.user-
command is mainly used while setting pf-status which means creating our own menu with function
codes etc...
137. BDC_INSERT is used to
Insert rows in BDC.
138. What is the structure of the BDC table?
The BDCDATA consists of the following fields:

§ PROGRAM [CHAR 40] - Online program name.
§ DYNPRO [NUMC 4] - Screen number.
§ DYNBEGIN [CHAR 1] - Flag to indicate the start of a new screen.
§ FNAM [CHAR 132] - Field name of a screen field to be filled with data.
§ FVAL [CHAR 132] - The actual value to be filled into the specified screen field.
139. What is the difference between BDC_OKCODE and BDC_CURSOR?
BDC_OKCODE: is used for storing commands during the recording. like '/00' is the command for
'ENTER' Key.
BDC_CURSOR: contains the cursor position. it contians the field in which cursor will be.
Example code:
perform bdc_field using 'BDC_CURSOR'
'PROJ-PSPID'.
perform bdc_field using 'BDC_OKCODE'
'=BU'.
140. What are the 3 methods that we use in sequence in a Batch input session method ?
1) BDC_OPEN_GROUP for opening the Batch Input Session

2) BDC_INSERT for inserting the transactional data into SAP
3) BDC_CLOSE_GROUP for closing the Batch Input Session
141. What is your approach for writing a BDC program?
Identify the Tcode and do the recording in SHDB to populate the BDCDATA.
Once the recording is done , one can Transfer it to the Batch input program.
In the batch Input program , The transactional data is read from the file to an internal table.
Then one can loop over the transactional data in the internal table and start uploading the data in SAP
either by CALL TRANSACTION method or by creating sessions through the batch input program.
142. What is the transaction for Recording BDC ?
The Tcode is SHDB.
143. How do you read files from the Application server ?
You can use the commands:

OPEN DATASET ---> opens the file(dataset) either in read /write mode.
READ DATASET ---> Read the file
CLOSE DATASET ---> Close the dataset once the date has been read .
144. How do you read files from the presentation server ?

You can use the Function Modules :
GUI_UPLOAD --> To read data from file into an internal table
GUI_DOWNLOAD --> To write data from internal table to a file on presentation server
145. Difference between SAP transaction and database transaction
SAP corresponds to single database
146. Can a transparent table exist in data dictionary but not in the database physically?
a) YES
b) NO
147. Fields in database can be changed .

TRUE
A: CALL FUNCTION
B: CALL SCREEN
C: CALL TRANSACTION
D: CALL PROGRAM
149. Valid Joins on ABAP :
• Equi Join
• Inner Join
• Outer Join
• Self Join
• All
150. To measure how long a block of code runs, use the ABAP statement:
A: GET TIME .
B: SET TIME FIELD .
C: GET RUN TIME FIELD
151. Choose most appropriate option

SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF BLOCK ABC FRAME__________ .
SELECTION SCREEN BEGIN OF SCREEN ABC WINDOW .
SELECTION SCREEN BEGIN OF SCREEN ABC .
ALL OF ABOVE
152. Difference between select single * and select * upto 1 row
SELECT SINGLE returns the first matching row for the given condition and it may not be
unique, if there are more matching rows for the given condition.
SELECT ... UP TO 1 ROWS retrieves all the matching records and applies aggregation and ordering
and returns the first record.
Inorder to check for the existence of a record then it is better to use SELECT SINGLE than using
SELECT ... UP TO 1 ROWS since it uses low memory and has better performance."
According to SAP Performance course the SELECT UP TO 1 ROWS is faster than SELECT SINGLE
because you are not using all the primary key fields.
153.
Edit_mask is To apply the report output formatting options same as in the WRITE statement in report
writing.
DATA TIME TYPE T VALUE '093017'.
WRITE (8) TIME USING EDIT MASK '__:__:__'. "Output: 09:30:17
In this example, the internal length (of type T) is six characters, while the output length is eight.
154.ABAP programmer can create a table with fields not referring to data elements?
TRUE
155. BDC Transaction Vs Session
Call transaction:
1.Synchronous Processing.
2.Synchronous and Asynchronous database updates.
3.Transfer of data for individual transaction,
4.Not suited for bulk transfer.
5.No automatic errror handling.
Session:
1.Asynchronous Processing.
2.Synchronous database updates.
3.Transfer of data for multiple transactions.
4.Best suited for bulk transfer.
5.Automatic errror handling.
6.SAP's standard approach for data transfer
156. You may change the following data object as shown below so that it equals 3.14.
CONSTANTS: PI type P decimals 2 value '3.1'.
PI = '3.14'.
A: True
B: False
157. TO include database-specific SQL statements within an ABAP program, code them between:
A: NATIVE SQL_ENDNATIVE.
B: DB SQL_ENDDB.
C: SELECT_ENDSELECT.
D: EXEC SQL_ENDEXEC.
158. Which fetaure of SQL is not in Open SQL.
• Buffering can't be done.

• Open SQL is not portable.
• It is compatible to all databases



170. What is the system field for the current date?

A: SY-DATUM
B: SY-DATE
C: SY-DATID
D: SY-SDATE
171.A BDC program is used for all of the following except:

172. After adding rows to an internal table with COLLECT, you should avoid adding more rows
with APPEND.
A: True
B: False
173. Which statement is NOT TRUE about Transparent Table :

• Transparent table correspond to single database table.
• Transparent table and database table have same name,same fields.
• Transparent table and database table have different name,different fields
174. Which is Interactive report event

• TOP OF PAGE
• SET PF
• AT LINE SELECTION
175. ABAP programmers can create their own data types?

a) TRUE b) FALSE
A: Application
B: Title
C: Status
D: Type
177. TCode for SQL Trace? ST05 or DB05
178. Table T000 stores what? Client master data
179, Which of the sentences below is false?
a. ABAP is 3G language
b. ABAP is procedural
c. ABAP is built on OO concepts
d. ABAP is event driven language
180. Local time of the presentation server is stored in which system variable?
SY-TIMELO
Note: Application Server’s time is stored in SY-UZEIT
Exec…End Exec
182. TCode for Data Model? SD11
183. How to catch an exception?
Catch…EndCatch
184. For what purpose HIDE is used for?
HIDE keyword is used to store the selected data (record) in the backend. This is used in the “Interactive List”.
185. How to fetch data from a specific client?
Using the addition “CLIENT SPECIFIED <client number>” in the Select query.
186. Conversion Exits are attached at what level?
At the Domain level
187. TCode for Spool viewer and Spool Administration?
SP01 and SPAD respectively
188. Which of the following can not be created using SE11?
a. Views
b. Type Pools
c. Lock Objects
d. Search Help
e. ALL
a. Authority-Check
b. Authority_Check_Dataset
c. System does it automatically
d. None
190 Selection screen is? An interface between program and user
191. Which clause is used for Search help? MATCHCODE OBJECT
192. Which statement is true?
a. Primary index contains all the primary fields

b. Secondary index can contain non primary fields
193. What happens in the event AT SELECTION-SCREEN? Validations
194. How many types of Messages are there?
6= A, X, E, W, I and S
195. Relationship between Domain and Data elements.
a. One domain can correspond to many Data Elements

b. One Data Element can have only ONE domain
196. Which statement triggers TOP-OF-PAGE event?
Both WRITE and SKIP statements
197. Which Search Help has highest precedence? Search Help attached at Field Level
198. ABAP Programs are –
a. Client dependent
Table data are –
c. Client dependent
d. Client independent
199. Difference between APPEND and COLLECT keywords?
Append: Always adds a row

Collect: may or may not add a row
200. Which FM is used to transfer the data from the Presentation Server to Application Server?
GUI_UPLOAD
201. Instruction to write data to a file on application server? TRANSFER
202. How can you view the short dump (run time errors)? Using TCode ST22
203. How can standard internal tables be accessed?
a. Sequentially
b. Directly
204. Which system variable to get the Page Number in a list? SY-PAGNO
205. <> means what? NOT EQUAL TO
206. What creates data objects?
a. Data
b. Parameters
c. Constants
d. ALL of the above
207. TCode for processing queue files?
SM35 (Queue file => BDC Session => BDC Group => Batch Input Session)
208. Where ABAP processor does resides? Application Server
209. What will be the output?
a. Initialization. Write: / ‘A’.

b. Top-Of-Page. Write: / ‘B’.
c. Start-Of-Selection. Write: / ‘C’.
Ans: B, C. (A will not be output!)
210. What is meant by SAP R/3?

SAP R/3 is Real time 3 tier architecture.
211. Text elements are language dependent. True or False? True.
212. NUMC is not a numeric data type. True or False? True.
213. What is the order of preference for F4 Help (also called as Search Help)?
Search help order: Field level -> Data Element level -> Domain level
214. What are LPOS and SPOS in F4 Help?
LPOS determines which column comes in the final hit list in which order (left to right) and SPOS is used for
restricting screen (row-wise, from top to bottom)
215. TCode for Layout set? SE71
216. Other names for layout set? Form Painter, SAP Script Painter or even SE71
217. TCode for Menu Painter? SE41
218. TCode for Screen Painter? SE51
219.Table containing standard texts? TTDTG
221. Program to load images into SAP system for usage in SAP Scripts? RSTXLDMC.
223.There cannot be more than one Main window in a page. True or False?
False
a. PBO
b. PAI
c. POV
d. POH
225. TCode for Output Type Configuration (also known as Output Determination Configuration)?
NACE
Character formats.
228. Which data type cannot be used for parameter declaration?
a. D
b. N
c. C
d. F
Ans: F
229. Which variable is used to store the number of loop counter for looping over the table control?
SY-LOOPL
230.Forms can have only one main window between different pages. True or False?
False
231. SAP Scripts are used to - Print form data
233.Sub-screens do not have their own GUI Status. True or False? True
234 TCode for searching BAPI? BAPI (TCode itself is BAPI)
235.TCode for Workbench Organizer? SE09
Note: It is notLEAVE TO LIST PROCESSING

238. Program to process BDC Sessions in background? RSBDCSUB
239. Select All Entries is used for? to avoid too much use of select statement in loop.
240. Invalid Data type? HEX
250. TABLE FOR TRANSACTION codes- TSTC
251. What is the name of the system variable that stores content of entire
line where double click has occurred.
sy-lisel
252. Exit statement

exits the current loop
253. An ABP report is selecting data from MARA and storing in GT_MARA.
GT_MARA is being read with key MATNR in the loop of another internal table.The best performance
of read statement is achieved by declaring GT_MARA as:
hash table
254. A table T000 contains: client data
255. conversion exit of a data variable is attached to: domain
256. what are diff data we store in SAP system?

a. Master data
b.Transaction data
c.Customizing data
d.System data
e.All of the above
256. Transaction variants are: For customizing the transaction
257. ABAP is ---fourth---- generation language
258. Find the wrong stmt

A field of a structure can be made a foreign key
259. The value 03 in the ACTVT field of an authority check stmt would authorise user to ----------the
object: Display
260 Which instr is used to move contents of an internal table to a file on the application server
TRANSFER
261. How can you supress default title of a list
no std page heading
262. Time as per the user time zone is stored in the system variable
sy-timlo
263. the trans code for sql trace is

ST05
264. HIDE command in report is used to:

retain content of field with output line
265. there is an internal table with fields A,B,C in that sequence. The statement
AT NEW B wud be triggered on
Change in A
266. The trans code to view a data model is

SD11
267. Programs are

a. Client independent
268. If the type specification is missing the field is of type

character
269. What are the most important precaution one should take for using the "FOR ALL ENTRIES"
command
Ans :Before the select ,check if the internal table used in "FOR ALL ENTRIES " clause is not empty
270. What is true about extract sets/fields groups

They store data in compressed forms
271. In SAP R/3 which one of these allocates the resources in application layer.
Dispatcher
272. Which of the foll is/are client dependent

Layout forms
273. Find the odd man out:

Each session has its own ABAP memory area

Exec…End Exec

Authority-Check
276. Selection screen is?
277. Which FM is used to transfer the data from the Presentation Server to Application Server?
GUI_UPLOAD
278. TCode SQL Trace? ST05
279. Table T000 stores wht? CLient Data
280. Which of the following is available in abap.

TAN LOG ANTILOG EXP MOD
ans MOD
281. Find the odd-man out

ABAP Memory can be used to share data between different sessions in different R/3 Systems.
ABAP Memory can be used to share data between diff sessions on same system.
SAP memory get and send data from selection screens fields.
ANS Its the 4th option. Cant remember the option, the above 3 options r wrong, so select the other
option.
282. Selection screen comes after Initialization?

YEs
283. PARAMETERS <p>.....LOWERCASE..... What will P be input as?

Uppercase
Lowercase
As it is
ANS: converts to lowercase.
284. What is the sys var for:
Date Sy-Datum
Time Sy-UZEIT
Username Sy-UNAME
285. Which statement triggers TOP OF PAGE event? WRITE
286. Which event occurs first? INITIALIZATION
287. What happens after AT SELECTIONSCREEN: VALIDATIONS

288. TABLE FOR TRANSACTION codes: TSTC
289. loop
Append table
Endloop
ANS: Infinite loop.
290. Which event is triggered when 'At Line-Selection'

ANS 'PICK'
291: Progs are

client indepENDENT
client dep
Both
292: For structures like tables must have primary key?

TRUE
293. Where can we see the o/p of the background processes? SP01
294. RS-SET-SELECTIONSCREEN-STATUS
it sets the screen's status.
295. Instruction to transfer the data from the presentation Server to Application Server
GUI_Upload
296. Instruction to transfer the data from the Application Server to presentation Server
GUI_Download
297. Which Of the following is client dependent? Layout Forms
298. Wht is the keyword used in the PARAMETERS

Values
Value
Default
ANS DEFAULT
A: I
B: N
C: C
D: D
Ans:C (char has default value as blank and N has default value of 1)
SELECTION.
A: True
B: False
following code?
Report zabaprg.

CLEAR name1.
performwrite_name.
FORM write_name.
WRITE name1.
ENDFORM.
A: Customer name
B: ABAP programmer
C: Material number
Ans:C

D: Set a breakpoint
Ans: C
transaction?
A: Type groups
B: Search help
C: Lock objects
D: Function groups
A: Text symbol
B: Selection text
C: Text title
D: Text identifier
____.
A: Auto align
B: Pretty printer
C: Generate version
D: Syntax check
Ans:B
A: SY-LOOPI
B: SY-TABIX
C: SY-LSIND
D: SY-INDEX
Ans: D
307.The event that is processed after all data has been read but before the list is displayed
is:
A: END-OF-PAGE.
Ans:A→C
DATA: new_fld(25).
A: P
B: N
C: I
D: C
Ans: D
statement?

Ans: B
A: True
B: False
____.
A: domain
B: field name
C: data type
D: data element
312.In regard to the three-tier client/server architecture, which of the following is a true
statement?

database server.
Ans: D, b

write: alph.
WHILE alph> 2.
write: alph.
alph = alph - 1.
ENDWHILE.
A: 3
B: 3 2
C: 3 3 2
D: 3 3
Ans: D
keyword ____.
A: SELECT-OPTIONS.
B: PARAMETERS.
C: RANGES.
D: DATA.
Ans: B

REFRESH itab.
A: 1
B: 2
C: blank
D: 0
Ans: B
A: True
B: Falses
Ans: A
317. When modifying an internal table within LOOP AT itab. _ ENDLOOP.you must
A: True
B: False
Ans :a
SY-TABIX = 10.
LOOP AT itab.
ENDLOOP.
A: 0
B: 10
C: 20
D: 30
Ans: b (Loop at reset the value of SY-TABIX to what it was before entering loop)
319.
Given:
AND vbeln = pvbeln.
IF SY-SUBRC = 0.
ENDIF.

Ans D
A: SELECT
B: SELECT INTO
C: SELECT SINGLE
D: SELECT ENTRY
Ans: C

statement?

Ans: A →D
322.All of the following are valid Open SQL statements except:
A: OPEN DATASET.
B: CLOSE CURSOR.
C: DELETE.
D: COMMIT WORK.
TABLE statement.
A: INDEX
B: TABIX
C: ROW
D: WHERE
Ans: B →A
A: UPDATE
B: MODIFY
C: ERASE
D: DELETE
Ans: D
325. Which table type would be most appropriate for accessing table rows using an index.
A: Hashed table
B: Standard table
C: Sorted table
Ans: C


Ans: A

C: Add GROUP BY f1.
328. Given:
IF MY_IND = 'X'.
COMMIT WORK.
ELSE.
ROLLBACK WORK.
ENDIF.

D: An abend.
A: True
B: False
Ans: B
A: OPEN LINE.
D: FORMAT INPUT ON.
Ans :D

AT USER-COMMAND.
CASE SY-UCOMM.
WHEN 'FC11'.
WHEN 'FC12'.
ENDCASE.

Ans c→ d
A: ON INPUT
B: CHAIN
C: FIELD
D: ON REQUEST
Ans: A
A: Transaction code
B: Screen
C: ABAP module pool
D: Background job

Ans:C
C: INITIALIZATION.
Ans:A
A: TOP-OF-PAGE.
D: AT USER-COMMAND.
Ans: C
338. Given:
A: Formal
B: Actual
C: Static
D: Value
Ans:B

B: Helps you analyze the performance of any program created within the ABAP Workbench. *
CALL SCREEN 300.

D: Exit screen 300.
Ans:C
A: EXPORTING
B: IMPORTING
C: USING
D: TABLES

Ans: A→C

UP TO 100 ROWS
WHERE fld7 = pfld7.

Ans: b
343.To place a checkbox on a list, use
A: WRITE CHECKBOX.
Ans:c
344.The following code indicates:

Ans:A
345. Given:

ENDFORM.
A: Value
B: Reference
C: Value and result
A: CHAIN_ENDCHAIN
B: AT EXIT-COMMAND
C: LOOP_ENDLOOP
D: SET PF-STATUS
A: EXCEPTION
B: RAISE
C: STOP
D: ABEND
Ans:B
A: Normal
B: Update
C: RFC
D: Dialog
Ans:D

Ans:A

internal table.
A: True
B: False
Ans A
A: True
B: False
Ans:B
statement?


D: The first field.
statement, use:
A: AS CHECKBOX
C: MEMORY ID
D: MODIF ID
A: INSERT
B: UPDATE
C: APPEND
D: MODIFY
Ans:D
A: SELECT
B: SELECT INTO
C: SELECT SINGLE
D: SELECT ENTRY
Ans:C
A: True
B: False
Ans:A
A: WITH KEY
B: WITH TABLE KEY
C: SEARCH TYPE
D: WHERE
Ans A(for hashed or sorted we use with table key and for transparent table we use with key)

ENDSELECT.

Ans: C (there is no into statement so wrong syntax)
A: INTO
B: WHERE
C: FROM
D: GROUP BY
Ans:D

letter type c,
END OF itab.
LOOP AT itab.
SY-TABIX = 2.
WRITE itab-letter.
EXIT.
ENDLOOP.
A: A
B: ABCD
C: B
D: BCD
Ans: a
A: REQUIRED-ENTRY
B: OBLIGATORY
C: DEFAULT

D: APPEND SORTED BY
Ans:D

itab1[] = itab2[].


Ans:D
A: UPDATE
B: INSERT
C: INTO
D: MOD
Ans:A

Ans:C
A: I
B: N
C: P
D: F
Ans: B

Ans:C
program?
A: Application
B: Title
C: Status
D: Type
Ans: a
A: NEW-PAGE.
C: INITIALIZATION.
D: TOP-OF-PAGE.
Ans:D
A: Domain
B: Field name
C: Data type
D: Data element
A: AT USER-COMMAND.
B: AT PFn.
Ans:A

Ans:A
A: True
B: False
Ans:A
A: CP
B: NC
C: O
D: NS
Ans: C
A: MOVE
B: WRITE
C: ASSIGN
D: VALUE
Ans:A
A: DDMMYYYY
B: YYYYDDMM
C: MMDDYYYY
D: YYYYMMDD
Ans:D
A: SE11
B: SE38
C: SE36
D: SE16
Ans:B
94. Given:
REPORT ZINTERAC.
WRITE 'First List'.
AT PF5.

Ans:C
C: CALL SCREEN.
using ____.
A: EXCLUDING
B: IMMEDIATELY
C: WITHOUT
D: HIDE
A: True
B: False
Ans:A
A: CALL SCREEN 0.
B: COMMIT WORK.
C: ROLLBACK WORK.
D: UPDATE.
Ans:C
equal?
A: 0
B: 2
C: 1
Ans C
REPORT ZLISTTST.
START-OF-SELECTION.
WRITE: text-001.
FORMAT HOTSPOT ON.
WRITE: text-002.
FORMAT HOTSPOT OFF.
AT LINE-SELECTION.
WRITE / text-003.

Ans:C
except:
A: Subroutine
C: Field-group
D: Function module
Ans:C

Ans: B→A
A: Standard
B: Sorted
C: Hashed
D: Unique
Ans:D

Ans:C

Ans:
A: COMMENT
B: HLINE
C: ULINE
D: SKIP
Ans:C

D: SELECT_itab_
Ans:A
A: COMMENT
B: EXCLUDE
C: ULINE
D: SKIP
Ans: D
A: WHERE
B: WHEN
C: IF
D: CASE
Ans:A
A: IN
B: EQ
C: NE
D: BT
Ans:A
111. ------
CASE my_fld> 3.
A: True
B: False
Ans:B
A: Database view
B: Projection view
C: Help view
D: Entity view
Ans: B →A

A: Pooled
B: Cluster
C: Transparent
D: View
Ans:C
A: GET.
B: INITIALIZATION.
D: NEW-PAGE.
Ans:C
A: TOP-OF-PAGE.
C: NEW-PAGE.
D: END-OF-PAGE.
Ans:D
A: P
B: D
C: N
D: C
Ans: B
118. Which of these sentences most accurately describes the GET VBAK LATE.event?
processed.
completed.
Ans:B
119. Given:
DO.
ENDDO.

Ans.B

Ans: D
header?
A: Date and Time

B: List title
C: Page number
D: Underline
Ans: A
A: P
B: C
C: N
D: I
Ans: C

A: CALL FUNCTION
B: CALL SCREEN
C: CALL TRANSACTION
D: CALL PROGRAM
Ans: D
reportzabaprg.
clearmy_field.
A: The value is 99
B: The value is 100
C: The value is 0
Ans: C
IF var_one = 'dog'.
WRITE: /1 'Bark!'.
ELSE.
WRITE: /1 'Meow!'.
ENDIF.
WRITE: var_one.
A: Bark! DOG
B: DOG
C: Meow! DOG
Ans: C
A: True
B: False
A: True
B: False
you should:
A: Activate it.
B: Release it.
Ans: A



A: SY-CUCOL
B: SY-LILLI
C: SY-CUROW
D: SY-LISEL
Ans: D

use:

A: True
B: False
Ans: B
except:
A: CLEAR itab.
B: REFRESH itab.
C: CLEAR itab[].
D: FREE itab.
Ans:A

Ans:A
keyword:
A: DATA.
B: RANGES.
C: PARAMETERS.
D: SELECT-OPTIONS
Ans: B →D
header line.
A: True
B: False
Ans:A
WITH HEADER LINE.

SORT itab.
LOOP AT itab.
ENDLOOP.

Ans:C

SORTED BY.
Ans:A

type?

Ans: C →A
A: CLIENT-SPECIFIED
B: BYPASSING BUFFER
C: ORDER BY
D: GROUP BY

ENDSELECT.

Ans:D
147. Given:
A: From value
B: To value
C: Single range
D: Exclusion range
A: D
B: O
C: F
D: X
E: T
Ans: B

Ans: A
A: True
B: False
Ans: B
TYPES: user_type.
A: N
B: C
C: I
D: Undefined
Ans: B
A: F
B: D
C: T
D: X
Ans: A
B: Program type
A: Update
B: Dialog
C: Enqueue/Dequeue
D: Spool

true statement?

is processed.
A: True
B: False
Ans: B

statement?

Ans:D

Ans B

Ans: A
A: GROUP
B: FIELD-GROUP
C: CHAIN
D: LOOP AT SCREEN
Ans C
____.
B: source code
D: main program
Ans :A

Ans: C

D: AT USER-COMMAND
Ans:C
____.
A: Authorization
C: User profile
Ans: B
D: CALL TRANSACTION
A: MIN
B: ORDER BY
C: DISTINCT
D: DELETE
Ans:C
A: INNER JOIN.
B: LEFT OUTER JOIN.
C: A database view.
Ans:D


D: Nothing.

field2 = counter.
field2 = counter.
field2 = counter.
A: Variants.
B: Matchcodes.
C: Search-helps.
D: Screen-batches.
A: INSERT
B: APPEND
C: COLLECT
D: MODIFY
Ans:D
INITIALIZATION.
concatenate 'IEQ' sy-uname into surname.
A: The field surname will be output in the page header.

B: SELECT-OPTION surname will contain the user name in its from value at
runtime.
C: The user name is set equal to the value contained in field surname.
D: A default value of 'IEQ' is assigned to the PARAMETER surname.
Ans:B
A: Update
B: Batch
C: Enqueue/Dequeue
D: Spool
Ans: D
A: True
B: False
B: END-OF-EVENT.
D: END-EVENT.
A: True
B: False

A: True
B: False
Ans: A
A: SET USER-COMMAND
B: SET PF-STATUS
C: CALL FUNCTION
D: AT USER-COMMAND
Write: /1 'Nice'.
Write: 'job!'.
A: 'X'
A: SE16
B: SE10
C: SE36
D: SE37
A: SKIP.
B: COMMENT.
C: TEXT.
D: FIELD.
Ans:B
A: True
B: False
Ans:B
A: ACCEPTING CASE
B: LOWER CASE
C: UPPER CASE
D: CASE
A: ROWS 50
B: INDEX 50
C: DEFAULT 50
D: INITIAL SIZE 50
Ans: D
A: True
B: False
Ans:A

Ans: C
A: UPDATE
B: MODIFY
C: DELETE
D: INSERT
Ans: D
A: True
B: False
Ans:B
WHERE fld7 = pfld7.
ENDSELECT.


Ans : D
A: AUTH-CHECK
B: AUTHORITY-CHECK
D: AUTHORITY-OBJECT
Ans:B
193. Adding a COMMIT WORK statement between SELECT_ENDSELECT is a good method for
improving performance.
A: True
B: False
Ans:B
following except:

transaction.
Ans:B



Ans:A

SELECT_ENDSELECT.
A: True
B: False
Ans:A
A: Text literal
B: Text variable
C: In-code comment
D: Text integer
write: /1 'Start'.
PERFORM write_next.
write: 'End'.
FORM write_next.
write: 'next'.
EXIT.
write: 'more'.
ENDFORM.
A: Start next
B: Start next more
C: Start next End
D: Start more End
Ans:c
A: READ
B: SELECT
C: GET
D: AT USER-COMMAND
Ans:C

Ans: B
time is called:
A: Message server
B: Instance
C: Gateway
D: Profile
A: True
B: False
A: APPEND
B: MODIFY
C: ADD
D: INSERT
Ans:D
A: ADD.
B: SUM.
C: COUNT.
D: TOT.
A: INTO TABLE
B: UP TO 1 ROWS
C: DISTINCT
D: ORDER BY
Ans:C
A: 0
B: 4
C: 8
D: Null
Ans: A
A: PBO
B: PAI
C: INITIALIZATION
Ans A
A: PBO
B: PAI
C: INITIALIZATION
Ans B

Ans D

B: Exit screen 200.
WHERE fld7 = pfld7.
APPEND itab.
ENDSELECT.

code the following:

Ans:D

D: A PARAMETER.
Ans:B
217. When coding AT FIRST fld1. _ ENDAT.within an internal table loop, you should
avoid using:

C: SUM.
D: WRITE itab-fld1.
Ans B

Ans:A
Ans:B
default values.
A: INITIALIZATION.
B: TOP-OF-PAGE.
D: GET.
Ans:A

Ans:B
A: DATA
B: TYPES
C: PARAMETERS
D: STATICS
Ans:D

C: Saving the table
Ans:D
keyword?

Ans:B
A: ABAP editor
B: ABAP workbench
C: Object list
Ans: B
____.
A: DATA
B: TYPE-GROUPS
C: TYPES
D: DATA-TYPE
Ans:C
A: AT LAST
B: AT NEW
C: ON CHANGE OF
Ans:A
A: Value
B: Value and result
C: Changing
D: Reference
Ans: D

WHERE fld7 = pfld7.
tot = tot + fld4.
ENDSELECT.
A good performance tuning technique would be to change the SELECT statement to use:
A: GROUP-BY.
B: SUM.
C: TOT.
D: MAX.
A: True
B: False
A: INSERT
B: APPEND
C: ALTER
D: MODIFY
Ans: D
A: GET AVERAGE
B: SELECT AVERAGE
C: SELECT AVG
D: COMPUTE AVG
Ans:
statement?

Ans C

Ans: C
A: SE10
B: SE38
C: SE11
D: SE37
Ans:C
A: True
B: False
Ans:A
AT LINE-SELECTION.

Ans:B
238. --------
A: Linked
B: Authorized
C: Released
D: Active
Ans: D

Ans: D
check?

B: IF SY-SUBRC NE 0. EXIT.ENDIF.
Ans:B

Ans:A
screen field, use:
A: MATCHCODE OBJECT
B: MODIF ID
C: DEFAULT
D: MEMORY ID
A: FIRST
B: INITIALIZATION
C: VALUE
D: DEFAULT
Ans: D

C: DELETE itab.
Ans: D
A: True
B: False
Ans: B

FREE itab.
A: 2
B: 0
C: blank
D: 1
Ans: 2
reportzabaprg.

B: He lives at
Ans: B
A: True
B: False
Ans: B
Q1>What is the sys var for:
Date Sy-Datum
Time Sy-UZEIT
Username Sy-UNAME
time ( with time zone) -- sy-timelo
Q2>Which statement triggers TOP OF PAGE event?

WRITE , SKIP
Q3>Which event occurs first?

INITIALIZATION
Q4>What happens after AT SELECTIONSCREEN

VALIDATIONS
Q5> TABLE FOR TRANSACTION codes

TSTC
Q6> Domain and data elements

one domain can have many Data Elements.
One Data Element can have ONE domain.
Q7> which has highest precendence

SEARCH HELP AT SCREEN.
Q8> Default Pass by value in?

RFC
Q9><> means?
Not equal to
Q10> Invalid Data type?

HEX
Q11> loop
Append table
Endloop
ans --> Infinite loop.
Q12>Which event is triggered when 'At Line-Selection'

'PICK' , when there is a double click.
Q13>Progs are
clientindep
clientdep
ans --> client independent
Q14> Default mode for file to open ---

Input mode
Q15>Wht cannot b created from se11 ABAP Data dic

Q16>What is created by the following statement:

R_MANTR for MARA-MANTR
ans -- An internal table with the fields sign,options,low,high
Q17> what occurs in next screen?

Information
Q18> Do....Endo which var?

Sy-index
Q19>For structures like tables must have primary key?

False
Q20>wht does Append and collect do?
Append: Adds a row; collect: may or may not add a row.
Q21> Where can we see the o/p of the background processes?

SP01
Q22> RS-SET-SELECTIONSCREEN-STATUS
it sets the GUI screen's status.
Q23> Instruction to transfer the data from the presentation Server to

Application Server
GUI_Upload
Instruction to transfer the data from the Application Server to

presentation Server
GUI_Download
Q24> Instruction to writefm internal table to file on application
server.
Transfer.
Q25>How can u view the short dump(run time errors)?

st22
Q26> If the value is 03 in the ACTVT table then wht will the user b
allowed to do?
Display
Q27>Which Of the following is client dependent?

LAyout Forms
Q28>ans --> Change In B (fr the ques AT NEW B)
Q29> Select All Entries is used for?

Q 30>Wht is the keyword used in the PARAMETERS

A)Values
B)Value
C)Default
ANS ---- C.
Q31> How can internal tables be accessed?

Sequentially
directly
ans-- both
Q32> Transaction Code for SQL TRACE - ST05.
Q33> Transaction Code for data model -- SD11.
Q34> T000 --- client DATA.
Q35> for writting Native SQL command in SQL --- EXEC and ENDEXEC
Q36> there was a question on AUTHORITY CHECK SYNTAX

FOR FILE ITS AUTHORITY_CHECK_DATASET.
FOR USER ITS AUTHORITY-CHECK.
Q37> Question on Catch and ENd catch something -- for handling run time
errors.
Q38> Transaction variants are ...... for customizing customer

transaction.
Q39) LOck Object -- ansCannot be edited.
Q40) which allocates resources to app server -- dispatcher

Q41) TOP-OF-PAGE DUring Line selection -- stores secondary table
header
Q42) find wrong option -- ans a field of structure can be made as a

foreign key
Q43) find odd one out -- ans -each sap has it's own ABAP memory
Q44) join statement cannot be applied on what table --- cluster table
Q45)stop statement --- takes cntrl to end of selectioin event.
Q46) /h -- debugging command.
.Q47) search help -- Matchcode object
Q48) for getting the client specific data -- use clause CLIENT
SPECIFIED.
Q49) Q7> which has highest precendence

SEARCH HELP AT SCREEN.
Q50) How do u define selection screen of a prog -- interface btw user &
program
Q51) Conversion exit data variable can be attached to -- Domain ( nt

sure)
Q52) BEST PERFORMANCE BY READ STATEMENT CAN BE THROUGH --- HASHED TABLE
Q53) EXIT -- takes u out of current loop.
Q54) precautions while UsingFOr all Entries --- internal table should
have the data.
Q55) primary index is based on primary key field of table

secondary index is created on non-primary field of a table
ans-- both are true.
Q56) to suppress the default title --- NOn-standard header
Q57) Hide option --- retain values.
Q58) paramater ..lower case
ans -- case sensitivity will be there
Q59) system var for time with time zone -- sy-timelo

.
2. What are client dependant objects in abap/sap?

SAP Script layout, text element, and some DDIC objects.
3. On which event we can validate the input fields in module progams?

In PAI (Write field statement on field you want to validate, if you want to validate group
of fields put in chain and End chain statement.)
6. When top of the page event is triggered?

After excuteing first write statement in start-of-selection event.
7. Can we create field without data element and how?

In SE11 one option is available above the fields strip. Data element/ direct type.
8. How do we debug sapscript?

Go to SE71 give lay set name , go to utilities select debugger mode on.
9. Which transaction code can I used to analyze the performance of ABAP

program.
TCode se30.
10. How can I copy a standard table to make my own z_table.

Go to transaction SE11. Then there is one option to copy table. Press that button. Enter
the name of the standard table and in the Target table enter Z table name and press enter.
1. What is the use of 'outerjoin'

Ans. With the use of outer join you can join the tables even there is no entry in all the
tables used in the view.
In case of inner join there should be an entry in al the tables use in the view.
2. When to use logical database?

Ans. Advantage of Logical databases:
less coding s required to retrieve data compared to normal internel tables.
Tables used LDB are in hierarchial structure.
3. What is the use of 'table index'?

Ans .Index is used for faster access of data base tables.
4. What is the use of 'FOR ALL ENTRIES'?

Ans. To avoid nested select statements we use SELECT FOR ALL ENTRIES statement.
If there r more than 10000 records SELECT FOR ALL ENTRIES is used.
Performance wise SELECT FOR ALL ENTRIES is better to use.
5. Can you set up background processing using CALL TRANSACTION?

Yes,Using No Screen Mode.
6. What are table buffers?
Table buffers reside locally on each application server in the system. The data of
buffered tables can thus be accessed directly from the buffer of the application server.
This avoids the time-consuming process of accessing the database.
Buffering is useful if table needs to be accessed more no. of times in a program.
1. How do I set a flag for a field in any table?

Create a char field of length 1. for example field STAS-LKENZ is Deletion Indicator. It
means that if the value in the field is 'X' then that record has been deleted.
1. What is the typical structure of an ABAP/4 program?

ANS:-
HEADER ,BODY,FOOTER.
2. What are field symbols .?
ANS:-
3. What should be the approach for writing a BDC program?

ANS:-
STEP 1: CONVERTING THE LEGACY SYSTEM DATA TO A FLAT FILE to internal
table CALLED "CONVERSION".
STEP 2: TRANSFERING THE FLAT FILE INTO SAP SYSTEM CALLED "SAP
DATA TRANSFER".
STEP 3: DEPENDING UPON THE BDC TYPE i)call transaction(Write the program
explicity)
ii) create sessions (sessions are created and processed.if success data will transfer).
4. What is a batch input session?

ANS:-
BATCH INPUT SESSION is an intermediate step between internal table and database
table.
Data along with the action is stored in session ie data for screen fields, to which screen it
is passed,program name behind it, and how next screen is processed.
5. What is the alternative to batch input session?

ANS:-
Call transaction.
6. A situation: An ABAP program creates a batch input session.

We need to submit the program and the batch session in back ground. How to do
it?
ANS:-
go to SM36 and create background job by giving
job name,job class and job steps (JOB SCHEDULING)
10. What are the different types of data dictionary objects?

ans:-
tables, structures, views, domains, data elements, lock objects, Matchcode objects.
11. How many types of tables exists and what are they in data dictionary?
ans :-
4 types of tables
i)Transparent tables - Exists with the same structure both in dictionary as well as in
database exactly with the same data and fields. Both Opensql and Nativesql can be used.
ii)Pool tables & iii)Cluster tables -

These are logical tables that are arranged as records of transparent tables.one cannot use
native sql on these tables
(only opensql).They are not managable directly using database system tools.
iv)Internal tables - .
13. Can a transparent table exist in data dictionary but not in the data base
physically?
ANS:- NO.
TRANSPARENT TABLE DO EXIST WITH THE SAME STRUCTURE BOTH IN
THE DICTIONARY AS WELL AS IN THE DATABASE,EXACTLY WITH THE
SAME DATA AND FIELDS.
14. What are the domains and data elements?

ANS:-
DOMAINS : FORMAL DEFINITION OF THE DATA TYPES.THEY SET
ATTRIBUTES SUCH AS DATA TYPE,LENGTH,RANGE.
DATA ELEMENT : A FIELD IN R/3 SYSTEM IS A DATA ELEMENT.
15. Can you create a table with fields not referring to data elements?
ANS:-
YES. eg:- ITAB LIKE SPFLI.here we are referening to a data object(SPFLI) not data
element.
16. What is the advantage of structures? How do you use them in the ABAP
programs?
ANS:-
Adv:- GLOBAL EXISTANCE(these could be used by any other program without
creating it again).
18. What is a collect statement? How is it different from append?
ANS:-
If an entry with the same key already exists, the COLLECT statement does not append a
new line, but adds the contents of the numeric fields in the work area to the contents of
the numeric fields in the existing entry.
19. What is open sql vs native sql?
Open SQL , native SQL are the interfaces to create the database applicatons.
Open SQL is consistant across different types of existing Databases.
Native SQL is the database language specific to database.Its API is specific to the
databse.
Open SQL API is consistent across all vendors
20. What does an EXEC SQL stmt do in ABAP? What is the disadvantage of using
it?
ANS:-
22. What are the events in ABAP/4 language?

ANS:-
Initialization, At selection-screen,Start-of-selection,end-of-selection,top-of-page,end-of-
page, At line-selection,At user-command,At PF,Get,At New,At LAST,AT END, AT
FIRST.
27. What is a function group?

ANS:-
GROUP OF ALL RELATED FUNCTIONS.
28. How are the date and time field values stored in SAP?
ANS:-
DD.MM.YYYY. HH:MM:SS
30. Name a few data dictionary objects? //rep//

ANS:-
TABLES,VIEWS,STRUCTURES,LOCK OBJECTS,MATCHCODE OBJECTS.
31. What happens when a table is activated in DD?

ANS:-
It is available for any insertion,modification and updation of records by any user.
32. What is a check table and what is a value table?

Check table will be at field level checking.
Value table will be at domain level checking ex: scarr table is check table for carrid.
37. What are select options and what is the diff from parameters?
ANS:-
38. How do you validate the selection criteria of a report?

And how do you display initial values in a selection screen?
ANS:-
validate :- by using match code objects.
display :- Parameters <name> default 'xxx'.
select-options <name> for spfli-carrid.
39. What are selection texts?

ANS:-
44. Name a few system global variables you can use in ABAP programs?
ANS:-
SY-SUBRC,SY-DBCNT,SY-LILLI,SY-DATUM,SY-UZEIT,SY-UCOMM,SY-
TABIX.....
SY-LILLI IS ABSOLUTE NO OF LINES FROM WHICH THE EVENT WAS
TRIGGERED.
45. What are internal tables? How do you get the number of lines in an internal
table?
How to use a specific number occurs statement?
ANS:-
i)It is a standard data type object which exists only during the runtime of the program.
They are used to perform table calculations on subsets of database tables and for re-
organising the contents of database tables according to users need.
ii)using SY-DBCNT.
iii)The number of memory allocations the system need to allocate for the next record
population.
46. How do you take care of performance issues in your ABAP programs?
Performance of ABAPs can be improved by minimizing the amount of data to be
transferred.
The data set must be transferred through the network to the applications, so reducing the
amount OF time and also reduces the network traffic.
Some measures that can be taken are:
- Use views defined in the ABAP/4 DDIC (also has the advantage of better reusability).
- Use field list (SELECT clause) rather than SELECT *.
- Range tables should be avoided (IN operator)
- Avoid nested SELECTS.
i)system tools
ii)field symbols and field groups.
ans:-
Field Symbols : Field symbols are placeholders for existing fields. A Field Symbol does
not physically reserve space for a field,but points to a field which is not known until
runtime of the program.
eg:- FIELD-SYMBOL <FS> [<TYPE>].
Field groups : A field group combines several fields under one name.At runtime,the
INSERT command is used to define which data fields are assigned to which field group.
There should always be a HEADER field group that defines how the extracted data will
be sorted,the data is sorted by the fields grouped under the HEADER field group.
47. What are datasets?

ANS:-
The sequential files(ON APPLICATION SERVER) are called datasets. They are used for
file handling in SAP.
48. How to find the return code of a statement in ABAP programs?

ANS:-
Using function modules.
49. What are interface/conversion programs in SAP?

ANS :
CONVERSION : LEGACY SYSTEM TO FLAT FILE.
INTERFACE : FLAT FILE TO SAP SYSTEM.
50. Have you used SAP supplied programs to load master data?
51. What are the techniques involved in using SAP supplied programs?
Do you prefer to write your own programs to load master data? Why?
52. What are logical databases? What are the advantages/disadvantages of logical
databases?
ANS:-
To read data from a database tables we use logical database.
A logical database provides read-only access to a group of related tables to an ABAP/4
program.
adv:-
The programmer need not worry about the primary key for each table.Because Logical
database knows how the different tables relate to each other,and can issue the SELECT
command with proper where clause to retrieve the data.
i)An easy-to-use standard user interface.
ii)check functions which check that user input is complete,correct,and plausible.
iii)meaningful data selection.
iv)central authorization checks for database accesses.
v)good read access performance while retaining the hierarchical data view determined by
the application logic.
disadv:-
i)If you donot specify a logical database in the program attributes,the GET events never
occur.
ii)There is no ENDGET command,so the code block associated with an event ends with
the next event
statement (such as another GET or an END-OF-SELECTION).
53. What specific statements do you using when writing a drill down report?
ans:-
AT LINE-SELECTION,AT USER-COMMAND,AT PF.
54. What are different tools to report data in SAP? What all have you used?
ans:-
55. What are the advantages and disadvantages of ABAP/4 query tool?
56. What are the functional areas? User groups? and how does ABAP/4 query work
in relation to these?
57. Is a logical database a requirement/must to write an ABAP/4 query?
59. What are Change header/detail tables? Have you used them?
60. What do you do when the system crashes in the middle of a BDC batch session?
ans:-
we will look into the error log file (SM35).
61. What do you do with errors in BDC batch sessions?

ANS:-
We look into the list of incorrect session and process it again. To correct incorrect session
we analyize the session to determine which screen and value produced the error.For small
errors in data we correct them interactively otherwise
modify batch input program that has generated the session or many times even the
datafile.
62. How do you set up background jobs in SAP? What are the steps? What are the
event driven batch jobs?
ans:-
go to SM36 and create background job by giving job name,job class and job steps(JOB
SCHEDULING)
63. Is it possible to run host command from SAP environment? How do you run?
65. Does SAP handle multiple currencies? Multiple languages?
ans:-
Yes.
68. What is SAPscript and layout set?

ans:-
The tool which is used to create layout set is called SAPscript. Layout set is a design
document.
71. What are IDOCs?

ans:-
IDOCs are intermediate documents to hold the messages as a container.
72. What are screen painter? menu painter? Gui status? ..etc.
ans:-
dynpro - flow logic + screens.
menu painter -
GUI Status - It is subset of the interface elements(title bar,menu bar,standard tool
bar,push buttons) used for a certain screen.
The status comprises those elements that are currently needed by the transaction.
83. What are the general naming conventions of ABAP programs?

ANS:-
Should start with Y or Z.
91. What are the different elements in layout sets?

ans:-
PAGES,Page windows,Header,Paragraph,Character String,Windows.
92. Can you use if then else, perform ..etc statements in sap script?
ans:-
yes.
104. What is the structure of a BDC sessions.

ans:-
BDCDATA (standard structure).
105. What are the fields in a BDC_Tab Table.

ans:-
program,dynpro,dynbegin,fnam,fval.
Different kind of foreign key
 2
 6
 3
 5
 4
Which of the following are the fields of structure BDBMSGOLL

 Message ID
 TCode
 MSGV1
 Message type
 All
Which of the following statement is not true regarding an Abstract class

 An abstract class can never be instantiated.
 It specifies one or more Abstract methods that must be implemented in the subclass
 It is used as means to enforce a uniform interface in subclasses
 None
Tcode to access the translation tools

 Se93
 Se61
 Se63
 Se91
What are field symbols?

a) Field symbols are like pointers in C that can point to any data object in ABAP/4 and to
structures defined in ABAP/4 dictionary.
b) Field symbols have to be created with type specifications only.
c) You cannot assign one field symbol to another.
d) All operations you have programmed with the field symbol are carried out with the assigned
field.
e) All
If COLLECT is used on internal table, which has a non-key character field,
 The first record’s value is used in the collected version.

 Cannot be predicted.
 Compilation error. (non-key fields must be numeric)...
 The last record’s value is used in the collected version.
Tcode for table maintenance

 SM30
The start of an SAP Transaction also marks the start of what?
a) DB LUW
b) Asynchronous Update
c) SAP LUW
d) Commit Point
13) What is a SAP LUW:

a) a modularised unit in ABAP programs
b) all the updates for 1 SAP transaction
c) a logical grouping of database updates that should all be performed at the same time
d) the section of program code from setting a lock until it is released
e) all actions between first and last database update in transaction

a) internal system session opened for B
c) Data from A can be accessed in B
d) A can pass data to B with export
e) A can pass data using SET
13) Describe statement on internal tables is used to

 Find the number of lines currently in table
 Find initial size of the table.
 Find type of internal table.
14) Where will you validate the entries?

 PBO
 PAI
 Both
15) In which sequence events in ABAP program gets executed?
classical report sequence
 initialization
 at selection-screen
 at selection screen on (output,value request,help request)
 start of selection
 end of selection
 top of page
 end of page
interactive reports sequence
 at line-selection
 at user command
 at PF-nn
16) How many different type of windows in smartforms?
Types of windows in smartforms :

 Main
 Secodary
 copies windows
 Final window
17) Which of the following are true?

a) TABLE is used as a synonym for STANDARD TABLE
b) You can only access a hashed table using the generic key operations. Explicit or implicit
index operations (such as LOOP ... FROM or INSERT itab within a LOOP) are not
allowed.
c) All hashed tables are index tables.
d) We have to define the hash procedure explicitly for HASHED TABLE.
e) a and b are correct

a) internal system session opened for B
c) Data from A can be accessed in B d) A can pass data to B with export
e) A can pass data using SET
19) Program ans

 123
20) In smart forms how many MAIN window you can define.
 0
 98
 1
 99
Only one main window per smart forms. But you can have 99 sub-windows.
21).How do you save data in BDC tables and What is the last entry in all BDC tables?
In all BDC tables the last entry is to save the data by using the field name BDC_OKCODE and a
field value of ‘/11’.
22) Debug sapscript using
 Utilities -> Activate debugger
23) Program type for dialog program.

 M
24) Which one of these allow you to derive a new class from an existing class?
 Polymorphism
 Inheritance
 Encapsulation
 None
25) ABAP doesn’t support which of the following concept of OOPS.

 Polymorphism
 Inheritance
 Encapsulation.
 Multiple Inheritance.
26) In a ABAP program, the initialization event is invoked

 Cannot be predicted.
 After AT-SELECTION-SCREEN event.
 Could be either way
 Before the AT-SELECTION-SCREEN
27). At what point does the standard selection screen (as a result of a select-options) get
displayed
a) After Initialization event
b) Before the Report Statement
c) At Start-of-Selection event
d) Prior to Initialization event
28) Which of the following option cannot be called remotely?

 BAPI
 rFC FM
 Normal FM
29) The ____ type of ABAP Dictionary view consists of one or more transparent tables
A: Database view
B: Projection view
C: Help view
D: Entity view
Ans: B -> A
30) How many screen type is there in screen painter?

4
 Selection screen
 Sub screen
 Model Dialog box ( pop up)
 Normal screen.
31) TCode for SAP Script form?
SE71
32) To output SAPscript layout sets, in the print program

a) You must always start the output with OPEN_FORM and end it with CLOSE_FORM.
b) Within one transaction, you can use only one OPEN_FORM and CLOSE_FORM to open and
close a layout set.
c) WRITE_FORM should be used within an OPEN_FORM and CLOSE_FORM.
d) WRITE_FORM can be used without an OPEN_FORM and CLOSE_FORM.
33) Different types of joins in abap statement.

 Self join
 Inner join
 Outer join
 Equi Join
 All of the above.
34) When creating a transparent table in the ABAP Dictionary, which step automatically creates
the table in the underlying database?
 A: Adding technical settings to the table
 B: Checking the table syntax
 C: Saving the table
 D: Activating the table
35) What are presentation and application servers in SAP?
A) Application server is actually a program name sapgui.exe. It is usually installed on user’s

workstation.
B) Application server is a set of executable that collectively interpret the ABAP/4 program and
manage the input and output for them.
C) Presentation server is actually a program name sapgui.exe. It is usually installed on user’s
workstation.
D) A and C
E) B and C
36) Is smartforms and smart styles are client independent?
Yes
37) TCode used for analysis during program execution?
SE30

Sap Abap Stream

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sap Abap Stream

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sap Abap Stream

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the different types of tables in SAP?

What are the different types of tables in SAP?

What are the main events an interactive report can have?

What are the main events an interactive report can have?

1 Full Buffering would be appropriate for

2 What is the basic object of data Dictionary

3 Search help can not be attach to:

4 Sub query usually more efficient because:

5 It is better to buffer a table when

6 In Inner and outter join

7 What is invalid attribute of a domain

8 Data element is an example of

10 Command flushes the database buffers

11 How many lists can exist in parallel in an interactive reporting?

13.What are presentation and application servers in SAP? (Multiple Answer)

16.How many types of tables exist in data dictionary? (Multiple Answer)

18.Is Session Method, Asynchronous or Synchronous?

20. Which data type cannot be used to define parameters.

1. TCode for Layout set?

2. Other names for layout set?

3. TCode for Menu Painter?

4. TCode for Screen Painter?

5. TCode for Standard text element creation?

6. TCode for global class builder?

7. Table containing standard texts?

8. Difference between printer modes (Simplex, Duplex and Tumbled Duplex).

14. Superscripts and Subscripts are used in?

15. Mandatory basic settings for a SAP Script?

17. Output of the given loop:

19. System variable for current Screen Number?

20. Table for print programs and SAP Script names?

22. TCode for Transaction Variant?

24. SAP Scripts are used to -

25. TCode to define Barcode?

27. Program to Import and Export Sap Scripts

29. Setting Screen attribute REQUEST does what?

30. Setting screen attribute ACTIVE as 0 is equal to what?

33. TCode for searching BAPI?

34. TCode for Workbench Organizer?

35. What does TCode SE01 stands for?

36. TCode for saving SQL Trace into a local PC?

37. Different types of traces available.

38. Static screen sequence can be achieved through:

39. How to exit the List Processing?

40. Program to process BDC Sessions in background?

ANS SEARCH HELP AT FIELD LEVEL.

2 Wht cannot b created from se11 ABAP Data dic

3 For structures like tables must have primary key?

4 Where can we see the o/p of the background processes?

5 How can u view the short dump(run time errors)?

6 Which Of the following is client dependent?

7 Select All Entries is used for?

8 Invalid Data type?

10 TABLE FOR TRANSACTION codes

14 An ABP report is selecting data from MARA and stroring in GT_MARA.

15 A table T000 contains

16 conversion exit of a data variable is attached to

17 what are diff data we store in SAP system?

18 Transaction variants are: